JP7458544B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming table with a distinctive panel. [Solution] The gaming table is equipped with a light-transmitting panel, and the light-transmitting panel has a smooth first area and a rough second area on the front surface, and the second area is provided along the edge of the light-transmitting panel. [Selected Figure] Fig. 67

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, game machines equipped with panels have been widely known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-237513

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the panels.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine whose panel has characteristics.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties, and includes a decorative sheet, and the light-transmitting panel has a first area and a second area on the front side. The surface of the second area is rougher than that of the first area, and the second area is provided along the edge of the transparent panel, and the second area has a rougher surface than the first area . The decorative sheet is smaller than the transparent panel, and the decorative sheet is located at a position behind the transparent panel that overlaps at least a portion of the first area and at least a portion of the second area. The decorative sheet is visible from the front through the transparent panel, and the decorative sheet has a first display and a second display, and the first display is placed in a position that overlaps at least a portion of the second area, the second display is placed in a position that does not overlap with the second area, and the first display is The gaming machine is characterized in that the character display is a character display, and the second display is a caution display .
Further, the game machine is equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties, and includes a decorative sheet, and the light-transmitting panel has a first area and a second area on the front side, The surface of the second area is rougher than that of the first area, the second area is provided along the edge of the transparent panel, and the decorative sheet has a rougher surface than the first area. The decorative sheet is smaller than the light panel, and is arranged behind the light-transmitting panel at a position overlapping at least a portion of the first area and at least a portion of the second area, and the decorative sheet The sheet is visible from the front through the transparent panel, and the decorative sheet has a first display and a second display, and the first display is different from the second display. The second display is placed at a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the area, the second display is placed at a position that does not overlap with the second area, the first display is a character display, and the second display is placed at a position that does not overlap with the second area. The second display is a game machine characterized by an intellectual property related display.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with distinctive panels.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door open. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a winning line of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and a diagram showing an operation of a liquid crystal display device. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a table showing the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content of a part of the winning combinations (mainly the pushing combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing the transition winning probability of the pullback zone transition lottery, and (b) is a diagram showing the AT winning probability of the AT lottery in the pullback zone executed in the pullback zone. It is a graph showing an example of an increase/decrease in the number of difference sheets when passing through a pullback zone. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. A second sub-control unit main process, a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and a second sub-control unit image control process of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a flow. FIG. 2 is a diagram for pointing out a problem in an example of a conventional slot machine in which a continuous performance is started and then the slot machine shifts to an AT state. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing a detailed timing chart of the N+2G and N+3G times explained using FIG. 14(a), and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a detailed timing chart of the N+2G and N+3G times explained using FIG. 14(b) and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. 7 is a diagram showing detailed timing charts for the N+2G and N+3G times in which an irregular press was performed but no penalty occurred, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where an irregular press is performed during a continuous performance and an example of a case where an irregular press is performed during a non-continuous performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the ceiling counter and the game number display GMV when a setting change is made or when the power is restored after a power outage. (a) is a schematic diagram of the case where a penalty occurs during continuous performance, as explained so far, and (b) shows an example of display of the game number display GMV when a penalty occurs, as explained so far. (c1) is a conceptual diagram of an example in which a standby game is performed when a penalty occurs during continuous performance, unlike the previous examples, and (c2) is a conceptual diagram of an example in which a penalty occurs during continuous performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example in which a standby game different from that shown in FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a plurality of examples of the display mode of the operation recommendation display REC displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where an error display ERR is displayed while a recommended operation display REC is displayed, or a case where power is restored after power interruption occurs. 13A is a diagram showing winning combination data stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the advantageous zone transition process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an instruction monitor controlled by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the winning combination data shown to Fig.23 (a). It is a figure which shows the example which after the continuous performance is performed, the final announcement performance is performed and it shifts to an AT state. It is a figure explaining the flow of this precursor performance in the case of transitioning from a normal state (non-AT state) to an AT state. It is a figure explaining the flow of the gaze warning effect performed in a normal state (non-AT state). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a sense of expectation effect is performed and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing a case where a penalty occurs at the 100th G when a sense of anticipation effect is performed, and a diagram showing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. A diagram to explain the anticipation effect and the small win icon announcement effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation response effect when a recommended press and an irregular press are respectively performed during execution of the operation promotion effect. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is not performed after a confirmed performance and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed after a confirmed performance and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. (a) A diagram showing an example of an old man's dialogue production, which is one of the anticipation production. (b) A diagram showing an example of a princess effect, which is one of the anticipation effects. (a) It is a diagram showing a modified example of an old man's dialogue production, which is one of the anticipation production. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a minor role icon announcement performance, which is one of the anticipation effects. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed in stage A and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed in stage B and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel in a slot machine according to a second embodiment. (a) is a table showing all the internal winning combinations in the slot machine of the second embodiment, and (b) is a table showing the realized combination of the push order bell combination and the number of coins paid out for each operation content. (a) is a diagram showing a table selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the pressing order award award determination process, and (c) is a diagram showing two types of It is a figure which shows each additional number determination table. It is a figure which shows the state of a push order guessing game. A diagram to explain a modified example of the push order guessing game. It is a diagram for explaining a pseudo game. 13 is a diagram showing a planar expansion of the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the slot machine of the third embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing in the slot machine of 3rd Embodiment. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo game related processing in step S128 shown in FIG. 46. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of reel rotation start processing of the pseudo game in step S1282 shown in FIG. 47. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in step S1283 shown in FIG. A flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo next game start processing in step S1284 shown in Figure 47. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S133 shown in FIG. 46. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the flow of random delayed rotation start processing in step S1336 shown in FIG. 51. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of the bonus award lottery process in step S143 shown in FIG. 46. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo game reservation processing in step S145 shown in FIG. 46. FIG. In a reserved game, a recommended operation is performed while a rare combination has been internally won, and in the next game, a pseudo game is executed and the BB symbol is successfully stopped, and a push order navigation is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a flow in which a state) is started. This figure shows the flow in which, during a reserved game, an internal win for a rare role was achieved, but an irregular operation was performed, and although a pseudo game was executed in the next game, it was a fake pseudo game, and the actual game began without transitioning to the AT state. This is a continuation from FIG. 56, and in the main game following the pseudo game, a recommended operation is performed, and in the second reserved game, a pseudo game with pseudo game number 3 is reserved, and the BB symbol is pseudo-stopped in that pseudo game. It is a diagram showing a flow of starting a BB game (AT state) in which the push order navigation is executed successfully. It is a diagram showing the flow of the game when a recommended push is performed and when an irregular push is performed in a reserved game. It is a diagram showing the flow of a game when an irregular push is performed every time a reserved game is played. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. (a) It is an exploded perspective view showing main members constituting a panel unit 750 in an exploded manner. (b) It is an external perspective view of the panel unit 750 seen from the front side. (c) It is an external perspective view of the panel unit 750 seen from the back side. (a) It is a side view of the panel unit 750. (b) is a perspective view of the appearance of the panel unit 750 with the panel 652 removed, as seen diagonally from below. (c) It is an external perspective view of the same state seen obliquely from above. (a) It is a front view of panel unit 750. (b) A side sectional view taken along line AA shown in (a) and an enlarged view of the main parts thereof. (c) It is a partially enlarged view showing the panel unit 750 attached to the upper production unit 650, with the panel 652 not shown. FIG. 11 is a front view of a slot machine 1100 according to a fifth embodiment when viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the members constituting the lower panel unit 800 in an exploded manner. 8A is a front view of a cover member 812, showing an example of a smooth area 812aF and a rough area 812aS of a main body 812a; FIG. 8B is a front view showing an example of a decorative sheet 830; 11 is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between a slot machine 1100 and a player USR.

The following describes an embodiment of the present invention with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 3(a) is a diagram showing the winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed at equal intervals on a band-shaped member, and this band-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 110 to 112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through reel windows 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. To explain this in detail using FIG. 3(a), the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 2 in the figure; also called symbol position 2) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the center reel 111 (position 4 in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is the center reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the center reel 111 (position 5 in the figure; also called symbol position 5) is the center reel middle symbol, The symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 111 (position 6 in the figure; also called symbol position 6) are called the middle reel lower row symbols, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the figure; also called symbol position 7) are called the right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) are called the right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure; also called symbol position 9) are called the right reel lower row symbols, and three symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically through the reel window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that the player can see changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of symbols of multiple types. In addition, as the display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be used in addition to the reels. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

In this embodiment, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line that is set at the stop position of symbols that are visible through the reel window 113, and is the line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. . This winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 3(a). A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet machine, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, the winning line 114 is not activated, and when the number of inserted medals is three, the winning line 114 is not activated. 114 becomes valid. When the winning line 114 becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

The pay lines (winning lines) are not limited to the one middle winning line L1 described above, but may be, for example, one upper pay line consisting of the upper pattern of the left reel (pattern position 1), the upper pattern of the middle reel (pattern position 4), and the upper pattern of the right reel (pattern position 7), or one lower pay line consisting of the lower pattern of the left reel (pattern position 3), the lower pattern of the middle reel (pattern position 6), and the lower pattern of the right reel (pattern position 9). Also, it may be one right-downward pay line consisting of the upper pattern of the left reel (pattern position 1), the middle pattern of the middle reel (pattern position 5), and the lower pattern of the right reel (pattern position 9), or one right-upward pay line consisting of the lower pattern of the left reel (pattern position 3), the middle pattern of the middle reel (pattern position 5), and the upper pattern of the right reel (pattern position 7). Also, there may be one irregular effective line consisting of the middle symbol of the left reel (symbol position 2), the middle symbol of the middle reel (symbol position 5), and the upper symbol of the right reel (symbol position 7). The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-downward winning line consisting of the upper symbol of the left reel, the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the lower symbol of the right reel, and a right-upward winning line consisting of the lower symbol of the left reel, the middle symbol of the middle reel, and the upper symbol of the right reel, totaling three lines, may be set as effective winning lines, and the number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as effective winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the

The medal insertion buttons (also called bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is also called a bet operation, and the bet button 132 is also called a MAX bet button. In this embodiment, a light-emitting body (called a bet button lamp) is provided inside the bet buttons 130 to 132, and when the bet buttons 130 to 132 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to notify the player. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the lamps in the number corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 is turned on to notify that the game start operation is possible.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are configured as seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 that are composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137-139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Additionally, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation will be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation will be referred to as the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning will be referred to as the operation sequence or push order. The operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "forward push operation sequence" or simply "forward push", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the right reel 112 is called the "forward sandwich", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "middle push operation sequence" or simply "middle push", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the second stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push", and the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the second stop reel is the left reel 110 is called the "reverse sandwich". In this embodiment, an illuminator (called a stop button lamp) is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137-139, and when the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, the illuminator is lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is an outlet for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162. The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A title panel 160 and a sound hole 143 are provided at the top of the front door 102.

A liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 is provided in an area including the reel window 113 and its surroundings. Of these, the area inside the reel window 113 (the area covering the reel window 113) is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal that allows the reels 110 to 112 to be viewed through the reel window 113.

The PUSH button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the PUSH button 192, the history of the number of acquired coins in the AT state can be displayed. In this embodiment, a light emitting body (referred to as a PUSH button lamp) is provided inside the PUSH button 192, and when the PUSH button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the light emitting body is turned on. The player can be notified by letting the player know.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, there is a first sub-control board that stores therein a first sub-control board constituting the first sub-control unit 400. A board storage case 220 is provided. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

The medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110-112, a power supply device 252 having a power board is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when it is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and a second sub-control board constituting the second sub-control unit 500 is housed above the liquid crystal display device 157. A second sub-board case 230 and an upper speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2, the liquid crystal display device 157 includes a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A equipped with a color filter, and a backlight 157B that illuminates the color liquid crystal panel 157A with white light from the back side. It is a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal panel 157A is a rectangular panel that extends to both the inner region and the outer region of the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be used. The liquid crystal panel 157A includes, for example, R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, and also has a liquid crystal between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, pixel electrodes, etc. are formed. A liquid crystal layer is formed by enclosing the liquid crystal layer, and this liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between polarizing plates. Although the liquid crystal panel 157A indicating the winning line may be of a normally white type, it is of a normally black type in this embodiment.

The backlight 157B includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate, an optical member such as a diffusion sheet, and the like. The light source is arranged, for example, along the edge of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In the case of this embodiment, the backlight 157 has an opening 157b formed in the inner region of the reel window 113 and penetrating in the thickness direction of the reel window 113. is visible. In this embodiment, backlights provided in each of the reels 110 to 112 are used to illuminate the portion where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap from behind. Since the reel band has a white color (or a milky white color), each reel 1 has illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157.
10 to 112, and the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 may be a part of the backlight 157 or the entirety thereof may be referred to as a backlight unit.

In the case of this embodiment, the opening 157b is a single rectangle whose outline matches the reel window 113, but three openings corresponding to the reels 110 to 112 are arranged so as to fill the gaps between the reels 110 to 112. It may also be a rectangle. The clarity of images displayed in the gaps between reels can be improved.

By blocking the transmission of light in the liquid crystal panel 157A, it appears to the player that a black image is being displayed. Furthermore, by transmitting backlight light equally in R, G, and B, it appears to the player that a white image is being displayed. Displaying a white image can also be said to be a state in which the transparency of the liquid crystal panel 157A is increased, and when R, G, and B are each controlled to the maximum brightness, the light transmittance is the highest. It can be said that it is a state. The display of black, white, or other colors can be controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The operation of this liquid crystal display device 157 will be explained using FIGS. 3(b) to 3(d). This figure is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 3(b) shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 when power is not supplied to the slot machine 100. As described above, in the case of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 157 is a normally black type liquid crystal display, and when the power is off, it appears to the player that a black image is displayed, and the reels 110 - 112 is in a state where it is difficult to see.

FIG. 3C shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157. This figure shows that the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display images. At this time, in the area inside the reel window 113, light etc. from the reels 110 to 112 serve as a backlight, and the image on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes visible in this area. However, due to the image display on the liquid crystal display device 157, the visibility of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is reduced (they become difficult to see).

FIG. 3(d) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 that is different from that shown in FIG. 3(c). In this figure, the area inside the reel window 113 is different from the example in (c) above. Specifically, by displaying a white image in the area inside the reel window 113, visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured. In this embodiment, this state occurs after medals are inserted within one game. That is, in order to ensure the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, the state shown in FIG. 3(d) is maintained at least from the start to the stop of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

In an example of the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 157, which will be described later, the effect is displayed on a portion of the liquid crystal panel 157A above the reel window 113.

Note that a stored number display section 125L is provided on the left side of the reel window 113, and a payout number display section 127L is provided on the opposite right side. The stored number display section 125L displays the same value as the stored number displayed on the stored number display 125, and the payout number display section 127L displays the same value as the payout number displayed on the payout number display 127. be done.

As described above, in this embodiment, a region is provided for the liquid crystal display device 157 to cover the reel window 113, and a white image is displayed to make the reels 110 to 112 visible, and an image other than white is displayed. In this case, the visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is reduced. In order to improve the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, it is possible to set the transmittance of each pixel that makes up the image of the area covering the reel window 113, and the transmittance is set to 100% (transparent state). You can.

The device that displays the images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Note that Fig. 4 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. However, in this embodiment, data is stored in a non-volatile manner. A ROM, which is a storage device that has a storage area for temporarily storing data, and a RAM, which is a storage device that has a storage area that temporarily stores data, are used together.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupts is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316 which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 which outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, the PUSH button 192 sensor, etc.) are monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130-132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and turn to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it turns to L level until it turns to L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 339 (notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal input possible lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button 137 to 139 lamps, PUSH button lamp, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 423, and the CPU 404 monitors the detection result of the door sensor 421 that detects the opening of the front door 102.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 5. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell symbol,” the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “replay symbol,” and the number 1 piece on the right reel 112 has a “watermelon 1 symbol.” "Designs" are arranged respectively.

In addition, the "Blue Seven 2 pattern" and "Watermelon 2 pattern" are marked with a star mark, but this means that the "Blue Seven 2 pattern" and "Watermelon 2 pattern" are the same as the "Blue Seven 1 pattern" and the "Watermelon 2 pattern". It has a similar design to "Watermelon 1 Design", but it means that it is a different design (also referred to as the same type of design). ``Similar designs'' include cases where the drawn characters are the same but have different facial expressions, or the drawn objects (watermelons) are the same but have different patterns. In this embodiment, a star mark is attached to make it easier to distinguish between similar patterns.

<Type of winning role>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a replay combination (replay) and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the replay combination (replay) is a replay combination that allows replaying without inserting new medals, and is distinguished from the winning combination and may be called an "activation combination". . In this embodiment, "winning" includes a case where a symbol combination of an active combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. included.

A replay role (replay) is a winning role (activation role) that allows you to play a game in the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize. Games can be played, and medals are not paid out. A small winning combination is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning.

The winning combination in a game is one of the combinations that correspond to the internal winning combinations. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal winning combination lottery) at the start of the game.

FIG. 6(a) is a diagram collectively showing the internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1.

The probability of winning an internal winning role is calculated by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each internal winning role by the numerical data (65536 in this embodiment) in the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described below. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each internal winning role and loss. In the winning role internal lottery process described below, it is determined whether the random number obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any of the internal winning roles, and the internal winning role is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared in settings 1 to 6, each of which has a different probability of winning at least one internal winning role, and the staff of the game arcade can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings.

Regarding the setting values, the probability of winning the internal winning role may be common to each setting value, while the probability of winning the AT (ease of transitioning to the AT), which will be described later, may be different for settings 1 to 6. For example, in setting 1, the probability of drawing the AT when a certain internal winning role is determined may be probability A, while in setting 6, the probability of drawing the AT when a certain internal winning role is determined may be probability B, which is higher than probability A.

In FIG. 6(a), the range of lottery data (lottery value) is indicated by alphabets. Replay 4 to Replay 7 are all marked with (g), which means that the lottery values are the same. For example, (g)=3000/65535. (m) is shown in 1-card combinations 1 to 1-card combinations 8, which also indicates that the lottery values are the same. Bell CLR1 to Bell RCL3 are all marked with (n), which also indicates that the lottery values are the same.

The relationship between lottery values indicated by alphabets is (a) + (b) + (c) + (d) < (e) + (f) + (g) + (h) + (i) + (j) + ( The relationship is k) + (l) + (m) + (n).

Note that the watermelon and cherry roles are rare roles with small lottery values.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, the internal winning combination (condition device) of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 6(b).

FIG. 6(b) is a table showing the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content of the common bell and the push order combination among the internal winning combinations. The push order combination refers to an internal winning combination in which the winning combination (display format of the reels 110 to 112) differs depending on the content of the stop operation (in this embodiment, the order of operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation). say.

In this embodiment, (1) the stopping operation of the left middle right (the stopping operation in which the first stopping reel is the left reel 110, the second stopping reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stopping reel is the right reel 112) is performed by LCR. operation, (2) LRC operation for the left/right middle (stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111), (3) middle CLR operation for the left and right (stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112), (4) the middle right and left (the first stop reel is the (5) CRL operation for the stop operation of the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110. RLC operation for stopping operation (2 stop reel is left reel 110, 3rd stop reel is middle reel 111), (6) right center left (1st stop reel is right reel 112, 2nd stop reel is middle reel) The stopping operation of the reel 111 and the stopping operation in which the third stopping reel is the left reel 110 is sometimes referred to as an RCL operation.

For example, when the push order bells CLR1 to CLR3 are internally selected in the internal lottery for winning roles, (1) if an LCR or LRC operation is performed, a miss or 1-coin role is won, and 0 or 1 medal is paid out; (2) if a CLR operation is performed, a bell is won, and 9 medals are paid out; (3) if a CRL operation is performed, a 1-coin role is won, and 1 medal is paid out; and (4) if an RLC or RCL operation is performed, a miss or 1-coin role is won, and 0 or 1 medal is paid out. In other words, when the push order bells CLR1 to CLR3 are CLR operated, a bell is won, and the maximum number of medals is paid out. Hereinafter, the operation content when the maximum number of medals is paid out in the case of an internal win for the push order role may be referred to as the "correct operation". In this embodiment, the correct operation means that the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct.

Similarly, for push order Bell_CRL1 to 3, CRL operation is the correct operation, and in the case of CRL operation, the bell is won and nine medals are paid out. In addition, for push order bell_RLC1-3, RLC operation is the correct answer, and in the case of RLC operation, the bell is won and 9 medals are paid out, and for push order bell_RCL1-3, RCL operation is correct. In the case of RCL operation, the bell is won and nine medals are paid out.

On the other hand, for example, if the common bell is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery, the bell will be won and nine medals will be paid out regardless of the operation details. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned push order bells_CLR1-3, push order bells_CRL1-3, push order bells_RLC1-3, and push order bells_RCL1-3 will be collectively referred to as "push order bells." Of these "push order bells", push order bells_CLR1-3 and push order bells_CRL1-3 are called "middle first bell" for convenience of explanation, and push order bells_RLC1-3 and push order bells_RCL1-3 is sometimes called the "first bell on the right." In addition, the number of common bells to be paid out was set to nine, which is the same number as the number of bells in the order of pressing, but it is not limited to this, and the number may be less than the number of bells in the order of pressing.By reducing the number of common bells, the normal state medal payout can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, there is no press order bell for which the correct answer is LCR operation or LRC operation (forward press or forward pinch), but CLR operation or CRL operation (middle press) and RLC operation or RCL operation (reverse push or reverse pinch) The specification is such that there is a pressing order bell that is the correct answer. In other words, this is a specification called a biased bell. By using a biased bell, it is possible to lower the ball output in the normal state (non-AT state) and increase the ball output in the AT state. Note that the biased bell is a specification in which the pressing order other than the first left stop is more advantageous for the game than the first left stop (for example, the number of coins paid out is larger or the probability of winning is higher). .

Note that when the internal winning combination (condition device) is one-card combinations 1 to 8 and replays 1 to 7, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content are as shown in FIG. 6(b). "S Blue 7/BAR" in FIG. 6(b) means whether the "Blue Seven 1 symbols" are aligned on a single (one line) winning line or the "BAR symbols" are aligned. "Fake" means that even if the symbols you should aim for are announced and you press your eyes, the notified symbols do not line up. "Replay (Peach 7/W Blue 7 Fake)" will notify you to aim for the peach 7 symbol or to aim for the blue 7 symbol on the double (2 line) winning line, but even if you press your eyes, the replay symbols will line up. It means that.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and transitions of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (specifically, the AT-based gaming state) of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. The AT system game state is a game state related to the performance.

The gaming state of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a normal state and an AT state. The normal state is a state in which the operation navigation is not executed, and the AT state is a state in which the operation navigation may be executed. Here, the operation navigation is a notification effect that notifies the stop operation mode (information regarding the content of the stop operation), and it is said that performing the stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation will bring an advantageous result to the player. It has become. The operation navigation can be roughly divided into (1) a push order navigation that notifies information including the operation order (press order) of stop operations, and (2) information that includes operation timing (for example, stop target symbols, etc.). There is a symbol navigation system that informs you. In other words, the push order navigation is an operation navigation that does not include the press timing, and the symbol navigation is an operation navigation that includes the press timing. In the case of this embodiment, for example, in the AT state, if the push order bell is internally selected, the correct operation details (operation order) may be notified.

The normal state includes a normal stage, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), and a pullback zone. The AT state includes a bonus state, an AT normal state, an additional zone, and an ending state.

In addition to the seven gaming states mentioned above, there are also concepts of advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections. The non-advantageous section consists of a part of the period of the normal stage and a part of the period of the pullback zone, and the advantageous section is a period other than these. Therefore, the AT state is an advantageous section mode. The advantageous period in this embodiment is a period in which an upper limit difference in the number of sheets is set. Specifically, the upper limit difference in number of sheets is 2400 sheets. Here, the difference in number of medals is the cumulative value of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in one game (number of medals paid out - number of medals put in). The upper limit differential number of coins in the advantageous section is a value for determining the end of the advantageous section, and the differential number is updated according to the result of one game. Note that the advantageous section may be a period in which an upper limit number of games is set together with an upper limit differential number of coins, but the advantageous section in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment does not have an upper limit on the number of games. Further, the advantageous section must be ended when the upper limit difference in number of sheets is reached, but it can be ended even if the upper limit difference in number of sheets is not reached. Further, although the upper limit differential number of coins is provided as an advantageous section, the technical idea of this embodiment can also be applied to a medalless gaming machine that does not use game media such as medals.

In the non-advantageous section, a lottery is not performed to determine whether to transition from the normal state to the AT state. Therefore, this is a section in which the operation navigation is not executed. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition from the normal state to the AT state. Therefore, if the user wins the lottery and shifts to the AT state, the operation navigation may be executed. The advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to shift to the AT state, and the non-advantageous section is a section in which it is impossible to shift to the AT state.

When the setting is changed, it is set to a non-advantageous section and becomes a normal stage. If you win a winning combination other than a loss in the normal stage of the non-advantageous section, you will move to the advantageous section. When either the above-mentioned upper limit number of games or the above-mentioned upper limit difference number of coins is reached in the advantageous section, the period shifts to the non-advantageous section. Even in a non-advantageous zone (pullback zone) that has transitioned from an advantageous zone, if you win a winning combination other than a loss, you will transition to an advantageous zone.

Generally, in order to realize a gameplay that increases the payout of medals in a state advantageous to the player such as an AT state, it is necessary to suppress the payout of medals in the normal state. Furthermore, regarding the stopping operation of the game machine, it is often recommended for the player to perform a stopping operation (pushing forward or pinching forward) in which the first stopping operation is on the left. Therefore, when providing a push order combination, in this embodiment, as a method of realizing the gameplay that suppresses the medal payout in the normal state, a push order bell with a biased bell specification as shown in FIG. There is no push order bell for which the correct answer is , but there is a push order bell for which the correct answer is during the first stop operation or to the right).

Note that in this embodiment, there is no push order bell in which the correct answer is the first stop operation left, but it may be provided separately. In this case, the internal winning probability of the push order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation left is the internal winning probability of the push order bell whose correct answer is during the first stop operation, and the internal winning probability of the press order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation left. It is sufficient to set it lower than the sum of the internal winning probabilities of the first bell.

In addition, this embodiment employs a game feature in which the game transitions to the AT state when the number of games in the normal state after the AT state ends reaches a predetermined threshold (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is recommended to perform a stop operation (push in order or pinch in order) with the first stop operation on the left in the normal state, and internally win the push order bell in the normal state (non-AT state) in the advantageous section. In this game, if a stop operation other than the first stop operation left (specifically, during the first stop operation, the first stop operation right) is performed, a penalty is given. Here, the penalty is specifically a penalty related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state, and in this embodiment, (1) it is determined whether or not to transition from the normal state to the AT state in the game. No lottery will be held. Note that even if a lottery is held, there may be a penalty for not winning the transition to the AT state. Also, (2) the value of a counter that counts the number of games in the normal state up to the ceiling number of games (hereinafter referred to as ceiling counter) is not updated (does not add). In this embodiment, the contents of the penalties in (1) and (2) are adopted, but the contents are not limited to these, and other contents may be used as long as the penalties are related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state. Good too. For example, when the AT performs a stock lottery according to an internal winning combination during a predetermined omen (so-called main omen), the stock lottery may not be conducted, or when AT draws an internal winning combination during the main omen. It may be a penalty that suppresses preferential treatment or does not execute preferential treatment, such as not performing a lottery for upgrading an AT when a lottery is held to upgrade the AT to move to a better AT depending on the situation. Moreover, although the penalty is related to the transition to the AT state, a penalty related to the transition to the CZ state may be included. In this way, when you press an irregular press, some unfortunate process that would not be performed if you press the recommended button is performed, or a process that would be performed if you press the recommended button is not performed (the process that should be executed) Processing that does not go through the route) is configured as a penalty.

FIG. 7 shows the seven gaming states described above, and the transition conditions for these are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is established, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

The normal stage is the initial state after the settings have been changed. If condition A is satisfied in the normal stage (more specifically, after winning a role other than losing in the normal stage of the non-advantageous section which is the initial state and moving to the advantageous section, in the normal stage of the advantageous section, a rare combination (e.g. , strong cherry) When a specific performance lottery based on winning is won, a specific performance is started, and the specific performance ends, the AT normal state is entered.In this embodiment, the specific performance is a continuous performance over multiple games. Yes.The continuous performance may be, for example, a duel performance or a freeze performance.In addition, the continuous performance may be a performance that spans multiple games, and since it is before the transition to the AT state, it may be a sign. It may also be referred to as a production.It may be a mode in which 100% of the winnings are won in the above-mentioned specific production lottery, or a mode in which it is confirmed that the AT normal state is entered at the stage of winning a rare role. .

When condition B is satisfied in the normal stage (more specifically, after winning a winning combination other than losing in the normal stage of the non-advantageous section which is the initial state and moving to the advantageous section, in the normal stage of the advantageous section, the winning combination is based on the winning combination) If you win the CZ transition lottery), you will transition to CZ. CZ is a gaming state for a finite period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 10 games). If condition D is met in CZ (more specifically, if you win the bonus transfer lottery based on the winning combination in CZ), you will enter the bonus state, and if condition C is met in CZ (more specifically, if you win the bonus transfer lottery based on the winning combination in CZ), you will be transferred to the bonus state. If you do not win the lottery), you will move to the regular stage.

The bonus state is a gaming state for a limited period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 30 games). Note that the bonus mentioned here is a pseudo bonus. When condition F is satisfied in the bonus state (more specifically, when the AT lottery based on the winning combination is won in the bonus state), the AT normal state is entered. If you win the AT lottery, you will be given the number of games you can stay in the AT normal state (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT awarded games). On the other hand, if condition E is satisfied in the bonus state (more specifically, if the AT lottery is not won in the bonus state), the stage shifts to the normal stage.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is designed to increase the number of balls in the AT normal state. If condition G is satisfied in the AT normal state (more specifically, if the winning combination is won in the bonus zone transfer lottery based on the winning combination), the game moves to the bonus zone. The add-on zone is a state in which an add-on lottery is executed to add on the number of AT awarded games. That is, in the AT normal state, it is possible to play games equal to the number of games in which the number of games awarded in this add-on zone is added to the initial number of AT awarded games awarded immediately after winning the AT lottery. The add-on zone is a gaming state for a limited period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 10 games). When condition H is satisfied in the add-on zone (more specifically, when the add-on zone ends after playing the number of games), the AT normal state is entered. Note that the AT lottery number may not be awarded immediately after winning the AT lottery, and the initial number of games in the AT normal state may be determined in the additional zone.

Further, when condition J is satisfied in the AT normal state (more specifically, when the ending transition condition is satisfied), the AT normal state is transitioned to the ending state. Here, the case where the ending transition condition is satisfied is the case where the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the specified difference in number of sheets (here, 2200 sheets). That is, when the remaining number of sheets until reaching the upper limit difference number of sheets (2400 sheets here) at which the advantageous section ends becomes less than or equal to the predetermined number (200 sheets here), condition J is satisfied.

The ending state is the final state of the AT state (advantageous section). When the condition L is satisfied in the ending state (more specifically, when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied and the pull-back zone transition lottery is won), the game moves to the pull-back zone. The case where the advantageous section end condition is satisfied is the case where the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit difference in the number of sheets. Note that, since the upper limit of the difference in number of sheets is 2400 sheets, it is also possible for the advantageous section to end after exceeding 2400 sheets, taking into consideration the negative amount until reaching the AT state.

FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing the transition winning probability of the pullback zone transition lottery.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a difference number counter that counts the upper limit difference number in the advantageous section, the above-mentioned ceiling counter, a counter that counts the number of AT granted games, etc., as well as a counter that counts the number of acquired AT normal states. A counter for the number of AT acquired coins is provided. When the AT acquisition number counter reaches a predetermined second value (500 coins in this case), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes a pull-back zone transition lottery. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the transition winning probability in the pull-back zone transition lottery is about 10%, and the transition to the pull-back zone may occur. Strictly speaking, the transition winning probability (probability of transition) is 25/256, and the probability of no transition is 231/256. If you win the lottery to move to the pullback zone at this stage, condition K will be met when you have used all the AT granted games before reaching the upper limit differential number of coins at which the advantageous section ends in the AT normal state, and the withdrawal will be returned. Move to zone. If the vehicle moves to the pullback zone in this way, it remains in the advantageous zone. On the other hand, if the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state does not reach the predetermined second value (500 coins), the pullback zone transition lottery is not executed. Therefore, in this case, the probability of winning the pullback zone transition lottery is 0%. Before the number of coins acquired in the AT normal state reaches a predetermined second value (500 coins), the condition I is satisfied when the number of AT granted games is completely exhausted, and the game returns to the normal stage. If you return to the normal stage in this way, you will remain in the advantageous section.

In addition, when the AT acquisition number counter reaches a predetermined second value (500 coins in this case), the lottery to move to the pullback zone is a loss, and the AT acquisition number counter reaches a predetermined first value (the advantageous section ends. When the value (less than the upper limit difference number of coins, here 1000 coins) is reached, the pullback zone transition lottery is executed again. As shown in FIG. 8(a), the probability of winning when 1000 tickets are reached is 100%. After the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state reaches the predetermined first value (1000 coins) (winning the withdrawal zone transition lottery), but before reaching the upper limit difference number of coins at which the advantageous section ends in the AT normal state. Condition K is satisfied when all the number of AT granted games are used up, and the game moves to the pullback zone. Even when moving to the pullback zone in this way, the zone remains advantageous. Further, when the transition to the ending state occurs and the upper limit differential number of sheets (2400 sheets) at which the advantageous section ends is reached, condition L is satisfied and the flow shifts to the pullback zone. When transitioning from the ending state to the pullback zone, the transition is to a non-advantageous zone. The fact that the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit of 2400 sheets means that the number of sheets acquired in the AT normal state has reached 1000 sheets, and from the ending state it will definitely move to the pullback zone. It turns out.

Further, when the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state reaches the second value (500 coins), there is a probability of losing the pullback zone transition lottery about 90%. If the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state reaches the second value, there will be a loss, and even if the number of AT bonus games is used up before reaching the first value, Condition I will also be applied. Established and returns to normal stage. Even if you return to the normal stage in this way, it will remain in the advantageous section.

As explained above, the pullback zone transfer lottery will not be executed unless the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state reaches 500, if it has reached 500, it will be executed, and if it has reached 1000, it will not be executed. If it does, it will definitely move to the pullback zone. As a result, the player can have a gaming goal during the AT normal state, and can also have a sense of expectation such as ``If I get a lot, I might get more.'' Note that here, the AT acquisition number counter counts the number of coins acquired in the AT normal state, but it may also count the number of acquired coins in the AT normal state and bonus state combined, or it may count the number of coins acquired in the entire AT state. You may. In addition, the winning probability of the pullback zone transfer lottery may be set to vary depending on the setting value, and the winning probability of the pullback zone transfer lottery is higher with a high setting (for example, setting 6) than with a low setting (for example, setting 1). It may be made higher. By doing this, it is possible to obtain even more gaming value if the setting is high. On the other hand, the probability of winning the pullback zone transfer lottery may be higher with a low setting (for example, setting 1) than with a high setting (for example, setting 6). By doing so, it is possible to obtain a large amount of gaming value even with a low setting.

Further, in the AT normal state, a message such as "Return zone may be confirmed when 1000 coins are reached" may be displayed so that the game target during AT can be visually recognized. Alternatively, in the AT normal state after winning the pull-back zone transfer lottery and obtaining the right to transfer to the pull-back zone, a display that allows the player to identify that the player will subsequently transfer to the pull-back zone may be displayed. It is possible to increase the desire to continue playing the game.

The pull-back zone transition lottery may be executed when the upper limit difference in number of coins is reached, which is the end of the advantageous zone, or when all the AT-granting games have been played. In this case, the probability of winning the transition will differ depending on whether the number of coins won at the time of execution in the normal AT state has reached a predetermined second value (500 coins) or a predetermined first value (1000 coins), as shown in FIG. 8(a). Alternatively, the pull-back zone transition lottery may be executed when the number of coins won in the normal AT state has reached the predetermined second value and the predetermined first value, and when all the AT-granting games have been played.

In addition, when the number of games that give the AT is consumed after reaching a predetermined second value (500 coins) or a predetermined first value (1000 coins), and then the player moves to the pull-back zone, the advantageous zone continues without moving to the non-advantageous zone, but at the point when the number of games that give the AT is consumed, it may be determined whether or not to end the advantageous zone and move to the non-advantageous zone depending on whether a sufficient number of coins can be acquired in the remaining period of the advantageous zone in which the player is currently staying. The sufficient number of coins may be, for example, 2400 coins, or 1500 coins, which is less than 2400 coins. In other words, if a sufficient number of coins cannot be acquired, the current advantageous zone may be ended and moved to the non-advantageous zone so that a new advantageous zone can be started. This is to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the player wins the AT in the pull-back zone and returns to the AT, but immediately moves to the ending state even though the number of coins acquired in the returned AT is small, causing dissatisfaction among the player.

The pullback zone is a gaming state for a limited period in which the number of games is fixed (for example, 15 games). The number of games in the pullback zone is less than the number of games in the bonus state, but greater than the number of games in the top-up zone.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing the AT winning probability of the AT lottery in the pullback zone executed in the pullback zone.

If AT is won in the AT lottery held for all roles within the 15 games (condition M shown in Figure 7 is met), the AT normal state will re-enter after the end of the pullback zone, and if AT is not won (as shown in Figure 7). If the condition N shown in FIG. If you have just moved to the pullback zone, you have returned to the non-advantageous zone, so if you lose and win, the AT lottery will not be held. Alternatively, even if an AT lottery is held and an AT is won, it will be treated as invalid. If you win a role other than a loser and move to an advantageous section, there is a possibility that you will win AT even if you win a loser. The diagram shown in FIG. 8(b) is an example. In addition, watermelon and weak cherry are used as weak rare roles, strong cherry and chance are used as strong rare roles, and the AT winning probability is 45% for weak rare roles.
For strong rare roles, the allocation may be 100%. Further, the AT lottery during the pullback zone may be set differently depending on the setting value, so that the AT winning probability is higher with a high setting (for example, setting 6) than with a low setting (for example, setting 1). Good too. By doing this, it is possible to obtain even more gaming value if the setting is high. On the other hand, the AT winning probability may be higher with a low setting (eg, setting 1) than with a high setting (eg, setting 6). By doing so, it is possible to obtain a large amount of gaming value even with a low setting.

Note that even if AT is won, the pullback zone is maintained until the 15 games are played, but the AT normal state may be entered from the next game in which AT is won. Furthermore, before transitioning from the ending to the pullback zone, a pullback zone preparation state for several games may be provided, and this pullback zone preparation state may provide an opportunity to return from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. In this case, a preparation effect that can specify or suggest that the pullback zone is in the preparation state may be executed. Then, when the vehicle moves to the advantageous zone in the preparation state, the pullback zone starts.

FIG. 9 is a graph showing an example of an increase/decrease in the number of different sheets when the sheet passes through the pull-back zone.

In FIG. 9, the vertical axis represents the number of game media (the number of medals), and the horizontal axis represents the passage of time. As described above, the difference in the number of medals represented by the graph in FIG. 9 is the cumulative value of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in one game (number of medals paid out - number of medals inserted). The settings are changed and the difference number of sheets is reset to 0. Furthermore, since the settings have been changed, the gaming state is now in the normal state. During the normal state, the number of differential sheets decreases, but when the state shifts to the AT state (first time), it starts to increase. At the time when the number of AT granted games is used up in the AT normal state, the number of coins acquired in the AT normal state has reached 500, and a pullback zone transition lottery is executed. However, the winning probability drops to about 10% as shown in FIG. 8(a) (condition I shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied), and the process shifts to the second normal state. During the second normal state, the difference number of sheets decreases, but when the AT state (second time) is entered, it starts to increase and the difference number increases to a positive value. Eventually, the number of AT granted games will be exhausted even in the AT state (second time). The number of acquired coins in the AT normal state exceeds 1000 coins (condition K shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied), and the process moves to the pullback zone. Since the pull-back zone is in a normal state and the operation navigation is not executed, the number of difference sheets decreases. The player wins the AT lottery during the pullback zone, and shifts to the AT state (third time) after completing 15 games of the pullback zone. In the AT state (third time), the difference number reaches 2400, which is the upper limit difference number. As a result, condition L shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied, and a transition is made to the pullback zone. Additionally, the advantageous section is reset and becomes a non-advantageous section. In the pull-back zone, the number of difference sheets decreases, it is impossible to win the AT lottery in the pull-back zone, and after the 15 games of the pull-back zone are completed, the state shifts to the normal state.

As explained above, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the number of coins acquired in one AT state is 1000 or more, the slot machine 100 always moves to the pullback zone. In addition, the pullback zone transition lottery is executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met and when the number of AT granted games is used up in the AT normal state, but in addition, when the AT normal state is entered, Even when the number of coins reaches 500, a lottery for moving to the pull-back zone may be held, and if the lottery is won, the right to move to the pull-back zone may be suspended until the number of AT granted games is exhausted. By doing this, even if the number of acquired coins does not reach 1000, you will have more opportunities to acquire the right to move to the pullback zone, and you will be able to increase your chances of gaining the right to move to the pullback zone, and you will be able to increase your chances of gaining the right to move to the pullback zone. It becomes easier to perform. As an inciting performance, for example, a performance that can specify or suggests that you will be transferred to the withdrawal zone if you win the withdrawal zone transition lottery may be executed, or a performance that can specify or suggest that you will be transferred to the withdrawal zone if you win the withdrawal zone transition lottery, or when the number of acquired coins approaches 500 (for example, , 450 pieces), the number of acquired pieces displayed on the screen in the AT state may blink or change color, or may blink or change color when 500 pieces are reached. .

In addition, instead of the number of coins won in one AT state, the number of coins won in one advantageous zone may be used. Also, if the number of AT-granting games is consumed without any increase, the probability of winning the transition to the pullback zone may be increased to more than around 10%.

Note that the number of acquired sheets may refer to a virtual difference number of sheets instead of the actual number of acquired sheets. The virtual difference number of coins mentioned here is the expected number of coins assuming that the game value is acquired as expected by the game machine. For example, in the normal state (non-AT state), the number of coins actually acquired by sequential pressing is counted. The number of cards obtained by performing an irregular push in the normal state is treated as 0 (not counted). A fair game machine can be provided because the game value obtained by playing in a way that is not recommended is not counted. To count the number of coins that can be obtained by operating in the correct operation order even if you do not follow the operation navigation in an AT state. That is, even if the push order navigation is ignored, the number of sheets is counted as if the push order navigation was followed. Even if you press the button in the wrong order while in the AT state, in the pull-back zone transfer lottery, the transfer lottery will be performed assuming that you have performed the correct operation. As a result, even though there were actually more than 1000 pieces, due to the wrong order of pressing, you could only get 990 pieces, which could result in you losing the lottery to move to the pull-back zone and not being able to move to the pull-back zone. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

The game machine is provided with a counter for counting a virtual difference number (virtual difference number counter) in addition to a difference number counter for counting a pure difference number. The initial value of this virtual difference number counter is greater than zero. Even if the count value falls below the initial value in a gaming situation, there is still room for it to reach the negative range, and the period of counting without considering the negative value becomes longer. Furthermore, the absolute value (second absolute value) on the negative side of the initial value of the virtual difference number counter is greater than the absolute value (first absolute value) on the positive side of the initial value. Even if the number of earned differences exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value depending on the player's gaming situation, there is still room for the player to recover.

Furthermore, the difference number counter counts the difference in the positive range (counting only the positive amount, ignoring the negative amount of number of coins paid out - number of coins inserted), and there is also an actual counter that counts the actual number of coins paid out - number of coins inserted for the day, including the negative amount. The difference number counter and virtual difference number counter are not initialized when power is restored after a power outage, but the actual counter is initialized when power is restored. By not initializing the difference number counter and virtual difference number counter when power is restored after a power outage, they will not be initialized even when the power is turned on before opening, and by carrying over the count value from the previous day, it is expected that the operation of the gaming machines will improve immediately after opening.

According to the above description,
“A reel that stops rotating by a stop operation [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
Notifying means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157],
A control means [for example, the main control unit 300] that controls the transition of the gaming state,
A game machine comprising:
The control means controls the gaming state in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player in the stop operation [for example, the first stop reel is set as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is set as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is set as the left reel 110. means capable of transitioning to a notification gaming state [for example, an AT state (AT normal state, ending state)] in which the notification means can notify a stop operation],
If a first condition [for example, the number of acquired gaming media in the AT state is 1000 or more] is satisfied in the notification gaming state, the control means controls the notification gaming state after the notification gaming state ends. Means for transitioning to a special gaming state [for example, a pullback zone] that can be transitioned to a notification gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player may aim to satisfy the first condition in the notification gaming state, and can expect that the player's desire to participate will increase. Further, even when the informed gaming state ends, the special gaming state is prepared, thereby motivating the player to continue playing the game and actively increasing the player's desire to play.

Also,
``Even if the first condition is not satisfied in the notification gaming state, the control means may cause the transition to the special gaming state when the notification gaming state ends [e.g. , Even if the number of game media acquired in the AT state is less than 1000 pieces, if it is 500 pieces or more, you may win the transition lottery],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the acquisition status of game value [for example, medals] in the notification gaming state is a predetermined first situation [for example, 1000 coins or more].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

If the game value acquisition situation is in the predetermined first situation, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of balls to be paid may be further increased.

Also,
``The control means is means for transitioning to the special game state when the notification game state ends when the first condition is not satisfied but the second condition is satisfied in the notification game state. can be,
The second condition is a predetermined second situation [for example, 500 or more coins and less than 1000 coins] in which the game value acquisition status in the notification gaming state does not satisfy the predetermined first situation, and the transition lottery [ For example, the condition is satisfied if you win [for example, the winning probability of about 10% shown in FIG. 8(a)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even if the predetermined first situation is not met, the player is given the opportunity to transition to the special gaming state, so it is possible to prevent a loss of interest in the game.

Also,
" Equipped with advantageous areas that are advantageous to players,
The notification game state is one of the game states in the advantageous zone,
The advantageous zone may end when the game value acquisition status in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined third status [for example, 2,400 or more],
The notification game state may end when the acquisition status of the game value in the advantageous zone reaches the predetermined third status,
the predetermined third situation is a situation exceeding the predetermined first situation,
When the advantageous zone ends and the notification game state transitions to the special game state [e.g., a pull-back zone] [e.g., when condition L shown in FIG. 7 is satisfied], the special game state may be a game state in a new advantageous zone [e.g., an internal win for a role other than a miss],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

If a new advantageous section is started in the special gaming state, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the advantageous section.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 10 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process is executed to update various states in the slot machine 100. For example, the difference number counter that counts the upper limit difference number in the advantageous zone, which is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, is updated, the ceiling counter described above is updated, the counter that counts the number of games in which the AT is awarded, and the AT acquisition number counter described above is updated.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. Deriving the checksum value for the area and storing it in the RAM 308
, and set the power flag indicating that the power-off process has been performed to ON.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 12. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 12(a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 12A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 13(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings, the memory area in the RAM 508, the memory area in the VRAM 518, etc. are initialized.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 13A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control process of step S606 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, an example of a performance transitioning from a continuous performance to an AT state will be explained.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a premonition G number A counter, and the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a premonition G number B counter. In condition A shown in FIG. 7, the AT state (AT normal state) is entered when the continuous performance ends. Here, the continuous performance becomes a duel performance, which is executed over four games, and when the duel performance ends, the AT state is entered. The game during which the continuous performance is being executed corresponds to the game that is a premonition of the transition to the AT state. Whether the premonition G number A counter or the premonition G number B counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of games that are premonitions before the transition to the AT state. The premonition G number A counter is a counter for managing the transition to the AT state to earn balls, and is managed by the main control unit 300. On the other hand, the premonition G number B counter is a counter for performance management, and is managed by the first sub-control unit 400.

Figure 14 is a diagram used to point out problems with an example of a conventional slot machine where a continuous performance starts and then transitions to an AT state. In Figure 14, both the upper Figure 14(a) and the lower Figure 14(b) progress from left to right. Figure 14 shows the number of plays (number of games), winning combinations, push order, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the occurrence of penalties, performance progress, the count value of the premonition G number A counter, and the count value of the premonition G number B counter. The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is controlled based on the value of the premonition G number B counter managed by the first sub-control unit 400.

In FIG. 14(a) shown in the upper row, a rare combination (for example, strong cherry) is won and the continuous performance is started from the NG game. That is, performance 1 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a notification image (a mission image of "defeat the master swordsman") notifying that the duel performance will start. . At the stage when a rare combination (for example, strong cherry) is won, a value of "4" is set in both the precursor G number A counter and the precursor G number B counter. The count value of the precursor G number A counter for this NG is updated from "4" to "3", and the count value of the precursor G number B counter is also updated from "4" to "3".

In the N+1G game, performance 2 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the enemy swordsman appears. The count value of the precursor G number A counter at the N+1G is decreased by one to "2" due to the update, and the count value of the precursor G number B counter is also "2".

In the N+2G game, performance 3 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other. The count value of the precursor G number A counter at this N+2G is further decreased by one due to the update to "1", and the count value of the precursor G number B counter is also "1". Note that the winning combination here is a push order bell, whereas the previous winning combination was a loss, but since it is in a normal state (not an AT state), the operation navigation is not executed and the first stop is A sequential pressing stop operation is being performed with the operation to the left.

In the N+3G game (4th G after the start of the continuous performance), performance 4 (corresponding to the last performance) of the continuous performance is executed, and the main character lord is shown as the enemy on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. The scene where he won against the master swordsman is displayed, and the transition to AT is announced. This N+
The count value of the precursor G number A counter at the 3rd G is updated to "0", and the count value of the precursor G number B counter is also updated to "0".

In the N+4G game, the normal state is shifted to the AT state (AT normal state). The liquid crystal display device 157 displays a notification screen (AT start screen displaying "AT start") that notifies the transition to the AT state based on the count value of the precursor G number B counter being "0". ) is displayed. Also, based on the fact that the count value of the portent G number A counter is "0", the main control unit 300 is allowed to send information regarding the operation order of the winning combination to the first sub-control unit 400. Become. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a display of "321" (reverse push operation navigation display) is displayed to notify the correct operation of the push order bell which is the winning combination.

FIG. 14(b) shown in the lower part is a diagram showing an example in which a continuous performance is executed like in FIG. 14(a) in the upper part, and a penalty occurs in a game in the middle of the continuous performance. The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 14(a) in the upper row.

Let me once again summarize the penalties. First, (a) the game must be in a normal state in an advantageous section (not in a non-advantageous section or in an AT state), (b) the game must have been internally won for the push order bell, and (c) the first stop operation. When all of the conditions (a) to (c) are met, that a stop operation (so-called irregular press) is performed other than on the left (specifically, during the first stop operation, on the right of the first stop operation) acts are subject to penalties. In other words, just making an irregular push does not result in a penalty. This prevents you from finding a strategy by repeating irregular presses, and also prevents excessive penalties. However, a penalty may be given regardless of the winning combination, such as the push order bell (penalty given by (a) + (c)). In addition, as will be described later, when an irregular press is performed, a recommended operation display such as "Press left is recommended" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, regardless of whether a penalty is given, to make the recommended press known to the players. Plan. Note that the display start timing of the operation recommendation display may be the timing of the first stop operation when the irregular press is performed, or the timing after the irregular press is performed (for example, the timing of the third stop operation). It may be. Further, the operation recommendation display may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, or may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation. These "predetermined times" are shorter than the time it takes to move to the demo screen after the final stop operation, and the operation recommendation display is hidden when the demo screen ends and returns to the game screen. . Further, the operation recommendation display may be displayed until the demo screen is entered, and the operation recommendation display may be hidden when the demo screen ends and the game screen returns to the game screen. Alternatively, the operation recommendation display may be hidden after acceptance of the start operation for the next game (operation of the start lever 135) is enabled, or may be hidden after the start operation for the next game is performed. Good too.

Also, no penalty will be incurred in non-advantageous sections. This means that if an irregular push is performed in a non-advantageous section and the transition to an advantageous section is prohibited, it becomes possible to continue making irregular pushes in the non-advantageous section and earn more medals. Therefore, it is meaningful to prevent such things. Further, the timing of transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section may be the 1st G after the setting change, but the 1st G after the setting change is often when the game parlor opens. First thing in the morning, the reel is not warmed up, it takes time for the reel to accelerate, and the timing at which the stop operation can be accepted tends to be slightly delayed. Therefore, even though the player presses the left stop button 137 in the first operation, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned timing is shifted and the timing when the middle stop button 138 is actually pressed becomes the above-mentioned timing. Since it would be cruel to the player to impose a penalty in such a case, no penalty is imposed in the non-advantageous section.

When an action subject to a penalty is performed, (1) a lottery is not held to determine whether or not the game will transition from the normal state to the AT state. (2) The value of the ceiling counter, which counts the number of games in the normal state up to the ceiling game number, is not updated. Furthermore, in this example, (3) the count value of the premonition G number A counter is not updated either. The following penalties are incurred. Note that in some cases, a penalty may be imposed by not actively performing processing, such as by not holding a lottery or not updating values.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(b), in the N+2G game (performance 3 of the continuous performances), a stop operation is performed in which the first stop operation is to the right. The stop operation in which the first stop operation is on the right is an irregular press. Here, since the push order bell is internally won in the normal state of the advantageous section, it becomes a penalty target act, and even if the penalty occurs and the N+3th G of the next game starts, the precursor G number A counter will not be counted. The count value remains "1". On the other hand, the count value of the precursor G number B counter is updated to "0".

In this example as well, the normal state is shifted to the AT state (AT normal state) in the N+4G game. The AT start screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 based on the fact that the count value of the precursor G number B counter is "0". On the other hand, since the count value of the portent G number A counter was not "0", the information regarding the operation order of the winning combination was not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the liquid crystal display The display screen 157 does not display an operation navigation display that informs you of the correct operation of the pressing order bell, which is the winning combination. As described above, in conventional slot machines, there is a problem in that the occurrence of a penalty causes a lag between the start of the operation navigation and the performance.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is designed to solve this problem.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a detailed timing chart of the N+2G-th and N+3G-th times explained using FIG. 14(a), and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing.

In FIG. 15, time passes from left to right. Further, in FIG. 15, "game progress" includes "start operation", "first stop", "second stop", and "third stop" which are operations of the start lever 135. Below that, the acceptable states of "Left stop Sw" which is the left stop button 137 sensor, "Medium stop Sw" which is the middle stop button 138 sensor, and "Right stop Sw" which is the right stop button 139 sensor are also shown. has been done. Each Sw enters a receptive state after a start operation, and when it receives a stop operation while in an receptive state, the receptive state ends. Below that, the rotating states of the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are also shown. Further below, the display contents of the "liquid crystal display device" which is the liquid crystal display device 157 are also shown. In this example, in the continuous performance, the character display NTG of "NEXT" indicating that the performance continues to the next game is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (from the third stop to the start of the next game). period). Further, a game number display GMV is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. The value of the game number display GMV is the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and increases by 1 each time a start lever acceptance command is received from the main control unit 300 after power is turned on. It is a value. The matters explained above also apply to FIGS. 16 and 17.

The timing at which the start operation was performed is the timing (A1), the N+2Gth time is started, and execution of performance 3 of the continuous performance is started. At N+2G, the push order bell is internally selected. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A1), a close-up screen of the main character, the lord, is displayed. Furthermore, upon the start of the game, the game number display GMV is updated from "99G" to "100G". From then on, "100G" will continue to be displayed on the game number display GMV until there is a refusal.

At N+2G in the normal state, the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the first stop. Since the left stop button 137 was operated first, it was not an irregular press, and the first stopping act here is not an act subject to a penalty. The timing at which the first stop operation is performed is timing (A2), and the left reel 110 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A2), a close-up screen of the enemy swordsman is displayed.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform the second stop, stopping the middle reel 111, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform the third stop. The timing when the third stop operation is performed is timing (A3), and the right reel 112 stops. The display screen of the liquid crystal display 157 at timing (A3) displays a scene in which the main character, a lord, and the antagonist, a master swordsman, face off against each other, the same scene shown on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 157 at N+2G in Figure 14. Furthermore, in this example, the third stop operation triggers the addition of the text display "NEXT" NTG in the bottom right.

The timing after the third stop until the next game starts is the timing (A4). The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at this timing (A4) is the same as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the previous timing (A3).

Then, by operating the start lever 135 and performing a start operation, the next game (N+3 game) is started, and this time, execution of performance 4 of the continuous performance is started. The timing at which the N+3 game is started is the timing (A5). At N+3G, the replay is internally won. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at timing (A5), the main character, the lord, is displayed in the upper half, and the villain, the master swordsman, is displayed in the lower half. Further, when the game starts, the character display NTG of "NEXT" disappears, and the game number display GMV is updated from "100G" to "101G".

In the N+3th game, the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the first stop. The first stop operation is performed at timing (A6), and the left reel 110 stops. At timing (A6), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shows a scene after the hero, the lord, and the villain, the master swordsman, have exchanged swords. The game count display GMV of "101G" continues to be displayed.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform a third stop. The timing when the third stop operation is performed is the timing (A7), and the right reel 112 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A7), a scene in which the enemy swordsman is slashed is displayed. Even if the third stop is performed, this N+3Gth game is the last game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, so there is no continuous effect that continues, and the "NEXT" character display NTG is not additionally displayed. . However, the game number display GMV of "101G" continues to be displayed.

The timing after the third stop until the start of the next game (until the transition to the AT state) is the timing (A8). The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at this timing (A8) is the same as the scene shown on the display screen of the N+3G-th liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. , the transition to AT has been announced. Note that the game number display GMV of "101G" is continuously displayed here as well.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing detailed timing charts of the N+2G and N+3G times described using FIG. 14(b) and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. Hereinafter, differences from FIG. 15 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The N+2Gth game is started, and execution of performance 3 of the continuous performance is started. In this N+2G, the push order bell is internally elected. The game number display GMV on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 has been updated to "100G". In this example, at N+2G in the normal state, the right stop button 139 is operated first to perform the first stop. The first stop action here is an irregular push, and since the push order bell has been internally won in the normal state of the advantageous section, it is an action that is subject to a penalty. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A2) when the first stop operation is performed, a recommended operation display REC such as "Press left is recommended" is displayed so as to overlap the close-up screen of the enemy swordsman. be done. At the timing when the recommended operation display REC is displayed, the number of games display GMV remains displayed as "100G".

Next, the center stop button 138 is operated to perform the second stop, stopping the center reel 111, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform the third stop. At the timing (A3) when the third stop operation is performed, a blackout display is added to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. That is, just like (A3) in FIG. 15, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the lord, the protagonist, and the swordsman, the enemy, confront each other, but the blackout display makes the scene difficult to see. The blackout display suggests that a penalty has occurred in that game. In addition, the character display NTG of "NEXT" is not additionally displayed, or even if it is additionally displayed, it is difficult to see due to the blackout display. On the other hand, the operation recommendation display REC and the number of games display GMV are not blacked out, and these displays REC and GMV are easily visible. At the time the third stop occurs (when the blackout display is added), the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is returned by one game, and the game number display GMV switches to display "99G."

The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A4) after the third stop until the next game starts is the same as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the previous timing (A3). That is, although the blackout display continues, the recommended operation display REC and the game number display GMV of "99G" are visible.

Then, when the start lever 135 is operated and a start operation is performed, the next game (N+3 game) is started. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A5) when the N+3 game is started, the display of the blackout display has ended, and the display of the recommended operation display REC has also ended. As described above, since the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 has been returned by one game, the number of games display GMV has been updated to "100G". That is, in a game in which a penalty occurs, the value is returned by 1, and at the start of the next game, it is advanced by 1. Therefore, in the continuous performance, performance 3 of the continuous performance is re-executed according to the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400. The same display screen as at the timing (A1) is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

At N+3G, an internal replay win occurs, and the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the first stop. The first stop action here is not subject to a penalty. At the time (A6) when this first stop operation is performed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shows the same display screen as at the time (A2), but the operation recommendation display REC is not displayed.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform a third stop. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A7) when the third stop operation was performed, the same display screen as at the timing (A3) in FIG. 15 is displayed. That is, a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other is displayed, and the text "NEXT" NTG is added to the lower right corner. Further, at the lower left, the game number display GMV of "100G" is continuously displayed.

After the third stop, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A8) until the next game starts (until the transition to the AT state) is the same as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the previous timing (A7).

In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, as described above, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is returned by 1 in a game in which a penalty occurs, and is advanced by 1 at the start of the next game. As a result, the number of games in the game in which the penalty occurred will be the same as the number of games in the next game. This is the same as the precursor G number A counter managed by the main control unit 300, which was explained using FIG. This solves the problem of a discrepancy between the start and the performance. Moreover, in the game where a penalty occurred, a blackout display is displayed and the game number display GMV is reset by 1, so it is easy to understand the game where a penalty occurred, and it looks like a penalty occurred in the next game as well. To prevent misunderstandings from being given to players and to prevent the interest in the game from diminishing.

Note that the timing at which the blackout display starts displaying may be the same as the timing at which the operation recommendation display REC starts displaying. Alternatively, the timing to start displaying the darkening display may be timing (A2), and the timing to start displaying the recommended operation display REC may be timing (A3). Furthermore, the timing at which the blackout display starts displaying may be the timing at which the second stop occurs, or the timing at which the operation recommendation display REC starts displaying may coincide with the timing at which the second stop occurs. Further, the timing at which the blackout display ends is not limited to the timing (A5), but may be a timing after a while has elapsed from the third stop operation of the game in which the irregular press was performed, and the bet amount setting operation for the next game is completed. It may be the timing at which it was performed. Further, the timing at which the value of the game number display GMV is reset by 1 may be within the game in which the penalty occurred, and may be at the timing of (A2), the timing of (A4), It may be the timing of the second stop. In addition, even if the value of the game number display GMV is returned by 1 in the game where a penalty occurred, the production itself will continue as described below, and the standby game for the number of games that resulted in a penalty will be generated after the series of productions is completed. Alternatively, the AT state may occur before the AT state is started.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing detailed timing charts for the N+2G and N+3G times in which an irregular press was performed but no penalty occurred, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. Hereinafter, differences from FIG. 16 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The N+2Gth game is started, and execution of performance 3 of the continuous performance is started. In this N+2G, the internal election is not based on the push order bell but on the loss. In this example as well, in the N+2G position in the normal state, the right stop button 139 is first operated to perform the first stop. The first stop action here is an irregular push, which is a normal state in the advantageous section, but since the push order bell has not been internally elected, it is not an action subject to penalty. Due to the irregular press, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A2) when the first stop operation was performed shows "Left press recommended" so that it overlaps with the close-up screen of the enemy swordsman. REC is displayed.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform a third stop. The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A3) when the third stop operation was performed does not display a blackout display because no penalty has occurred, and the main character is displayed as shown in (A3) in FIG. A scene is shown where the lord and the enemy swordsman are confronting each other. However, the recommended operation displays REC are displayed so as to overlap. Furthermore, the game number display GMV continues to be displayed as "100G" at the bottom left, and the text display NTG "NEXT" triggered by the third stop operation has been added at the bottom right.

On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A4) after the third stop and before the next game starts, the operation recommendation display REC disappears (is not displayed), and the operation recommendation display REC disappears (is not displayed) at the timing (A4) in FIG. The same display screen as the timing is displayed. The timing at which the operation recommendation display REC disappears may be a while after the third stop, or may be at the same time as the third stop, or may be at the same time as the second stop. Alternatively, the operation recommendation display REC may disappear after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of display, regardless of the operation. However, if the recommended operation display REC is displayed for only a moment, it is difficult to distinguish it from the effect of a stop operation trigger, so it is preferable that the recommended operation display REC is continuously displayed until at least the third stop. Furthermore, in the case of irregular presses during continuous performance, the display mode of the operation recommendation display REC differs depending on the winning combination. In other words, if the push order bell is not won as in the example shown in FIG. 3. The operation recommendation display REC is hidden after a while after stopping. On the other hand, if the push order bell is won as in the example shown in Fig. 16, the operation recommendation display REC is displayed when an irregular push is performed, and the performance triggered by the third stop is not executed (visible by the blackout display). The operation recommendation display REC continues to be displayed until just before the next game starts.

The subsequent timings ((A5) to (A8)) are the same as the example in FIG. 15.

As in this example, when an irregular press is performed, the operation recommendation display REC is displayed regardless of whether a penalty occurs or not. If a penalty occurs, the operation recommendation display REC will continue to be displayed until the game in which the irregular press was performed ends (until the next game starts), as shown in the example shown in FIG. 16, but the penalty will occur. If you fail to do so, the penalty will disappear sooner than if it had occurred. Alternatively, the length of the display period of the operation recommendation display REC is fixed, and it disappears even if no operation is performed by the player. In addition, even if an irregular press is performed, if no penalty occurs, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 does not change (is not returned by 1), and the number of games is displayed. The GMV value also continues to be displayed without changing.

Next, a comparison will be made between a case where an irregular press is performed during a continuous performance and a case where an irregular press is performed during a non-continuous performance.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where an irregular press is performed during a continuous performance and an example of a case where an irregular press is performed during a non-continuous performance.

FIG. 18(a) in the upper row shows an example of a case where an irregular press is performed during a continuous performance, and FIG. 18(b) in the lower row shows an example when an irregular press is performed during a non-continuous performance. It is a figure showing an example. In both the upper part of FIG. 18(a) and the lower part of FIG. 18(b), the movement progresses from left to right. Also, whether it is shown in the upper part of FIG. 18(a) or the lower part of FIG. 18(b),
In FIG. 18, the number of games played (number of games), the winning combination, the order of pressing, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the occurrence of a penalty, the progress of the performance, and the number of games display GMV displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Each value of is shown. Note that the value of the number of games display GMV is the value of the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400.

The example of FIG. 18(a) shown in the upper row is the same as the example described above, and the continuous performance is a duel performance. A rare role (for example, strong cherry) is won, and a continuous performance is started from the NG game. That is, performance 1 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a notification image (a mission image of "defeat the master swordsman") notifying that the duel performance will start. . The game number display GMV is "98G".

In the N+1G game, performance 2 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the enemy swordsman appears. The value of the game number display GMV has been updated and "99G" is displayed.

In the N+2G game, the push order bell is internally won, and the right stop button 139 is operated first to perform the first stop. The first stop act here is an irregular push, and since the push order bell has been internally won in the normal state of the advantageous section, it is an act subject to a penalty, and a penalty will be incurred. In the N+2G game, performance 3 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other. Further, since an irregular press has been performed, a recommended operation display REC such as "Press left is recommended" is displayed overlapping the display of the above-mentioned scene. Furthermore, since a penalty has occurred, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is returned by one game, and the value of the number of games display GMV changes from "100G" to "99G". Note that in this example, the darkening display is not displayed, but it may be displayed after this, or a modified example in which the darkening display is not displayed may be used.

The N+3G game is the 4G game after the start of the continuous production, but since the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is returned by one game at the N+2G game, the number of games is displayed. The value of GMV has been updated and "100G" is displayed once again. Further, regarding the continuous performance, performance 3 of the continuous performance is re-executed according to the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the same scene as the N+2G-th scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other is displayed. The recommended operation display REC is not displayed.

Note that re-running a production may mean executing the exact same production, but if multiple types of productions are prepared and a production is selected by lottery, the production should be re-drawn. You can.

At N+4G, the fourth performance (corresponding to the last performance) of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the scene in which the protagonist, the lord, defeated the enemy swordsman, and the AT transition is made. It has been announced. The value of the game number display GMV has been updated and "101G" is displayed.

The example in Figure 18 (b) shown in the lower part is a state in which continuous effects are not being executed (non-continuous effects are being executed) in the normal state of the advantageous zone. More specifically, it is an example in the normal stage shown in Figure 7.

In the NG game, the cherry which is one of the small winnings is internally won, and the small winning effect 1 is executed. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a scene in which the lord is surprised at the appearance of a cherry is displayed. The game number display GMV is "99G".

When the N+1G game is started, the game number display GMV is updated to "100G". In this N+1G, the push order bell is internally won and the normal performance is executed. In this game, an irregular press is performed in which the first stop operation is to the right, and an operation recommendation display REC is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Here, since the push order bell is internally won in the normal state of the advantageous section, this irregular push is an act subject to a penalty, a penalty occurs, and the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is returned by one game, and the value of the game number display GMV changes from "100G" to "99G".

When the N+2G game starts, the game number display GMV is updated to "100G" again. In this N+2G, the watermelon, which is one of the small roles, is internally won, and the small role performance 2 is executed. Since it is not a continuous performance, the performance itself is not re-executed (not returned to the N+1G normal performance), and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the lord is surprised at the appearance of a watermelon.

When the N+3rd game begins, the game count display GMV is updated to "101G". In this N+3rd game, an internal win occurs for a cherry, and minor prize performance 1 is executed. In this game, an irregular press is performed with the first stop operation being to the right, and the operation recommendation display REC is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Here, although it is in the normal state of the advantageous zone, because an internal win occurs for a cherry rather than a push order bell, this irregular press is not subject to penalty, and no penalty occurs. For this reason, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is not returned, and the value of the game count display GMV does not change.

When the N+4G game is started, the game number display GMV is updated to "102G". In this N+4G, an internal winning is made and the normal performance is executed. Incidentally, since no penalty is generated by the N+3G-th irregular press and it is not a continuous performance, the performance itself is not re-executed (it is not returned to the N+3G-th minor role performance 1).

When the N+5G game is started, the game number display GMV is updated to "103G". In this N+5G, the replay is internally won and the normal performance is executed. In this game as well, an irregular press is performed in which the first stop operation is to the right, and an operation recommendation display REC is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. In this game, although it is a normal state in the advantageous section, the replay is internally won instead of the push order bell, so this irregular push is not an act subject to penalty, and no penalty occurs. Therefore, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is not returned, and the value of the number of games display GMV does not change.

In the example of FIG. 18(a) shown in the upper row, the operation recommendation display REC at N+2G, and in the example of FIG. 18(b) shown in the lower row, the operation recommendation display REC at N+1G, the operation recommendation display REC at N+3G, and the operation recommendation display REC at N+5G are all displayed in a common manner. The operation recommendation display REC is displayed in a common manner regardless of the type of performance being executed. In addition, the operation recommendation display REC is displayed in a common manner even if the performance stage is different. This makes it possible to prevent the operation recommendation display REC from being mistaken for a type of anticipation performance.

As compared above, under normal conditions, an irregular press in a game where the push order bell is won is an act subject to a penalty, and during a continuous performance, the performance will be re-executed in the next game, but a non-continuous performance Inside, the performance will not be re-executed in the next game. In the continuous performance (precursor performance) immediately before transitioning to the AT state, there is a problem that there is a gap between the start of the operation navigation and the performance, as explained using FIG. 14(b). Since this kind of problem will not occur if the performance is not in progress (premonitory performance), the performance will not be re-executed. However, if a penalty occurs, the value of the ceiling counter managed by the main control unit 300 is not updated, so the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is also changed to the stage of the next game according to the ceiling counter. It looks like it wasn't updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the third stop. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 40
The number of games managed by 0 is updated when a reel rotation start command indicating the start of a game is received. Therefore, in the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400, the number of games is temporarily returned by one game in the game where the penalty occurred, and in the next game, the number of games is updated at the start of the game as usual. As a result, the value will match the ceiling counter value at the third stop of the next game.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the ceiling counter and the game count display GMV when settings are changed or when power is restored after a power outage.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the ceiling counter and the game number display GMV when a setting change is made or when the power is restored after a power outage. In FIG. 19, the thick white arrows indicate the flow when the normal press (recommended operation) is performed, and the thick black arrow indicates the flow when the irregular press (non-recommended operation) is performed.

The ceiling counter determines whether or not to update the count value at the third stop. Note that this is not limited to the third stop, as long as it is any timing after the first stop within a game. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 can determine whether or not a penalty has occurred after the first stop and can determine whether or not to update the count value. If a penalty has occurred, the ceiling counter does not update the count value (the count value remains the same), and if no penalty has occurred, the count value is updated (the count value is incremented by +1). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a reel spin command from the main control unit 300, it updates the game count display GMV (incrementing by +1).

FIG. 19(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where it is determined that the settings are changed and the transition is made to the advantageous section from the 1st G.

When the settings are changed, the ceiling counter provided in the main control unit 300 becomes 0G, and the game number display GMV on the liquid crystal display device 157 also becomes 0G. Furthermore, the gaming state is a gaming state in a non-advantageous section.

The 1st G starts, a winning combination other than a losing one is won, and the game shifts to an advantageous section from the 2nd G. Hereinafter, a game that has been decided to move to an advantageous section will be referred to as an advantageous section transition game. Note that the advantageous section transition game is a game in the non-advantageous section. The ceiling counter is not updated in a non-advantageous section, but even if it is a non-advantageous section, if it is an advantageous section transition game, it is updated at the timing of the third stop. The game number display GMV is also not updated in a non-advantageous section, but even if it is a non-advantageous section, if it is a game transitioning to an advantageous section, it is updated at the timing of the game start.

When regular pushes are performed during advantageous zone transition play, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the number of games displayed GMV remains at 1G, as indicated by the thick white arrow. When irregular pushes are performed, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the number of games displayed GMV remains at 1G, as indicated by the thick black arrow. The winning role may or may not be the push order bell. In advantageous zone transition play, irregular pushes are not penalized. As a result, the ceiling counter is updated normally at the third stop. Also, the number of games displayed GMV updated at the start of the game remains at 1G at the third stop.

When the second game starts, the game moves to the favorable zone, but is in the normal state. At the timing of the start of the second game, the number of games displayed GMV is updated to 2G. When the normal push is performed, the ceiling counter is updated to 2G at the third stop, as shown by the thick white arrow, and the number of games displayed GMV remains at 2G. When the irregular push is performed after winning the push order bell, a penalty occurs, and the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop, and remains at 1G, as shown by the thick black arrow. In addition, the number of games displayed GMV is returned by 1G to 1G. When the irregular push is performed after winning something other than the push order bell, the ceiling counter is updated to 2G at the third stop, and the number of games displayed GMV remains at 2G.

FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example where the setting change is made and the 1st G is not an advantageous section transition game.

The 1st G starts, the losing hand is won, and the 2nd G remains in an unfavorable section. The ceiling counter is not updated in non-advantageous sections except for advantageous section transfer games. The game number display GMV is also not updated in non-advantageous sections, except for advantageous section transfer games. In addition, no penalty occurs in the non-advantageous section, and even if an irregular push is performed, the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop and remains at 0G, as shown by the thick black arrow, and the game number display GMV remains at 0G.

The 2nd G is started, a winning combination other than a loss is won, and the 2G is an advantageous section transition game. At the timing of the start of the 2nd G, the game number display GMV is updated to 1G. Further, when the forward press is performed, as indicated by the thick white arrow, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV remains at 1G. In addition, as mentioned above, in the advantageous section transition game, there is no penalty even if you make an irregular press regardless of the winning combination, so as the thick black arrow indicates, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the game The number display GMV remains at 1G.

Figure 19 (c) shows an example in which the ceiling counter is 1G or more when power is restored.

In this example, the ceiling counter is 100G when the power is restored after a power outage. On the other hand, when the power is restored after a power outage, the game number display GMV becomes 0G. Note that the gaming state at the time of power restoration after power interruption is the normal state of the advantageous section.

The first game starts, and the GMV is updated to 1G. If the buttons are pressed in order, the ceiling counter is updated to 101G at the third stop, as indicated by the thick white arrow, and the GMV remains at 1G. If the button is pressed irregularly after winning the push order bell (if a penalty occurs), the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop and remains at 100G, as indicated by the thick black arrow. On the other hand, the GMV is updated at the start of the game and remains at 1G. Even if a penalty occurs at the first game after power is restored, the GMV is not reset. If the button is pressed irregularly after winning something other than the push order bell, the ceiling counter is updated to 101G at the third stop, and the GMV remains at 1G.

When the 2nd G starts, the game number display GMV increases by 1G. When the forward press is performed, as indicated by the thick white arrow, the ceiling counter increases by 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV continues to increase by 1G. If an irregular push is performed while the push order bell is won (penalty occurs), the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop and remains at 100G, as indicated by the thick black arrow. Also, the game number display GMV has been returned by 1G to 1G. Note that if an irregular press is performed with a winning position other than the press order bell, the ceiling counter is updated to 101G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV remains at 2G.

FIG. 19(d) is a diagram illustrating an example where the ceiling counter is 0G when the power is restored after a power outage. Note that the gaming state at the time of power restoration after power interruption is the normal state of the advantageous section.

The 1G is started, and the game number display GMV is updated to 1G. When the forward press is performed, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV remains at 1G, as indicated by the thick white arrow. If an irregular push is performed while the push order bell is won (penalty occurs), the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop and remains at 0G, as indicated by the thick black arrow. On the other hand, as described above, even if a penalty occurs in the 1st G after the power is restored, the value of the number of games display GMV is not returned, so the number of games display GMV remains 1G. Note that if an irregular press is performed with a winning position other than the press order bell, the ceiling counter will be updated to 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV will remain at 1G.

When the 2nd G starts, the game number display GMV increases by 1G. When the forward press is performed, as indicated by the thick white arrow, the ceiling counter increases by 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV continues to increase by 1G. If an irregular push is performed while the push order bell is won (penalty occurs), the ceiling counter is not updated at the third stop and remains at 0G, as indicated by the thick black arrow. Also, the game number display GMV has been returned by 1G to 1G. Note that if an irregular press is performed with a winning position other than the press order bell, the ceiling counter is updated to 1G at the third stop, and the game number display GMV remains at 2G.

If the setting is changed before the store opens, it will look like FIG. 19(a) or (b). On the other hand, if the setting is not changed before the store opens, the power will only be turned on, and it will look like FIG. 19(c) or (d). If the player knows that the setting has not been changed, the operation of the slot machine immediately after the store opens may decrease, so it is preferable to make the display of the number of games displayed GMV consistent for both the case where the setting has been changed and the case where the setting has not been changed. Therefore, if the store clerk plays a game in the advantageous zone transition game before the store opens on the gaming machine where the setting has been changed, the number of games displayed GMV will not become 0G, so the player will not know whether the setting has been changed or not. On the other hand, if the setting is changed, the difference number counter (including the virtual difference number counter) in the advantageous zone is reset, and the expected number of game values that can be acquired in the advantageous zone decreases, so it is expected that some players will take the setting change as a bad impression, and the operation of the gaming machine immediately after the store opens may not be extended. Even in such cases, by matching the behavior of the game count display GMV when a setting change is made and when it is not, it becomes difficult to tell whether a setting change has been made or not, and a drop in operation immediately after opening can be prevented.

Next, an example different from the examples described so far will be described.

FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram of the case where a penalty occurs during continuous performance as described above.

If a penalty occurs during continuous performance, the performance is re-executed in the next game. In this aspect, when the number of games until the transition to the AT state is managed by both the main control unit 300 side and the first sub-control unit 400 side (so-called number of games management type/mode management type), the main The number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 can be matched to the number of games managed by the control unit 300. Furthermore, this mode is compatible with the case where the number of games is managed even in the case of a continuous presentation of Gaze (a continuous presentation that does not shift to the AT state even after the continuous presentation ends).

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of display of the game number display GMV when a penalty occurs, as described above.

The number of games display GM is updated at the start of the game, and the number of games is increased by one. When a penalty occurs, the game number display GM returns one game at the timing of the third stop of the game where the penalty occurred. Then, when the next game is started, the game number display GM increases by one. Here, even if a penalty occurs, there is no change in the number of games display GM, and when the next game is started, the number of games display GM may be increased by one. However, when a penalty occurs, the ceiling counter controlled by the main control unit 300 is not updated, resulting in a discrepancy with the ceiling counter. Furthermore, it is also possible that the game number display GM does not advance when the next game is started. However, this may lead to a misunderstanding that a penalty has been awarded in the next game. On the other hand, if the game number display GM goes back one game in the game in which the penalty occurred, it can indicate that the penalty has been completed in the game, and also the difference with the ceiling counter. This has the effect that this will not occur.

FIG. 20(c1) is a conceptual diagram of an example in which, unlike the previous examples, a standby game is performed when a penalty occurs during continuous performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 20(c1), even if a penalty occurs, the continuous performance is continued until the end, and the confirmation performance (performance that displays the AT confirmation screen) that is executed following the continuous performance is repeatedly executed. That is, this mode eliminates the deviation from the ceiling counter by inserting a standby game in which an extra performance is performed immediately before transitioning to the AT state (at the end of the normal state). While an extra confirmed performance is being performed (during standby gaming), characters such as "waiting" are displayed on the display screen.

FIG. 20(c2) is a diagram for explaining an example in which a standby game different from that in FIG. 20(c1) is performed when a penalty occurs during continuous performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 20(c2), even if a penalty occurs, the continuous performance is continued until the end, and the final performance 4 (victory performance) of the continuous performance is repeatedly performed. That is, it is a mode to eliminate the deviation from the ceiling counter by interposing a standby game in which performances in continuous performances (winning performances) are repeated, instead of fixed performances. While the extra victory performance is being performed, characters such as "waiting" are displayed on the victory performance display screen on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, in the case of a continuous performance of Gaze, the continuous performance is similarly performed until the end, but no additional performance is performed at any timing.

In addition, the number of games until the transition to the AT state is managed only on the main control unit 300 side among the main control unit 300 side and the first sub-control unit 400 side, and the number of games is managed in the continuous production of Gaze. This mode is suitable for cases where the Furthermore, this mode is compatible with a specification in which the AT lottery is performed based on the winning combination, rather than a specification in which the transition to the AT state is determined depending on the number of games or the mode.

In addition, if an irregular push is performed and a penalty occurs, and if a rare role is internally won in the next game after the penalty occurs, a special process (rare role avoidance navigation) that navigates the pressing order to avoid winning the rare role ) may be executed. If a player recognizes that a penalty has occurred due to a blackout display, etc., and wins a rare prize immediately after the penalty, he or she may feel disappointed because the previous penalty affects the profit obtained from the rare prize and causes a loss. , we intentionally execute a navigation to avoid rare roles so that players will not be disappointed.

Further, in a game in which a penalty occurs, an AT lottery is not performed, but an AT lottery is performed in the next game. However, preferential treatment regarding AT that may be executed when winning an AT lottery (for example, an additional lottery for the number of AT grant games) will not be performed in the game following the game in which the penalty occurred.

Next, the display mode of the recommended operation display REC will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of the display mode of the operation recommendation display REC displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 21(a) shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 before the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and an image is displayed using the entire display screen.

FIG. 21(b) continued from FIG. 21(a) shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 when the start lever 135 is operated and all three reels 110 to 112 are rotating. This display screen displays a normal performance image (a scene in which an old man is reading a letter to a lord in a castle tower).

In FIG. 21(c1) continuing from FIG. 21(b), the lord's line display SPE such as "I feel like there is a good opportunity" is displayed. All three reels 110-112 continue to rotate.

In FIG. 21 (c2) continuing from FIG. 21 (c1), only the middle reel 111 among the three reels 110 to 112 is stopped. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated as the first stop operation, and an irregular press is performed. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(c2), an operation recommendation display REC is displayed at a position above the line display SPE such as "There are signs of a good opportunity." That is, the recommended operation display REC and the dialogue display SPE do not overlap. Further, the recommended operation display REC does not overlap with the storage number display section 125L on the left side, and neither does the recommended operation display REC and the payout number display section 127L on the right side.

The display mode of the operation recommendation display REC is the same regardless of the type of effect being executed (for example, normal effect, small win effect, duel effect, freeze effect, etc.).

Figure 21 (c3) is a diagram showing another display mode of the operation recommendation display REC. The operation recommendation display REC shown in this figure is displayed on the entire screen except for the three reels 110 to 112. In other words, the text "Push left recommended" is displayed on a gray background.

FIG. 21(c4) is a diagram showing the relationship between the recommended operation display REC and the error display.

The error display ERR, in which the words "Error" are displayed on a gray background, is displayed on the entire screen excluding the three reels 110 to 112. Even if the recommended operation display REC is displayed before this error display ERR, or even if the recommended operation display REC is displayed after the error display ERR, the error will be displayed on the recommended operation display REC. The ERR overlaps, making the operation recommendation display REC difficult to see. In this FIG. 21(c4), the recommended operation display REC overlapped with the error display ERR is represented by a dotted line. In this example, the operation recommendation display REC is entirely overlapped with the full-screen error display ERR, but at least a portion thereof may be overlapped. Specific errors in the error display ERR include a door opening error, a hopper clogging error, a hopper empty error, and an error in the number of medals passed (the same applies to the following description).

As explained above, the recommended operation display REC is displayed in an area that overlaps with the error display ERR but does not overlap with the dialogue display SPE, so that a part of the performance can be grasped. Further, the operation recommendation display REC is displayed approximately at the center of the display screen.

Note that in a medalless gaming machine, counting is possible at any time, so counting is possible even when the recommended operation display REC is displayed, and the recommended operation display REC may be displayed during counting.

Next, an example will be described in which the error display ERR is displayed while the operation recommendation display REC is displayed and the error is recovered.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where an error display ERR is displayed while a recommended operation display REC is displayed, or a case where a power failure/recovery occurs. In FIG. 22, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is shown in chronological order from left to right.

As described above, the operation recommendation display REC is a display that is displayed when an irregular press is detected, but even if an irregular press is performed, it may or may not result in a penalty. If a penalty occurs, the recommended operation display REC will be displayed even after the third stop, and will disappear when the next game starts (see the example shown in Figure 16), but if a penalty has not occurred, the operation recommendation display REC will be displayed. , the penalty disappears at a faster timing than when it occurs (see the example shown in FIG. 17).

FIG. 22(a1) is a diagram illustrating an example where a penalty occurs due to an irregular press.

On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown at the far left, an operation recommendation display REC is displayed overlapping the display of the normal effect. An error is detected while the recommended operation display REC is displayed, and the error display ERR is displayed on the entire display screen, and the recommended operation display REC becomes invisible (hidden). That is, an error is detected in a game in which a penalty occurs. Thereafter, the error in the game in which the penalty occurred is resolved and the error returns, the error display ERR disappears, and the state returns to the state where the operation recommendation display REC is displayed again. When the start lever 135 is operated to start the next game, the recommended operation display REC disappears, and the display screen displays the performance display (small role performance display) for the next game.

FIG. 22(a2) is a diagram showing an example of a case where an irregular push is performed but no penalty occurs.

On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown at the far left, an operation recommendation display REC is displayed overlapping the display of the normal effect. An error is detected before the third stop is performed, and the error display ERR is displayed on the entire display screen, and the operation recommendation display REC becomes invisible (hidden). After that, a third stop is performed, and if the error is resolved and the error returns before a predetermined time has elapsed since the third stop, the error display ERR disappears and the operation recommendation display REC returns to the state where it is displayed again. . On the other hand, if the error is resolved and the error returns after a predetermined period of time has passed since the third stop, the operation recommendation display REC is not displayed on the display screen after the error display ERR disappears.

Note that the error detection timing in this example may be within a period after the third stop and before the predetermined time elapses.

As explained above, if an error occurs while displaying the recommended operation display REC, the error display ERR will be displayed on the full screen, and if the error is recovered within the display period of the recommended operation display REC, the recommended operation display REC will remain. However, if the error returns after the display period has elapsed, no operation recommendation display REC remains.

Next, an example will be described in which a power outage recovery occurs while the operation recommendation display REC is displayed.

FIG. 22(b1) is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a power outage recovery occurs after the third stop and before the next game is started.

The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown at the far left is the display screen after the third stop (while the reels are stopped), and the operation recommendation display REC is displayed overlapping the display of the normal effect. Before the start lever 135 is operated (before the next game is started), a power outage occurs and the display screen after the power is restored displays a start-up screen (a screen with the words "Starting up" displayed). This example is an example in which a demo screen is displayed after a power outage occurs while the reels are stopped and the operation recommendation display REC is displayed. In the demo screen, the operation recommendation display REC is erased, and when the start lever 135 is operated while the demo screen is displayed, the next game starts and the display screen displays the effect of the next game (a display of a small winning effect). Therefore, the operation recommendation display REC that was displayed immediately before the power outage is not displayed after the power is restored. Note that a dedicated screen for when power is restored (for example, a recovery screen with the words "Recovery" displayed) may be displayed instead of the demo screen.

FIG. 22(b2) is a diagram illustrating a first example when a power outage recovery occurs before the third stop when the operation recommendation display REC is displayed.

The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown at the far left is the display screen after the irregular press and before the third stop (while the reels are rotating), and the recommended operation display REC is displayed overlapping the display of the normal effect. has been done. A power failure occurs while the reels are rotating, and the startup screen is displayed on the display screen after the power is restored. This first example is an example in which when a power outage is restored while the reels are rotating while the operation recommendation display REC is displayed, a recovery screen, which is a screen dedicated to power restoration, is displayed after the startup screen. On the return screen, the recommended operation display REC has disappeared, and if the start lever 135 is operated while the return screen is displayed, the next game will start, and the display screen will display the effect display for the next game. There is. Therefore, in this first example as well, the operation recommendation display REC immediately before the power outage is not displayed after the power is restored.

FIG. 22(b3) is a diagram illustrating a second example in the case where a power outage recovery occurs before the third stop when the operation recommendation display REC is displayed.

In this second example, if power is restored during a power outage while the reels are rotating while the recommended operation display REC is being displayed, an effect display immediately before the power outage is displayed after the startup screen. Here, a normal presentation is displayed. In the effect display after the startup screen, the recommended operation display REC has disappeared, and if the start lever 135 is operated in this state, the next game will start, and the effect display for the next game will be displayed on the display screen. There is. Therefore, in this example as well, the operation recommendation display REC immediately before the power outage is not displayed after the power is restored.

FIG. 22(b4) is a diagram illustrating a third example where a power outage recovery occurs before the third stop when the operation recommendation display REC is displayed.

In this third example, if power is restored during a power outage while the reels are rotating while the recommended operation display REC is being displayed, the screen immediately before the power outage is displayed after the startup screen. Here, the recommended operation display REC is displayed overlapping the display of the normal effect. Therefore, in this third example, the operation recommendation display REC immediately before the power outage is displayed after the power is restored. Note that when the next game starts, the recommended operation display REC disappears and the effect display of the next game is displayed.

According to the above description,
``A control means [for example, the main control unit 300] capable of executing a second process that is advantageous to the player [for example, AT transition lottery, ceiling counter update];
A display means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157] capable of displaying a value display [for example, game number display GMV] representing a value based on the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising:
The control means is configured to provide information to the player when a predetermined execution condition [for example, an irregular push is performed in a state where the push order bell is won in the normal state (non-AT state) of the advantageous section] is satisfied. A means for executing the first process that is disadvantageous [for example, penalty process (not performing AT transition lottery, not updating ceiling counter)],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the value display in a first mode [for example, a display mode updated by 1G] at a first timing in a certain game [for example, the timing of the game start],
If the predetermined execution condition is satisfied after displaying in the first mode, the display means displays the display at a second timing [for example, third stop timing] that is later than the first timing. A means that may display the value in a second mode [for example, a display mode that returns 1G],
The display means does not display the value display in the second mode even at the second timing if the predetermined execution condition is not satisfied after displaying the value in the first mode. means [e.g., continue displaying in the first mode],
The second aspect is a different aspect from the first aspect,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, when the first process is less advantageous than the second process, the second process is performed at the second timing after the first timing in the certain game. By displaying the value displayed in the first mode in the second mode, the player can understand that the first process has been completed in the certain game. , it is possible to prevent the player from worrying that the first process will extend to the next game.

The processing that is disadvantageous to the player may be processing that prevents the player from transitioning to the advantageous game state, or processing that does not perform preferential processing that is advantageous to the player (for example, an additional lottery, processing that provides preferential treatment for the initial number of Gs granted in the AT, processing that acquires the right to transition to a specialized zone in the AT state, etc.).

For example, when the predetermined execution conditions are met, (a) the normal state in the advantageous section (not in the non-advantageous section, not in the AT state), (b) the predetermined combination (for example, the pressing order This is a case where all of the conditions (a) to (c) are satisfied: (a) the game is an internal winning game; and (c) an operation different from the recommended operation is performed. Note that the value display may be a case where one or more of the conditions (a) to (c) are satisfied.The value display may be a display that has a one-to-one relationship with the number of games (for example, a display that has a one-to-one relationship with the number of games). The number of games may be displayed), or the number of games may be displayed not in a one-to-one relationship with the number of games.

If the predetermined execution condition is not satisfied after displaying in the first mode, the display means displays the value display even at the second timing, but does not display the value in the second mode. It may not be displayed in the above mode, it may not be displayed in the first mode, or the value display may not be displayed.

Also,
“The first mode is the mode displayed by performing the first update display of the value display [for example, +1G update display],
The second mode is a mode displayed by performing a second update display of the value display [for example, an update display of -1G].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

If the first process is involved, the second update display is displayed after the first update display is displayed within the certain game, so the first process may be performed within the certain game. The player can understand that the game has been performed.

Note that the second update display may be an update display that returns the value updated in the first update display to the value before the update.

Also,
“The first update display is a display that updates the value represented by the value display [e.g., number of games] displayed on the display means by a predetermined number of times [e.g., one game];
The second update display is a display that returns the value updated in the first update display to the value before being updated.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the number of plays updated by a predetermined number at the first timing involves an unfavorable first process, the number of plays is returned to the number before the update, making it possible to understand that the unfavorable process has been completed with that certain play.

Also,
“One of the predetermined execution conditions is a condition that is satisfied when a specific event [for example, an irregular press] occurs.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the specific event may be a certain operation by the player, or may be an operation other than the operation recommended by this game machine (non-recommended operation).

Also,
``Equipped with reels [for example, reels 110 to 112] that stop rotation by a stop operation,
The stop operation includes a recommended stop operation [for example, a sequential push stop operation],
The specific event is that a stop operation different from the recommended stop operation [for example, an irregular press stop operation] is performed;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By determining the stopping operations that may be disadvantageous, it is possible to recommend the player to play the game using the recommended stopping operations.

Also,
``When a predetermined transition condition [for example, internally winning a winning combination other than a losing one] is satisfied, the game will be moved from a non-advantageous section [for example, a section in which it is impossible to shift to an AT state] to a game from the non-advantageous section. The configuration is such that the system moves to an advantageous section [for example, a section where it is possible to shift to an AT state] that is advantageous for the user,
The control means is a means for not executing the first process in the non-advantageous section even if the first condition is satisfied.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the timing for transitioning from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone could be the first game after the settings are changed, but the first game after the settings are changed is often when the store opens. First thing in the morning, the reels are not yet warmed up, so it takes time for them to accelerate, and the timing at which the stop operation can be accepted is slightly delayed. Therefore, even if the player presses the left stop button in the first operation, the timing may be off and the middle stop button may actually be pressed at the timing mentioned above. It would be harsh on the player to impose a penalty in such a case, so by not executing the first process in the non-advantageous zone even if the first condition is met, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage.

Note that the advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to shift to a notification gaming state (AT state) that notifies the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the stop operation, and the non-advantageous section refers to It may also be a section in which it is impossible to shift to a gaming state.

The control means may be means for managing values based on the progress of the game. More specifically, the means may include a counter (ceiling counter) for counting the number of games played until the transition to the notification gaming state occurs in the advantageous section.

Further, the control means is means for updating the value of the counter in a game in the non-advantageous section immediately before shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section [for example, an advantageous section transition game], and the display means may be means for updating and displaying the value display according to the start of the game [for example, see the thick white arrow in the advantageous section transition game in FIG. 19(a)].

Also,
``The display means does not display the value display in the second mode in the first game after power restoration even if the predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the first game after power restoration [for example, 19(c) and (d) of the same figure],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prevent players from knowing whether settings have been changed or not.

Next, the winning combination data stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 will be explained.

Figure 23 (a) shows the winning combination data stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

The winning combination information on the left side shown in FIG. 23(a) is the same as the winning combination information shown in FIG. 6(a). There are four patterns (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL) with different stop operation modes (press order) for the bell (push order bell) which is the push order combination. Furthermore, three winning combinations (1 to 3) are prepared for each pattern. That is, three combinations are prepared in the same pressing order. For combinations with the same push order, the player's profit is the same, but by preparing three each, the results can be varied. For example, if there is only one winning combination for one pressing order, only a specific result will be displayed for a specific pressing order, which will become monotonous, but we will provide multiple winnings for one pressing order. By doing this, the shapes in which the winning combinations are displayed can be different even when the pressing order is the same, and it is possible to prevent the results from becoming monotonous.

Each winning combination is assigned a consecutive natural number (winning combination number) such as "00" to "34" that corresponds one-to-one with the winning combination.

In the explanations so far, the transition from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section is achieved by winning a winning combination other than a losing one. That is, if a winning combination of "01" or higher associated with Replay 3 is internally won, the game will move to the advantageous section.

In this example, if a winning combination of "04" or higher associated with Replay 1 is internally won, the game shifts to the advantageous section. A winning combination number of "04" or higher, that is, a winning combination number belonging to the range of "04" to "34" is an advantageous section number. On the other hand, winning combination numbers less than "04", ie, winning combination numbers belonging to the range of "01" to "03", become non-advantageous section numbers. In this way, by determining the winning combination numbers separately for the winning combinations that are allowed to shift to the advantageous section and the winnings that are not allowed, it is possible to implement the advantageous section transition process, which will be described later, with a simple process.

The winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a) includes the winning combination information on the left side as well as information on the small combination group and the rare combination group.

The information on the small role group includes a push order group consisting of all push order Bell roles, a 1-card role 7, and a 1-card role 8 among the push order roles. For small winning combinations that are not included in this push order winning group, a consecutive number (natural number) is assigned to each small winning combination. In other words, small winning numbers from "01" to "21" are assigned, which correspond one-to-one with the small winnings. Therefore, the small winnings can be identified by the small winning numbers. On the other hand, in the push order group, a group number ("00") is assigned to the entire group, and no number is assigned to each bell role or one-card role. For this reason, types such as push order winnings can be identified by group numbers, but small roles (push order bell_CLR, push order bell_CRL, push order bell_RLC, push order bell_RCL, 1-card winning combination 7, 1-card winning combination) 8) cannot be distinguished, and the stop operation mode (pressing order) cannot be distinguished. That is, from the group number, it can be determined whether or not the combination is in the order of pressing, but it cannot be determined which is the correct operation (operation mode that may be most advantageous to the player). In addition, even if it is possible to specify that it is a pressing winning combination, it can also be said that the information cannot specify which type of pressing winning combination (Bell_CLR1, Bell_CRL1, etc.) it is. In the AT state, when the main control unit 300 transmits an internal winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, the main control unit 300 transmits it including winning combination information (winning combination number), and the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400: The winning role information (winning role number) is used to conduct a lottery regarding performances such as AT performances. Further, the main control section 300 may transmit information indicating the pressing order to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control section 400 instead of or together with the winning combination information (winning combination number). On the other hand, in the normal state (non-AT state), the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 does not need to perform AT performance, and instead of referring to the 35 winning combination numbers "00" to "34", Referring to the 22 numbers from ``00'' to ``21'' results in faster processing and a smaller program capacity. Therefore, when transmitting an internal winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, the main control unit 300 does not include the winning combination information (winning combination number) in the normal state (non-AT state), and The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the information of the minor role group to perform processing such as a production lottery (for example, a lottery for whether or not to execute a suggestive production, an announcement production for the level of expectation, etc.). conduct. In addition, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires new information from the information on the small role groups (the information on the small role groups is further grouped, such as push order, replay, common bell, cherry, watermelon, and chance). The new information may be used to perform the performance lottery and performance processing, and even with such specifications, it can be said that information on the small role group is used.

The rare role group is a further grouping of the small role group, and the information is divided into a group of weak rare roles, a group of strong rare roles, and a group of non-rare roles (other groups). The group of weak rare roles is assigned a group number ("01") unique to the entire group, and each rare role (watermelon, weak cherry) is not assigned a number. The group of strong rare roles is assigned a group number ("02") unique to the entire group, and each rare role (strong cherry, chance eye) is not assigned a number. The other groups are assigned a group number ("03") unique to the entire group, and each role is not assigned a number. Therefore, the group number can distinguish whether the role is rare or not, and furthermore, the type of rare role such as weak rare role and strong rare role can be identified. However, the group number cannot identify the small role, and it is not possible to know which pattern should be pressed. When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs an AT lottery or a lottery for transition to a high probability state described later according to the result of the lottery, the CPU 304 may perform the lottery process using a rare role group, since the lottery process of "Other? → Weak rare role? → Strong rare role?" is lighter than the lottery process of "Replay? → Bell? → Weak cherry? → Strong cherry → Watermelon? → Chance eye?". The same is true for the lottery process in the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 may send an internal winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 by including information on the rare role group in the internal winning command.

The main control unit 300 may use the winning combination information to perform an AT lottery to determine whether to transition to the AT state, a transition lottery to a high probability state, and a CZ lottery to determine whether to transition to a CZ state. You may use a small role group, you may use a rare role group, you may use a small role group or a rare role group depending on the object of the lottery. For example, if the AT lottery is a win (transfers to AT state) only when a strong cherry is won, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 can perform lottery processing using the small role group, and select the strong cherry or chance. If it is a win (transition to AT state) only when the winning combination is won, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 can perform lottery processing using the rare combination group.

The winning number, minor winning number, and group number explained above are expressed in binary or hexadecimal in the program (the same applies to the following explanations).

Figure 23 (b) is a flowchart of the favorable zone transition process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

This advantageous section transition process is executed after the winning combination is determined in the various lottery process steps S105 shown in FIG.

First, the CPU 304 sets a winning combination number (winning combination information) of "00" to "34" shown in FIG. It is determined whether the winning combination number is equal to or greater than "04", which is the winning combination number associated with Replay 1 (step S251). In addition, as a determination method, a comparison instruction such as a "CP instruction" can be used, and depending on the success or failure of the carry flag (if the carry flag = 1, the transition to the advantageous section will not occur), the process of determining the transition to the advantageous section is performed. It can be carried out. In the case of a numerical value without a sign, such as winning combination information, it is only necessary to perform processing according to the success or failure of the carry flag, so by using a comparison instruction, it is possible to reduce the processing load while using a simple instruction.

If the winning combination number associated with the winning combination is "04" or more, the gaming state is set to an advantageous section (step S252). Here, there is a high probability state where the probability of winning the AT lottery is relatively high and a low probability state where the probability of winning is relatively low. Transition to low probability state. Further, the ceiling number of games may be set to a first number of games (for example, 1000 games) or may be set to a second number of games (for example, 500 games). Multiple types of advantageous sections are prepared by combining the transition timing of the high probability state and the number of ceiling games, and the advantageous section set in step S252 is an advantageous section selected by lottery from among these multiple types of advantageous sections. Become.

On the other hand, if the winning combination number associated with the winning combination is less than "04", the advantageous section transition process ends and the non-advantageous section continues.

As explained above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the winning combination falls within the range of "04" to "34", that is, whether the winning combination number corresponding to the winning combination is 4 or more. All you have to do is make a judgment. In terms of program instructions, when the non-advantageous period continues, the winning combination number is set in a predetermined register (for example, A register), and the contents of the predetermined register and the contents of Replay 1 ("04") are set. A simple program that compares the numbers and ends when the winning combination number is less than 4 is sufficient, and the capacity of the program can be reduced compared to determining whether or not each winning combination is an advantageous section transition combination. Further, it is possible to reliably eliminate winnings that are not advantageous section transition winnings.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram regarding the instruction monitor controlled by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

In the AT state, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may use the game information display 126 shown in FIG. 1 to display the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. The game information display 126, which may display the number of medals paid out during the bonus game, etc., functions as an instruction monitor.

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing the game information display 126 in which seven segment displays are arranged horizontally.

At the far left of FIG. 24(a), an instruction display (display of the number 7) is shown when instructing CLR (center right/left) operation, and to its right side is an instruction display when instructing CRL (center right left) operation. An instruction display (displaying the number 8) is shown in the center, and an instruction display (displaying the number 9) for instructing RLC (center right left center) operation is shown in the center. Left) An instruction display (display of the number 10) for instructing operations is shown, and on the far right, the player can press the button in any order corresponding to 1-card winning 7 and 1-card winning 8. A common display (display of the number 11) indicating that the profits are the same is shown depending on the pressing order.

Figure 24 (b) is a flowchart of the instruction monitor setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

This instruction monitor setting process is executed after the winning combination is determined in the various lottery process steps S105 shown in FIG.

First, the CPU 304 determines whether the winning combination is a combination that belongs to the pressing order combination of the small combination group shown in FIG. 23(a) (step S261). In terms of program instructions, the number of the minor role group to which the winning role corresponds (the minor role number from "01" to "21" or the group number of "00") is the group number " 00''. The CPU 304 has to refer to 35 numbers such as "00" to "34" for winning combination numbers, but for small winning combination groups, it only needs to refer to 22 numbers, increasing the processing speed. Furthermore, the capacity of the program becomes smaller.

If the winning combination does not belong to the group of pressed combinations, this instruction monitor setting process ends. On the other hand, if the winning combination belongs to the group of pressed combinations, it is determined whether the current gaming state is an AT state (step S262). Among the various game states shown in FIG. 7, the normal stage is "01", the CZ is "02", the pullback zone is "03", and the bonus state is "03".
Game state numbers such as "04", "05" for the AT normal state, "06" for the additional zone, and "07" for the ending state are given. A gaming state number representing the current gaming state is set in a register (for example, A register) of the CPU 304. In step S262, it is determined whether the gaming state number set in the register is "04" or more. If it is less than "04", this instruction monitor setting process ends; If there is, an instruction information value is calculated in step S263. That is, if the current gaming state is the AT state, the process advances to step S263.

In step S263, processing is performed using the winning combination information (winning combination number) instead of the information on the small winning combination group used in step S261. That is, the winning combination number associated with the winning combination is divided by 3, and the value of the quotient of the division result is determined as the instruction information value. For example, if Bell_CLR2 is won, the winning combination number "22" is divided by 3 and the quotient value is "7", so "7" is determined as the instruction information value. The "3" used here corresponds to the number of prepared winning combinations with the same pressing order. In other words, in order to have a variety of outcomes, we have prepared three winning combination numbers in the same pressing order, so there are three winning combination numbers.In order to perform common processing for these three winning combination numbers, we divide by 3, and the remainder is is not considered, and the value of the quotient is determined as the instruction information value. This makes the process simple.

In the following step S264, the instruction monitor information is set based on the instruction information value calculated in step S263, and the instruction monitor setting process ends. The set instruction monitor information is displayed on the game information display 126, which functions as the instruction monitor.

Note that the CPU 304 is also capable of processing information on small role groups and rare roles due to the above-mentioned high processing speed and small program capacity, even in AT lottery and lottery in a high probability state where the probability of winning the AT lottery is relatively high. Process using group information.

FIG. 24(c) is a modification of the flowchart of the instruction monitor setting process shown in FIG. 24(b).

In the previous explanation, the number 7 to number 11 was displayed on the game information display 12, which functions as an instruction monitor, as shown in FIG. 24(a), but in this modification, The number 0 to number 4 is displayed.

Step S271 and step S272 are the same as step S261 and step S262 described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

If the winning combination is a pressing combination and the current gaming state is the AT state, in step S273, the CPU 304 selects the winning combination as shown in FIG. 23(a) from the value of the winning combination number (winning combination information) associated with the winning combination. 21, which is the value of the winning winning combination number associated with Bell_CLR1, which is the pushing winning combination located at the head of the pressing winning combination of the small winning combination group shown in , to obtain the winning winning combination information subtraction value. In step S274, the winning combination information subtraction value is divided by 3, and the value of the quotient of the division result is set as the winning combination information subtraction division value. In step S275, a value of "1" is added to the winning combination information subtraction division value, and if the value of the addition result exceeds "4", 0 is determined as the instruction information value; If not, the value of the result of adding is determined as the instruction information value. For example, if Bell_CLR2 has been won, first, "21" is subtracted from the winning combination number "22" to obtain a winning combination information subtraction value of "1" (step S273). Next, "1" is divided by 3, and since the value of the quotient is "0", this "0" is set as the winning combination information subtraction division value (step S274). Finally, "1" is added to "0", and since the added value does not exceed "4", "1" is determined as the instruction information value. On the other hand, if the winning combination 7 has been won, first, "21" is subtracted from the winning combination number "33" to obtain a winning combination information subtraction value of "12" (step S273). Next, "12" is divided by 3, and since the quotient value is "4", this "4" is set as the winning combination information subtraction division value (step S274). Finally, "1" is added to "4", and since the added value exceeds "4", "0" is determined as the instruction information value.

In the following step S276, instruction monitor information is set based on the instruction information value determined in step S275, and this instruction monitor setting process ends. As a result, the game information display 126, which functions as an instruction monitor, displays the number 1 when instructing a CLR operation, and displays the number 2 when instructing a CRL operation. When instructing RLC operation, the number 3 is displayed, and when RCL operation is instructed, the number 4 is displayed. In addition, the number 0 is displayed as a display common to the pressing order corresponding to the one-card winning combination 7 and the one-card winning combination 8, which indicates that the player's profit is the same regardless of which pressing order is performed.

In the instruction monitor setting process shown in FIG. 24(b) described above, the quotient after the division process is displayed as is on the instruction monitor, and the information to be displayed on the instruction monitor is determined by one division process. Processing becomes easier. On the other hand, depending on the number of winning combinations and types of winning combinations, the instruction monitor information displayed on the game information display 126 will be displayed from a value other than "1". In this example, the numbers are displayed starting from "7" as shown in FIG. 24(a). On the other hand, in the instruction monitor setting process shown in FIG. 24(b), the instruction monitor information displayed on the game information display 126 can be displayed from "1", making it easier for players to understand. can.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a). Hereinafter, the differences from the winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a) will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

Figure 25(a) shows another example 1 of the winning combination data. In this another example 1, the winning combination information is the same as the winning combination information of the winning combination data shown in Figure 23(a). That is, the same 35 winning combinations (minor combinations) as the winning combination information shown in Figure 23(a) are lined up in the same order, and natural number consecutive numbers (winning combination numbers) such as "00" to "34" that correspond one-to-one to the winning combinations are assigned.

Of the 35 winning combinations (minor combinations) in this alternative example 1, the relationship between the display mode and the number of coins paid out for each operation content of the common bell and the pressing combination is the same as the relationship shown in FIG. 6(b). .

In another example 1, if a winning combination of "05" or higher associated with Replay 2 is internally won, the game shifts to the advantageous section. A winning combination number of "05" or higher, that is, a winning combination number belonging to the range of "05" to "34" is an advantageous section number. On the other hand, winning combination numbers less than "05", ie, winning combination numbers belonging to the range of "01" to "04", become non-advantageous section numbers.

In the information on the small role group in the modified example 1, in addition to the same push order role group as the push order role group in the information on the small role group in the winning role data shown in FIG. 23(a), a group of replay groups, which is a different push order role, is also provided. Small roles that are not included in the push order role group or the replay group group are assigned small role numbers "01" to "04" and "06" to "16" that correspond one-to-one to the small roles. Therefore, it is possible to identify the small roles by the small role number. On the other hand, in the replay group group, a unique group number ("05") is assigned to the entire group, and no number is assigned to each replay role. Therefore, although the type of role such as a replay role can be identified by the group number, it is not possible to distinguish between the replay roles, and the stop operation mode (push order) cannot be identified.

In another example 1, since replay 1, which is not transferred to the advantageous section, is also grouped into the replay group ("05"), in the advantageous section transition processing shown in FIG. 23(b), the winning combination information is It is convenient to refer to it.

Although not shown, the winning combination data of Example 1 also includes the same rare combination group as the rare combination group in the winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a).

FIG. 25(b) shows another example 2 of the winning combination data. Also in this second example, the winning combination information is the same as the winning combination information of the winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a). In other words, the same 35 winning combinations (small winning combinations) as the winning combination information shown in FIG. A consecutive number (winning role number) is attached.

Among the 35 winning combinations (minor combinations) in this alternative example 2, the relationship between the display mode and the number of coins paid out for each operation content of the common bell and the pressing combination is the same as the relationship shown in FIG. 6(b). .

In another example 2, when a winning combination of "21" or higher associated with the push order bell_CLR1 is internally won, the game shifts to an advantageous section. A winning combination number of "21" or higher, that is, a winning combination number belonging to the range of "21" to "34" is an advantageous section number. On the other hand, winning combination numbers less than "21", ie, winning combination numbers belonging to the range of "01" to "20", become non-advantageous section numbers.

The information on the small role group in another example 2 includes a push order group consisting of all the push order Bell roles, 1-card role 6, 1-card role 7, and 1-card role 8 among the push order roles. There is. For small winning combinations that are not included in this push order winning group, a consecutive number (natural number) is assigned to each small winning combination. In other words, small winning numbers from "01" to "20" are assigned, which correspond one-to-one with the small winnings. Therefore, the small winnings can be identified by the small winning numbers. On the other hand, in the push order group, a group number ("00") is assigned to the entire group, and no number is assigned to each bell role or one-card role. For this reason, types such as push order winnings can be identified by group numbers, but small roles (push order bell_CLR, push order bell_CRL, push order bell_RLC, push order bell_RCL, 1 card 6, 1 card win) 7. One-card combinations (8) cannot be distinguished, and the stopping operation mode (pressing order) cannot be identified. That is, based on the group number, it is not known which is the correct operation (the operation mode that may be most advantageous to the player).

In the second example, the 1-coin role 6 that does not transition to the favorable zone is also grouped in the push order role loop ("00"). Therefore, in the favorable zone transition process shown in FIG. 23(b), it is more convenient to refer to the winning role information rather than the small role group.

Although not shown, the winning combination data of Example 2 also includes the same rare combination group as the rare combination group in the winning combination data shown in FIG. 23(a).

According to the above description,
``It is determined whether the transition conditions for transitioning to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player [e.g., winning a winning role other than loss, replay 3, 1 piece in RB, or bell in RB] are satisfied, and the transition condition is determined. an advantageous section setting means (for example, a CPU 304 that executes the advantageous section transition process shown in FIG. 23(b)) that sets the advantageous section to the advantageous section when the above is satisfied;
Winning result determining means for determining one of the plurality of winning results [for example, the CPU 304 that executes the internal winning combination lottery process in the various lottery processes (step S105) shown in FIG. 10];
A game machine comprising:
Each of the plurality of winning results [for example, the winning combination information shown in FIG. 23(a)] corresponds to first numerical information [for example, the winning combination number of the winning combination information shown in FIG. 23(a)]. It is attached,
The advantageous section setting means sets the first numerical information corresponding to the winning result determined by the winning result determining means to a specific value [for example, "04" or "0100" expressed in binary or hexadecimal. 4] or more [for example, the determination result of Yes in step S251 shown in FIG. 23(b)], the transition condition is satisfied and the advantageous section is set [for example, Step S252 shown in b)],
The advantageous section setting means determines that if the first numerical information corresponding to the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is less than the specific value [for example, No in step S251 shown in FIG. 23(b)]. determination result], the transition condition is not satisfied and the advantageous section is not set [for example, the end of the advantageous section transition process shown in FIG. 23(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous section can be set by determining whether the first numerical information corresponding to the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is greater than or equal to a specific value. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced compared to determining whether or not it is an advantageous section transition combination for each winning result. Also, the data capacity does not have to be enormous.

Note that the plurality of first numerical information items associated with each of the plurality of winning results may be continuous values, or may be values arranged at intervals. Alternatively, it may be a discrete value. However, a plurality of pieces of first numerical information are provided in each of the plurality of winning results such that a winning result that sets the advantageous section and a winning result that does not set the advantageous section can be distinguished based on the specific value. It must be matched.

moreover,
Advantageous section setting means that determines whether or not transition conditions for transitioning to an advantageous zone that is advantageous for the player are satisfied, and sets the transition condition to the advantageous zone if the transition condition is satisfied;
Winning result determining means for determining the winning result;
A game machine comprising:
The first information is associated with the winning result,
The advantageous section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section if the first information corresponding to the winning result determined by the winning result determining means satisfies a predetermined condition;
The advantageous section setting means does not set the advantageous section if the first information corresponding to the winning result determined by the winning result determining means does not satisfy the predetermined condition;
The first information is information in which information that satisfies the predetermined condition and information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition are classified.
A game machine characterized by:
It may be.

Also,
"The number of winning results in which the first numerical information is equal to or greater than the specific value [e.g., 31 in FIG. 23(a)] is greater than the number of winning results in which the first numerical information is less than the specific value [e.g., 4 in FIG. 23(a)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

By doing so, the advantageous section can be set at an early stage, and the processing speed can be increased.

Also,
“The total winning probability of the winning results where the first numerical information is equal to or greater than the specific value [for example, (a)+(b)+(c)+(d) in FIG. 6(a)]] is The total value of winning probabilities of winning results in which the first numerical information is less than the specific value [for example, (e) + (f) + (g) + (h) + (i) in FIG. 6(a) +(j)+(k)+(l)+(m)+(n)]. ”
Also explained.

By doing so, the advantageous section can be set at an early stage, and the processing speed can be increased.

Also,
“A reel that stops rotating by a stop operation [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A privilege granting means [e.g., main control unit 300],
The plurality of winning results include a plurality of types [e.g., Bell CLR, Bell CRL, Bell RLC, Bell RCL] associated with operation modes advantageous to the player in the stop operation [e.g., so-called correct operation]. , 1-card hand 7, 1-card hand 8] operation mode results [for example, push order hand] are included,
The benefit granting means uses second information different from the first numerical information [for example, information on a minor role group] to carry out processing related to granting a benefit [for example, AT state] [for example, AT state transition lottery]. [For example, in a normal state (non-AT state)]
The second information can specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, a push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, a push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, the push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, the push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, the push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, the push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [for example, the push order combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the result of the operation mode [e.g. Whether it is [for example, Bell CLR, Bell CRL, Bell RLC, Bell RCL, 1-card role 7, or 1-card role 8] is information that cannot be specified.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

From the viewpoint of the lottery means, there may be a gaming state in which the advantageous operation mode is not necessary, and conversely, a lottery using the second information may require less processing program capacity. be.

According to the above description,
“A reel that stops rotating by a stop operation [for example, reels 110 to 112],
Winning result determining means that determines one of the winning results among the plurality of winning results [for example, the CPU 304 that executes the internal winning combination lottery process in the various lottery processes (step S105) shown in FIG. 10];
Notification information determining means [for example, CPU 304 that executes instruction monitor setting processing] that determines notification information [for example, instruction monitor information] corresponding to the operation mode in the stop operation;
Notification means for notifying the notification information [for example, the game information display 126 functioning as an instruction monitor];
A game machine comprising:
The winning result determining means selects one of a plurality of types of specific winning results (e.g., push order combinations) that are associated with operation modes that are advantageous to the player (e.g., so-called correct operation). It is a means that may determine the winning results [for example, Bell CLR 1 to 3, Bell CRL 1 to 3, Bell RLC 1 to 3, Bell RCL 1 to 3, 1-card combination 7, 1-card combination 8],
When one of the plurality of types of specific winning results is determined, the notification information determining means performs a predetermined calculation process [for example, calculation process of dividing the winning combination number by 3]. means for determining the notification information based on the calculation result [e.g., instruction information value] obtained by
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, no matter which of the specific winning results is determined, the notification information is determined based on the calculation results obtained by predetermined calculation processing, thereby making the processing common. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of a processing program related to notification of operation contents that are advantageous to the player.

Also,
“The winning result [for example, the winning combination information shown in FIG. 23(a)] is associated with the first information [for example, the winning combination number of the winning combination information shown in FIG. 23(a)]. Ori,
The broadcast information determining means is a means for determining the broadcast information based on a calculation result obtained by the predetermined calculation process using the first information.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The notification information can be determined according to the winning result.

Also,
“A first control means [for example, main control unit 300] that controls the progress of the game,
a second control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400] that controls the production;
Equipped with
The broadcast information determining means is a means controlled by the first control means,
The first control means is means for transmitting second information different from the first information [for example, information on a small role group] to the second control means,
The second information can specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the specific winning result [for example, the winning combination], but it is possible to specify that the winning result determined by the winning result determining means is the specific winning result [for example, the winning combination] The type [for example, Bell CLR1, Bell CLR2, Bell CLR3, etc.] is information that cannot be specified.
The second control means is a means for controlling the production using the second information,
What makes it special is the game console. ”
Also explained.

From the perspective of the second control means, there may be game states in which the advantageous operation mode is not necessary, and conversely, there may be cases in which controlling the presentation using the second information requires less processing program capacity.

The first control means may include the winning result determining means, and the first control means may include the broadcast information determining means.

Also,
“The predetermined calculation process is a division process,
The first information is information that includes a corresponding value [for example, the value of the winning combination number] that corresponds one-to-one to the winning result,
The broadcast information determining means may perform a calculation based on the calculation result obtained by dividing the corresponding value by a predetermined value (for example, 3) [for example, use the calculation result as it is (step S264), Further processing the calculation result (step S275)] is means for determining the notification information [for example, the CPU 304 that executes the instruction monitor setting process shown in FIG. 24(b) or (c)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Regardless of which specific winning result is determined, the notification information is determined based on the calculation result obtained by dividing by a predetermined value, thereby making it possible to standardize the process. The capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

Also,
``The broadcast information determining means is a means for determining, as the broadcast information, information representing a quotient value of the result of dividing the corresponding value by the predetermined value [for example, an instruction monitor shown in FIG. 24(b)] CPU 304 that executes the setting process],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By using the quotient value of the result of the division process, the notification information can be determined without considering the remainder of the division process, so the capacity of the processing program can be further reduced.

Also,
"The plurality of types of specific winning results include a first number [e.g., 3] of winning results [e.g., Bell_CLR] each having the same advantageous operation mode,
the predetermined value is the first number,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first number is a value of 2 or more, and multiple specific winning results with different outcomes for the same advantageous operation mode can be prepared. On the other hand, as the number of specific winning results increases, the values to be handled become larger, but since the division process is performed by the first number, the increase in the number of specific winning results can be cancelled out, and an increase in the capacity of the processing program and a time required for processing can be suppressed.

In addition,
"A reel that stops spinning by a stop operation [e.g., reels 110 to 112],
A winning result determination means for determining a winning result from among a plurality of winning results (for example, the CPU 304 for executing an internal winning combination lottery process in the various lottery processes (step S105) shown in FIG. 10 );
A notification means (e.g., a game information display 126 functioning as an instruction monitor) for notifying a user of a mode of operation in the stop operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
The winning result determination means may determine a specific winning result from among a plurality of specific winning results [e.g., push order combinations] associated with an operation mode [e.g., a so-called correct operation] advantageous to a player,
The plurality of specific winning outcomes includes a first specific winning outcome [e.g., BELL_CLR1] and a second specific winning outcome [e.g., BELL_CLR2];
The first specific winning result is associated with a first operation mode [for example, a push order of center, left, right] as the advantageous operation mode,
The second specific winning result is associated with the first operation mode [for example, a push order of center, left, right] as the advantageous operation mode,
the notification means is means for notifying a user of first information corresponding to the first operation mode when the first specific winning result is determined as the winning result by the winning result determination means,
the notification means is means for notifying a user of second information corresponding to the first operation mode when the second specific winning result is determined as the winning result by the winning result determination means,
The first information and the second information are the same information (for example, the number "7" shown on the far left of FIG. 24(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

Next, the standby game explained using Figures 20(c1) and 20(c2) will be described in detail. The state in which the standby game is being executed is the standby state.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which after a continuous performance is performed, a final notification performance is performed and the state is shifted to the AT state. FIG. 26(b) shows an example in which a penalty has occurred. In both the upper part of FIG. 26(a) and the lower part of FIG. 26(b), the movement progresses from left to right. In FIG. 26, the number of games played (number of games), winning combination, pressing order, display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, occurrence of penalty, performance progress, count value of the precursor G number A counter, and value of the game number display GMV are shown. It is shown.

In FIG. 26(a) shown in the upper row, a rare role (for example, strong cherry) has been won and a continuous performance has started. In FIG. 26(a), the continuous performance is shown from the middle, and performance 1 (see FIG. 14) is omitted from the illustration.

In the N+1G game, performance 2 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the enemy swordsman appears. The value of the game number display GMV is 98, and "98G" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Further, the value of a precursor G number A counter (not shown here) managed by the main control unit 300 is "3" at the N+1G. At N+1G, the player wins internally and the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the stop operation of the recommended operation on the left middle right.

In the N+2G game, performance 3 of the continuous performance is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other. The value of the game number display GMV is 99, and "99G" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. The value of the precursor G number A counter of the main control unit 300 decreases by one at the N+2G, and becomes "2". At N+2G, the push order bell is internally selected, but since it is in the normal state (not in the AT state), the operation navigation is not executed, and the left stop button 137 is operated first, and the recommended operation on the left center right is stopped. An operation is performed.

In the N+3G game, performance 4, which is the last performance of the continuous performance, is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the protagonist, the lord, defeats the enemy swordsman, and the AT transition is made. Suggested. The continuous performance ends at this N+3G. The value of the game number display GMV is 100, and "100G" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. The value of the precursor G number A counter further decreases by one at the N+3 Gth, and becomes "1". At N+3G, the replay is internally selected and the stop operation of the recommended operation on the left center right is performed. Note that when the continuous performance ends, the game number display GMV that has been displayed up to that point is hidden at the lower left of the display screen.

In the N+4G game where the continuous performance has ended, a confirmation announcement performance is executed, and on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the words "AT confirmed" are displayed above the character of the main character, the lord, and the game is completed. It is possible for the person to specify the transition to the AT state. The value of the precursor G number A counter becomes "0" at the N+4th G. At N+4G, the replay is internally selected and the stop operation of the recommended operation on the left center right is performed.

At the start of the N+5G game, since the value of the precursor G number A counter is "0", the normal state shifts to the AT state (AT normal state). The liquid crystal display device 157 displays a notification screen (an AT start screen on which the words "AT start" are displayed) notifying the transition to the AT state. At N+5G, the push order bell is internally elected. Since the value of the precursor G number A counter managed by the main control unit 300 is “0” and the gaming state is the AT state, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning combination from the main control unit 300. Information regarding the order of operations is sent. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a display of "312" (operation navigation display) is displayed to inform the user of the correct operation of the push order bell, which is the winning combination.

FIG. 26(b) shown in the lower part is a diagram showing an example in which a continuous performance is executed as in FIG. 26(a) in the upper part, and a penalty occurs in a game in the middle of the continuous performance. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 26(a) in the upper row will be mainly explained.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 26(b), in the N+1G game (performance 2 of the continuous production), the value of the game number display GMV is 98, and here, the value of the game number display GMV is 98. The value of the G number A counter is "3".

In the next N+2G game (performance 3 of continuous performances), the push order bell is internally won. That is, the push order bell is internally elected in the normal state of the advantageous section. Here, an irregular push stop operation is performed in which the first stop operation is to the right, and a penalty occurs. In the N+2G game, as shown in FIG. 26(a), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the master swordsman, are facing each other. Further, "99G" is displayed in the game number display GMV at the lower left of the display screen. At the timing when the first stop operation that caused the penalty to occur is performed, an operation recommendation display REC such as "Press left is recommended" is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 so as to overlap with that scene. . Furthermore, in a game where a penalty has occurred, a blackout display is added to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing when the third stop operation is performed, making the above scene difficult to see, but the blackout display is displayed in the recommended operation display REC. The operation recommendation display REC is easily visible. On the other hand, the game number display GMV has been added to a blackout display, making it difficult to see the game number display GMV. In this example, even if a penalty occurs, the value of the game number display GMV is not returned by one game at the timing of the third stop operation, but remains at 99G (no change). Therefore, even if the game number display GMV is made difficult to see by darkening the display, there is no change and there is no effect. However, the value of the precursor G number A counter of the main control unit 300 is not updated at the timing when the third stop operation is performed, and remains at "3". Note that, similarly to the recommended operation display REC, the number of games display GMV may also be prevented from being darkened to make it easier to visually recognize the number of games display GMV. Further, the recommended operation display REC may be displayed without darkening, or the recommended operation display REC may be displayed on the entire screen.

When the N+3Gth game of the next game is started, the display of the blackout display ends, and the display of the recommended operation display REC also ends, and performance 4, which is the last performance of the continuous performance, is executed. In other words, even if a penalty occurs during a continuous performance, the performance 3 that was executed in the game where the penalty occurred will not be re-executed, but the performance scheduled to be executed (here, performance 4) will be executed, and the continuous performance will continue first. Proceed to and complete the continuous performance. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, defeats the enemy, the master swordsman, suggesting that AT transition will take place. The value of the game number display GMV is 100, and "100G" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. On the other hand, the value of the precursor G number A counter decreases by one and becomes "2".

In the N+4th game where the continuous effects have ended, a confirmation announcement effect is executed, and on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the value of the premonition G count A counter is further decreased by one to "1" above the display of the Lord character, but does not return to "0."

At the start of the N+5G game, since the value of the precursor G number A counter is "1", the game does not shift to the AT state (AT normal state) and remains in the normal state. In addition, the main control unit 300 executes a standby game if the value of the precursor G number A counter is “1” or more even after the final announcement performance is finished. In this standby game, on the liquid crystal display device 157, a standby effect is executed in which the character display PRE "in preparation" is added to the same display as the final notification effect. Note that the character display PRE "Preparing" is displayed with the final announcement performance, but it does not have to be displayed together with the final announcement performance, and a screen specific to the standby performance (standby state) is displayed instead. Good too. In addition, during the standby performance, it is not clearly shown to the player how many games the standby performance will continue, so in the final game of the standby performance, a message such as " The display "Preparing" may become slightly brighter or darker, or the display mode before the final game of the standby effect and the display mode during the final game of the standby effect may change. good. For example, the "Preparing" display is displayed in the first stage mode until the final game of the standby production, and the "Preparing" display is displayed in the second stage mode when the final game of the standby production is started. , the subsequent first stop operation and second stop operation are displayed in the form of the third stage and the form of the fourth stage, and the final stop operation is displayed in the form of the fifth stage (final stage). You may also do so. This makes it possible to indicate that the AT state will start from the next game, allowing the player to mentally prepare, and preventing the AT state from starting unexpectedly. Further, the standby performance is a performance that is executed by the main control unit 300 instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to execute. Note that if the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the value of the precursor G number A counter from the main control unit 300 is not “0” even though the value of the game number display GMV is “0” ( If it is determined that there is a discrepancy between the number of Gs from the main control unit and the number of Gs from the first sub-control unit, the first sub-control unit 400 may perform control to execute a standby effect. . Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 26(a), the AT start screen is not displayed even after the final notification performance has ended, but a standby game is executed, and the progress of the performance is not displayed during the standby game. Perform a stop motion. By performing the standby game, the value of the precursor G number A counter becomes "0". Note that in this example, a penalty occurred in only one game (N+2G), but if a penalty occurred in multiple games, standby games equal to the number of games in which a penalty occurred are executed.

At the start of the N+6th G game, since the value of the precursor G number A counter is "0", the normal state shifts to the AT state (AT normal state). The AT start screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the push order bell is internally selected. Furthermore, information regarding the order of operations for winning combinations is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 . On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a display of "312" (operation navigation display) is displayed to inform the user of the correct operation of the push order bell, which is the winning combination.

In the example of executing the standby game described above, the discrepancy between the value of the precursor G number A counter and the progress of the performance is not corrected during the continuous performance, and before the continuous performance ends and the AT start screen is displayed, Correct the above discrepancy by playing a standby game. In other words, rather than making corrections in the middle, make corrections at the end.

In addition, the character display PRE "in preparation" displayed in the standby game was preparing for the value of the precursor G number A counter to become "0", but the character display PRE "in preparation" It may be displayed even if no penalty occurs. For example, the character display PRE "under preparation" may be displayed in the final notification effect shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, the character display PRE "in preparation" becomes a character display representing the AT state in preparation. In this way, by displaying the character display PRE that says "Preparing" even if no penalty has occurred, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that this is a standby game due to a penalty, and to avoid making the player feel disappointed. It can be prevented. Note that the period of standby games is equal to the number of games in which a penalty has occurred, but this is not limited to this, and the number of games to be kept in the standby game may be determined by lottery, and in this case, in a situation where no penalty has occurred. However, if a standby game is involved, the message "Preparing" is displayed whether or not a penalty is involved, making it difficult to understand that the balance is due to a penalty. Further, the number of games to be kept in the standby game may be determined according to the number of gaming value pieces obtained by irregular pressing, for example, the larger the number of gaming value pieces obtained by irregular pressing, the longer the waiting game becomes; If the number of pieces of game value obtained by irregular pressing is small, the waiting game may be shortened, and as a result, the gaming value obtained by irregular pressing can be used up, so profits can be obtained by irregular pressing. Not only can this be prevented, but in cases where an irregular push has been made but no game value has been obtained, there will be fewer waiting games, so such players can be prevented from consuming more game value than necessary. .

Next, the flow of the omen performance will be explained.

There are two types of omen production: main omen production and gazette omen production. This precursor performance is a performance that is executed over one or more games in a state where it has already been determined that the player will move to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current gaming state. This is a performance that enlivens the transition even before the transition.

The AT state (AT normal state) will be explained below as an example of an advantageous gaming state.

Figure 27 is a diagram explaining the flow of this premonition performance when transitioning from the normal state (non-AT state) to the AT state. In both the upper row (Figure 27(a)) and the lower row (Figure 27(b)), the progression is from left to right.

FIG. 27(a) in the upper part is a diagram showing the flow when no penalty occurs during the execution of the present precursor effect. In FIG. 27(a), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is shown in a simplified manner.

In this example, condition A is met from the normal stage shown in Figure 7, and the AT transitions to the normal state. The normal stage is an advantageous zone, and the background image of the normal effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In this state, a rare role (for example, a strong cherry) is internally won, and the main premonition effect lottery based on that internal win is won, and the main premonition effect begins. In this example, when the main premonition effect lottery is won, the AT transitions to the normal state. In other words, the AT transitions to the normal state after the main premonition effect ends.

The main control unit 300 manages the start timing of this premonition effect and the number of plays of this premonition effect. The number of plays of this premonition effect is 32. In addition, the number of plays of the final announcement effect, which starts when this premonition effect ends, is 1. When the start timing of this premonition effect arrives, the premonition G number A counter is set to "33", which is the sum of the number of plays of this premonition effect and the number of plays of the final announcement effect.

When the main premonition performance starts, in the first game, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a main premonition performance start image (an image displaying the text "Premonition ZONE") to notify the user that the main premonition performance has started. The value of the premonition G number A counter is updated when the third stop operation is performed, and is decremented by one from "33" to "32". In addition, in this main premonition performance as a whole, a one-game development performance and a four-game consecutive performance are scheduled at the end, so the previous premonition scene performance lasts for 27 games (N=27).

In the 28th G of the main omen production, a development production is performed, and it is determined whether or not the omen scene production will develop into a continuous production. That is, it is determined whether the present omen effect ends or continues. Here, it develops into a continuous performance (this precursory performance continues), and the continuous performance described using FIG. 26 is executed. When the continuous performance of 4 games ends, this precursory performance ends. As mentioned above, in production 4 of the continuous production, a scene in which the main character, the lord, wins against the enemy, the master swordsman, is displayed, suggesting a transition to AT.

When this premonition effect ends, the value of the premonition G number A counter becomes "1", followed by one game of the confirmation notification effect. As described above, in the confirmation notification effect, the text display "AT confirmed" is displayed, allowing the player to identify that they will be transitioning to the AT state. When the confirmation notification effect ends, the value of the premonition G number A counter becomes "0".

In addition, in a game in which a confirmed announcement performance is performed, an additional lottery may be performed to add on the number of AT awarded games based on the internal winning combination in that game.

The gaming state of the slot machine 100 shifts from a normal state to an AT state (AT normal state), and an AT start screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. When the push order bell is internally won, the value of the precursor G number A counter managed by the main control unit 300 is “0” and the gaming state is the AT state. Information regarding the correct operation order of the push order bells is transmitted from the control unit 300, and an operation navigation display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 27(b) in the lower part is a diagram showing the flow when a penalty occurs during execution of the present precursor effect. The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 27(a).

First, the penalty in the normal stage of the advantageous section before the start of the main performance is not subject to the standby game. This is because the precursor G number A counter of the main control unit 300 is not activated, and the discrepancy between the value of the precursor G number A counter and the progress of the performance does not pose a problem. However, the penalty in the normal stage of the advantageous section before the start of the main performance may also be a target of the standby game. Although the above-mentioned deviation is not a problem, if a penalty is imposed, the display start timing of the AT start screen is delayed, which is a measure to prevent penalties.

A penalty occurs on the 2nd G after the start of the main omen effect. The value of the precursor G number A counter is not updated at the timing when the third stop operation is performed and remains at "32", but the performance progresses.

In addition, a continuous performance is started and a penalty occurs even while performance 2 is being executed. The value of the precursor G number A counter is not updated at the timing when the third stop operation is performed and remains at "5".

In the end, in this example, the penalty occurs twice, and the value of the precursor G number A counter at the time when the final notification performance ends is "2".

When the final announcement performance is completed, standby games are executed for the number of times equal to the value of the portent G number A counter. Here, standby games for two games are executed. As described above, in the standby game, a standby effect is executed in which the character display PRE "under preparation" is added to the same display as the final notification effect. By performing the standby game twice, the value of the precursor G number A counter becomes "0". Note that a penalty may also occur during standby gaming. Even when a penalty occurs during a standby game, the value of the precursor G number A counter is not updated at the timing when a third stop operation is performed, and the standby game is extended by the number of games in which a penalty occurs.

While standby play is being performed, an add-on lottery for adding the number of AT-granting games based on the internal winning role in that play may or may not be performed. Alternatively, while standby play is being performed, an add-on lottery may not be performed for replays or bells, and an add-on lottery may be performed only for rare roles (e.g., cherries). By performing an add-on lottery for rare roles even during standby play, in the case of a specification in which standby play is performed even when no penalty has occurred, it is possible to make it difficult to tell that the standby play is due to a penalty, and the game can be presented in a natural flow regardless of the occurrence of a penalty.

Also, during standby gaming, information regarding the operating order of winning combinations is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, so the operation navigation display is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, but the operation mode ( (press order) may be performed. For example, only the fact that the first stop is on the left may be notified, and a display showing that the second stop is "?" and the third stop is also "?" or a press order quiz may be performed. When an operation navigation display is included in the performance related to the operation mode (push order), the frequency of execution of the performance related to the operation mode (push order) is lower during the standby game compared to during the game in the AT state. For example, it may be reduced by 1/2 or not performed at all. In addition, instead of the performance related to the operation mode, a performance suggesting the winning combination may be executed. If a rare combination such as Cherry or Watermelon is won, a message saying "Opportunity" or a color corresponding to the winning combination ( For example, if you win a replay or push order bell, you may display a display that includes a "small role" or a color that corresponds to the winning role (for example, light blue, yellow, or some other role). (gray color) indicating that the winner has been selected may be displayed.

When the standby game ends, the value of the precursor G number A counter is "0" and the game state is the AT state, so the first sub-control unit 400 receives the correct answer of the push order bell from the main control unit 300. Information regarding the order of operations is transmitted, and an operation navigation display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

As explained above, if a penalty occurs during the period of the main omen performance, the AT start screen will be displayed only after the scheduled main omen performance has been completed to the end. Waiting games are performed for the number of games that were penalized in the period before the game. Then, after the standby game ends, a transition to the AT state is notified, and the operation navigation display becomes available. By completing all of the scheduled premonitory performances to the end, the player feels that the occurrence of the penalty has no adverse effect, and the player can be introduced to the AT state without being discouraged. In addition, if a penalty occurs due to a mistake, the player may feel disappointed and lose his or her desire to continue playing, but even if a penalty occurs, if the display is not darkened, the player will be able to continue playing naturally. It is also possible to prevent the player from realizing that a penalty has occurred. In addition, by playing the standby game, it is possible to match the visual performance progress with the internal game situation. Furthermore, since the standby performance is executed after the confirmation announcement performance is executed, the player knows that the AT state will be entered soon and may stop playing the game (leave his/her seat). can also be suppressed. In addition, since the same display as the "AT confirmed" display in the confirmation announcement performance is displayed in the standby performance, it is also possible to more reliably prevent the player from stopping the game.

Note that the example shown in FIG. 27 is an example of the main precursor performance in transition from the normal stage to the AT normal state, but it is also applicable to the main precursor performance in the transition from the normal stage to CZ. In addition, although we have described an example in which the value of the precursor G number A counter is set by winning the main omen lottery using a rare combination as an opportunity, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of Gs at which the next AT state will start is determined at the time of the previous AT state, and the precursor start timing may be determined thereafter, and the precursor begins at the end of the previous AT state (at the start of a new normal stage). The timing may be determined, or the value of the portent G number A counter may be set by performing the main portent lottery at the timing when a specific number of G's has elapsed.

A fake precursor performance is a performance that is executed over one or more games in a state where it has not been decided to shift to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current gaming state, and is a performance that is executed over one or more games. This is a performance that makes you expect something, but it only makes you expect it, and the game does not actually move to an advantageous gaming state, but remains in its current gaming state.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the gaze warning effect executed in the normal state (non-AT state). In both the upper part of FIG. 28(a) and the lower part of FIG. 28(b), the movement progresses from left to right.

The upper part of Figure 28(a) shows the flow when no penalty occurs during the execution of the false premonition effect. In this Figure 28(a), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is shown in a simplified form. Below, the following explanation will focus on the differences from the flow when no penalty occurs during the execution of the real premonition effect shown in Figure 27(a).

The normal stage is an advantageous section, and the background image of the normal performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Whether or not to execute the false omen performance, the contents of the performance, the performance period, etc. are determined depending on the result of the false omen performance lottery. The false omen effect lottery is executed on the condition that the number of games has reached a predetermined number of times, or on the condition that a predetermined role (for example, a replay or a bell) has been internally won. Even if the execution of the false omen performance is won through the false omen performance lottery, the omen G number A counter is not activated. The presentation contents and presentation period of the gazette premonition presentation here are the same as the presentation contents and presentation period of the main omen presentation described using FIG. 27(a). That is, the precursory scenes of 27 games are performed, and the development performance is performed in the 28th G. In the development performance, even if it is a gaze precursor performance, it develops into a continuous performance, and the same continuous performance as the continuous performance described using FIG. 26 is executed. In production 4 of the continuous production, a scene in which the main character, the lord, defeats the enemy, the master swordsman, is displayed, suggesting the transition to AT. When the continuous performance of four games ends, the fake precursor performance ends.

When the gazette precursor effect ends, the final announcement effect is not executed, and when the next game starts, the background image of the normal effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. At this point, the player notices for the first time that the previous omen performance was a ghastly omen performance. It should be noted that text such as "Unfortunate" may be displayed in the next game after the end of the premonition effect.

FIG. 28(b) in the lower part is a diagram showing the flow when a penalty occurs during execution of the gaze precursor effect. The following will mainly explain the differences from the example shown in FIG. 28(a).

First, even if a penalty occurs in the normal stage of the advantageous section before the start of the false precursor performance, the standby game is not executed. Further, even if a penalty occurs during the execution of the gazette precursor performance, the standby game is not executed. In the first place, it remains in the normal state without transitioning to the AT state, and as mentioned above, the precursor G number A counter of the main control unit 300 is not activated, and the relationship between the value of the precursor G number A counter and the progress of the performance is This is because misalignment is not a problem. Even if a penalty occurs, the priority is to make the production look natural and the production will be completed to the end. Then, when the gaze precursor performance ends, the standby game is not played, and when the next game starts, the background image of the normal performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, as with real premonitions, an example has been described in which the false premonition begins when a rare role is triggered, but this is not limited to the above, and the timing for the start of the false premonition may be determined at the end of the previous AT state (the start of a new normal stage).

Furthermore, as an example of a performance when a penalty occurs due to an irregular press, we have explained an example in which a similar performance is re-executed in the next game, and an example in which a standby state occurs at the confirmation announcement after the end of a continuous performance. Not limited to. For example, if a penalty occurs due to an irregular press in a certain game, the final part of the performance in the previous game (the game in which the irregular press was performed) will continue to be executed in the next game (the performance will be extended, and the performance will not progress). You can. Of course, if you press the recommended button in the next game, the performance will progress in each game one after another, and if you press the irregular button again, the final part will continue to be executed in each game one after another. For example, the structure of the performance in a certain game is that "the beginning part when the game is started (operating the start lever 135) → the middle part when the first stop → the final part when the final stop button is released" is executed, and when the final stop button is pressed, the final part is executed. If the configuration is such that the performance video of the final part is played in a loop after the button is released, if you press irregularly in a certain game and receive a penalty, the performance of the previous game (a certain game) will be changed in the next game. The final part continues to be played in a loop. In addition, in the next game after the irregular press, the playback will be a loop from the game start operation to the final part, and the performance will not progress with each stop operation. In addition, if the loop playback of the final part is reached in a situation where an irregular press is made in a certain game, even if the start operation of the next game is performed, the loop playback of the final part will be seamlessly played without starting from the beginning of the loop playback. You may go. Also, if there is a final part after the final stage in the production structure, if you press the recommended button in a certain game, the production will be executed until the final part, but if you press the irregular button in a certain game, the process will not progress to the final part. It is configured so that the loop plays in the final part without stopping, and the loop in the final part continues to start in the next game, and if the next game is a recommended push, the performance will progress to the final part after the final stop, and the next game will also be played in a loop. If it is an irregular press, the final part may loop even after the final stop. The final part of the production includes a production in which the opponents are facing each other, a production display that says "NEXT" that indicates the progress of the production to the next game, and a production display that says "Hit the lever" to prompt the start operation for the next game. You can. In addition, in a configuration in which the effect is extended when an irregular press results in a penalty, the G number counter managed by the main control unit 300 and the G number counter managed by the sub-control unit 400 are If a penalty occurs, the G number counter may not advance in the next game, or the G number counter may return by 1.

According to the above description,
``Production means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157],
A control means [for example, main control unit 300],
A game machine comprising:
The control means is a means capable of controlling the transition to a second gaming state (e.g., AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state [e.g., normal state (non-AT state)],
The control means is a means capable of executing the second process,
The second process is a process related to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state [for example, updating a transition counter, updating a precursor G number A counter, updating a ceiling counter, AT transition lottery] and
The effect means is a means for executing a second effect [for example, an effect based on the AT start screen on which the character display of "AT start" in FIG. 26 is displayed] that notifies the transition to the second gaming state. can be,
The control means is means in a second case that executes the second process,
The control means controls the control means not in the second case but in the first case which may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second case [for example, when penalty processing is executed or when no processing is executed]. It is a certain means,
In the second case, the performance means is a means for executing the first performance [for example, the continuous performance in FIG. 26] that was scheduled to be executed before transitioning to the second gaming state as scheduled. Yes [for example, FIG. 26(a)],
The effecting means is a means for executing the first effect as scheduled also in the first case [for example, FIG. 26(b)],
Before executing the second performance, the performance means performs a third performance [for example, a character display PRE "in preparation" is added] over a number of games corresponding to the number of games in the first case. It is a means to execute the standby performance]
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

With this gaming machine, even in the first case where the second process is not executed and the player is at a disadvantage, the first presentation is executed as scheduled, so the player does not feel that the first case is occurring while the first presentation is being executed, and it is possible to make the player feel that the game is progressing naturally. Meanwhile, before executing the second presentation, the third presentation is executed for a number of plays corresponding to the number of plays that resulted in the first case, so that the apparent presentation progress can be consistent with the internal game situation. As a result, this gaming machine can handle the effects of the presence or absence of a process (the second process) related to a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Note that the execution timing of the third performance may be any timing before the execution of the second performance.

The gaming machine may also have a second case in which the control means executes the second process, and a first case in which, if the operating means is operated in an operating mode different from the predetermined operating mode during the stop operation [for example, an operating mode for the first right stop or an operating mode for the first center stop], the control means does not execute the second process, which may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second case [for example, a case in which a penalty process is executed or no process is executed, i.e., a penalty is incurred].

Furthermore, in the first case, the performance means executes a third performance for a number of games corresponding to the number of games in the first case, before executing the second performance. be.

Also, according to the above description,
``Production means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157],
A control means [for example, main control unit 300],
A game machine comprising:
The control means is a means capable of controlling the transition to a second gaming state (e.g., AT state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state [e.g., normal state (non-AT state)],
The control means is means capable of executing the second process,
The second process is a process related to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state [for example, updating a transition counter, updating a precursor G number A counter, updating a ceiling counter, AT transition lottery] and
The effect means is a means for executing a second effect [for example, an effect based on the AT start screen on which the character display of "AT start" in FIG. 26 is displayed] that notifies the transition to the second gaming state. can be,
The control means is means in a second case that executes the second process,
The control means does not apply the control means to the second case, but to the first case which may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second case [for example, when penalty processing is executed or when no processing is executed]. It is a certain means,
Before the second performance, the performance means may perform a fourth performance that can specify that a transition to the second gaming state will occur [for example, a confirmation display in which a character display of "AT confirmed" is displayed. It is a means that may carry out "announcement performance",
The performance means performs a third performance over a number of games corresponding to the number of games in the first case after the execution of the fourth performance is started and before the execution of the second performance is started. A means for executing a presentation [for example, a standby presentation with the text display PRE “under preparation” added];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, after the execution of the fourth performance in which it is possible to specify that the transition to the second gaming state is to be performed is started, and before the execution of the second performance is started, the Since the third effect is executed over the number of games corresponding to the number of games in the first case, it is possible to match the apparent progress of the effect with the internal game situation. Moreover, by executing the fourth effect, the player knows that the second gaming state will be entered in the near future, and the second process may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game just because the first case occurs. As a result, this gaming machine can deal with the influence of whether or not there is a process related to transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the second process).

In addition, in the second case in which the control means executes the second process, and in the stop operation, the game machine operates in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, the right first stop In the first case [e.g. , a case where a penalty process is executed, or a case where no process is performed, that is, a case where a penalty is imposed.

In addition, in the first case, the performance means determines the number of games played in the first case after the execution of the fourth performance is started and before the execution of the second performance is started. This is a means for executing a third effect (for example, a standby effect to which the character display PRE "in preparation" is added) over the number of games corresponding to the number of games.

Also,
“In the second case, the performance means is a means for executing the first performance [for example, the continuous performance in FIG. 26] that was scheduled to be executed before transitioning to the second gaming state as scheduled. [For example, FIG. 26(a)],
The effect means includes the first effect [for example, the continuous effect shown in FIG. 26] and the second effect [for example, the effect based on the AT start screen on which the characters "AT start" are displayed in FIG. 26]. Means that may execute the fourth effect (for example, a confirmation announcement effect in which a character display of "AT confirmed" is displayed) in between,
The effecting means is a means for executing the first effect as scheduled also in the first case [for example, FIG. 26(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even in the first case, the first performance is executed as scheduled, so that the player can be aware that the first case is occurring while the first performance is being executed. It is possible to make it seem like the game is progressing naturally without making the player feel like the game is progressing naturally.

Also,
“The performance means determines the number of games in which the first case occurs after executing the first performance [for example, a game with a portent scene performance (2/N) and a game with a continuous performance (2/4)]” means for executing the third effect over the number of games [for example, two games] according to [for example, 27(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even if the first case occurs during execution of the first performance, by doing so, the first performance is not interrupted and the player can enjoy the first performance. be able to.

Also,
“The third performance is a performance in which a specific display that is not displayed in the first performance [for example, the character display “Preparing” PRE] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By performing the specific display, the player can clearly understand that the first performance has ended.

Also,
“The third performance is a performance in which the specific display is displayed together with a display that allows the transition to the second gaming state to be specified [for example, a text display of “AT confirmed”];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By displaying a display that allows the player to identify the transition to the second gaming state, the player knows that the transition to the second gaming state will occur soon, and the second processing is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game just because the first case, which can be disadvantageous to the player, occurs.

Also,
``The above-mentioned presentation means is configured to perform the above-mentioned first case [for example, when a penalty is imposed] during the execution of the third presentation [for example, a standby presentation in which the character display PRE "in preparation" is added]. In this case, before executing the second effect [for example, the effect using the AT start screen], extend and execute the third effect for a number of games corresponding to the number of games in the first case. It is a means to
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

To a person who intentionally tries to cause the first case to occur during the execution of the third performance by delaying the execution of the second performance (delaying the transition to the second gaming state) It becomes a countermeasure.

In addition, the said control means may carry out the lottery regarding the said 2nd game state even during execution of the said 3rd performance. Since it would be cruel to the players to not be able to conduct a lottery at all, as a remedial measure, it is possible to conduct a lottery regarding the second gaming state.

Further, a notification means (which may be the above-mentioned performance means, or a means different from the performance means (for example, a speaker, etc.) capable of performing operation mode notification that notifies the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the stop operation) is provided. ), the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the notifying means can execute the operation mode notification, and the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the notifying means can execute the operation mode notification. The game is in an unexecutable gaming state. The performance means may be a fifth performance related to the operation mode (for example, a performance that notifies the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the stop operation, or a performance related to an operation mode regardless of whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous). ), and the probability of executing the fifth effect is lower during execution of the third effect than after the execution of the second effect. Note that the execution probability of the fifth performance while the third performance is being executed may be higher than 0%, or may be 0%.

In addition, the presentation means may be capable of executing a sixth presentation before the transition of the game state to the second game state, the sixth presentation being a presentation regarding whether or not the game state will transition to the second game state (for example, a main omen presentation), and the presentation means may be a means for executing the third presentation after the end of the sixth presentation when the first case occurs in a game in which the sixth presentation is being executed. The first presentation may be a part of the sixth presentation or may be the sixth presentation. When player A causes the first case before the game in which the sixth presentation is executed, and player B plays a game in which the sixth presentation is executed, the influence of the first case by player A can be prevented from being given to player B.

The presentation means is capable of executing the same presentation as the first presentation even when the game state does not transition to the second game state (for example, when executing a Gaze premonition presentation), and is capable of executing the third presentation when the game state transitions to the second game state. Furthermore, the presentation means may be capable of not executing the third presentation when the game state does not transition to the second game state. If the game state does not transition to the second game state, there is no need to match the apparent presentation progress with the internal game situation, and there is no need to execute the third presentation. In addition, if the third presentation is executed when the game state does not transition to the second game state, it would look unnatural, so the third presentation is not executed.

Furthermore, the third effect is an effect in which a specific display that is not displayed in the first effect is displayed, but in the fourth effect, the same display as the specific display may be displayed. You can. By displaying the same display as the specific display in the fourth effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the third effect is due to the occurrence of the first case. You can avoid feeling regretful.

Next, another example of condition A shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The main control unit 300 may perform an AT transition lottery based on internally winning a certain winning combination or reaching a certain number of games. If the AT transition lottery is won, an anticipation effect is performed a predetermined number of games before transition to the AT state. In the explanation so far, the specific performance in condition A is a continuous performance, and condition A is that the continuous performance ends. There may be.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the anticipation effect is performed and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing.

In FIG. 29, time passes from left to right. Further, in FIG. 29, "game progress" includes "start operation", "first stop", "second stop", and "third stop" which are operations of the start lever 135. Below that, the acceptable states of "Left stop Sw" which is the left stop button 137 sensor, "Medium stop Sw" which is the middle stop button 138 sensor, and "Right stop Sw" which is the right stop button 139 sensor are also shown. has been done. Each Sw enters a receptive state after a start operation, and when it receives a stop operation while in an receptive state, the receptive state ends. Below that, the rotating states of the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are also shown. Further below, the display contents of "liquid crystal display" on the liquid crystal display device 157 are also shown.

The main control unit 300 is provided with a transition counter that manages transition to the AT state. This transition counter counts up the number of games at the timing of the third stop, and if the value of the transition counter is the value of the predetermined number of games (here, 99) at the start of the game, the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 to start executing the anticipation effect. In the anticipation performance, an expectation icon notification performance is performed by displaying an icon representing expectation, and a dialogue performance representing expectation is performed by displaying lines, in response to the operation of the stop button. Furthermore, a game number display GMV is displayed at the upper left of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. The value of the game number display GMV is the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and increases by 1 each time a start lever acceptance command is received from the main control unit 300 after power is turned on. It is a value.

In this example, when the value of the transition counter is 99 at the start of the game, execution of the anticipation effect is started. The game started when the value of the transfer counter is 99 at the start of the game is the 100th G game. This 100G game is in the normal state (non-AT state) in the advantageous section. At the timing (A1) when the 100th G start operation is performed, the background image of the normal effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Furthermore, upon the start of the game, the game number display GMV in the upper left is updated from "99G" to "100G".

At the 100th game, the left stop button 137 is operated first, causing the first stop. Because the left stop button 137 is operated first, it is not an irregular press, and the first stop action here is not subject to a penalty. The timing of the first stop operation is (A2), and the left reel 110 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the anticipation icon notification performance starts at (A2), and the "Confirmed" icon EX1 is displayed. The "Confirmed" icon EX1 is the icon with the highest expectation of transitioning to the AT state.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform a third stop. The timing when the third stop operation is performed is the timing (A3), and the right reel 112 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the dialogue performance starts at timing (A3), and a dialogue display WD1 such as "Stunning!" is displayed. The dialogue display WD1 such as "It's amazing" is also the dialogue display with the highest degree of expectation for transition to the AT state. Further, the value of the transition counter is counted up to 100 at the timing (A3).

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated and a start operation is performed, thereby starting the 101G. The timing when the 101 game is started is the timing (A4), and the value of the transition counter is 100. When the value of the transition counter is 100 at the start of the game, the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the AT state (AT normal state). On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, an AT start screen is displayed at timing (A4) to notify the transition to the AT state. The operation navigation display can be displayed from the 101st G. In the 101 game, the push order bell is internally won, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 also displays "312" (operation navigation display) to notify the correct operation of the push order bell, which is the winning combination. .

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case where a penalty occurs at the 100th G when the anticipation effect is performed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. In this FIG. 30 as well, time passes from left to right. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 29 will be mainly explained.

At the timing (A1) when the 100th G start operation is performed, the background image of the normal effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Furthermore, upon the start of the game, the game number display GMV in the upper left is updated from "99G" to "100G".

In the 100th G, which is the normal state (non-AT state) of the advantageous section, the push order bell is internally won, but the operation navigation display is not displayed because it is in the normal state (non-AT state). Here, the right stop button 139 is operated first to perform a first stop. The first stop act here is an irregular push, and since the push order bell has been internally won in the normal state of the advantageous section, it is an act subject to a penalty. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A2) when the first stop operation is performed, an operation recommendation display REC such as "Press left is recommended" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image of the normal effect. Ru. Further, at the timing (A2), the fallen samurai icon EX3 is displayed at the position where the "confirm" icon EX1 is displayed, and the "confirm" icon EX1 is not displayed. The fallen samurai icon EX3 is the icon with the lowest expectation of transitioning to the AT state. In this way, when a penalty occurs, the performance that was scheduled to be executed (performance with high expectations) is replaced with another performance of the same type as the performance (performance with low expectations). Furthermore, when a penalty occurs, the dialogue performance that would normally be started after the third stop operation is performed is started at the stage when the irregular press first stop operation is performed. That is, at the timing (A2), the line display WD3 saying "What's the matter?" is displayed. The dialogue display WD3 "What's wrong?" is the dialogue display with the lowest level of expectation for transition to the AT state. Therefore, if a penalty occurs here as well, the performance that was scheduled to be executed (performance with high expectations) is replaced by another performance of the same type as the performance (performance with low expectations). Moreover, the execution timing is also changing. This is because, as will be explained later, at the timing when the third stop operation is performed, a blackout display is added and suggests that a penalty will occur, but if the dialogue production starts at that timing, on the other hand, it also suggests that a penalty will occur. , on the other hand, it suggests the degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state (even if the blackout display is added, the dialogue display can be seen if you look closely), and the two types of suggestions conflict and become unnatural. Therefore, the start of the dialogue production is brought forward. However, if it takes time to control the process from determining that the first stop operation is an operation that is subject to a penalty to hastening the start of the dialogue production, the "What's wrong" operation may occur later than the timing of the first stop operation. It is also possible to display the line display WD3, ``Noja''.

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the left stop button 137 is operated to perform a third stop. At timing (A3) when the third stop operation is performed, a darkening display is added to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. The addition of a darkening display suggests that a penalty has occurred in that game. On the other hand, the operation recommendation display REC and the number of games display GMV in the upper left corner are not darkened. Normally, the value of the transition counter would be updated at the timing of the third stop (timing (A3)), but since the penalty has occurred, it is not updated and remains at 99. Therefore, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is temporarily returned by one game at the timing (A3). As a result, the game number display GMV is switched from "100G" to "99G". Note that the game number display GMV may also be displayed in black.

When the third stop is performed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 goes dark, making it difficult to see the effects on the display screen, but they can be seen if you squint your eyes. At the time when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed (A3), the dialogue effect by the dialogue display WD1 such as "Well done" which triggered the final stop operation is not executed, and the effect by the icon EX3 of the fallen samurai, which has been replaced by the penalty, continues. Also, the dialogue effect by the dialogue display WD1 such as "Well done" is not executed, and instead, the dialogue effect by the dialogue display WD3 such as "What's wrong?" which started at the time when the first stop operation was performed (A2), continues. Note that when the third stop is performed, the dialogue effect by the dialogue display WD3 such as "What's wrong" ends, and the dialogue effect itself may no longer be executed.

The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A4) after the third stop until the next game starts is the same as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the previous timing (A3). That is, although the blackout display continues, the blackout display is not applied to the operation recommendation display REC and the game number display GMV of "99G".

Then, when the start lever 135 is operated and a start operation is performed, the 101G is started. The value of the transition counter is 99, and the gaming state remains the normal state. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (A5) when the 101 game is started, the blackout display ends, the operation recommendation display REC also ends, and the background image of the normal effect is displayed. As described above, since the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 has been returned by one game, the number of games display GMV has been updated to "100G". That is, in a game in which a penalty occurs, the value is returned by 1, and at the start of the next game, it is advanced by 1.

At 101G, the left stop button 137 is operated first, causing the first stop. Because the left stop button 137 is operated first, this is not an irregular press, and the first stop action here is not subject to a penalty. The timing of the first stop operation is (A6), and the left reel 110 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, the "Confirm" icon EX1 is displayed at (A6).

Next, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop and the middle reel 111 is stopped, and finally the right stop button 139 is operated to perform a third stop. The timing when the third stop operation is performed is the timing (A7), and the right reel 112 stops. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a dialogue display WD1 such as "Stunning" is displayed at the timing (A7). Further, the value of the transition counter is updated to 100 at the third stop timing (timing (A3)).

In the game of the 101st G as described above, since no penalty occurred, the anticipation performance with a high degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state, which was scheduled to be executed in the previous 100th G, is executed. Note that if a penalty occurs in the 101st game, the execution of this anticipation effect is postponed until a game in which no penalty occurs.

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated and a start operation is performed, thereby starting the 102nd G. The value of the transition counter is 100, and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the AT state (AT normal state). An AT start screen is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the transition to the AT state is notified (see the liquid crystal display device 157 for the next start operation). In addition, the operation navigation display can be displayed, and in the 102 game, the push order bell is internally won, and the operation navigation display of "312" is also displayed.

In the case of a specification that re-executes the performance in the next game when a penalty occurs, if the "confirmed" icon EX1 is displayed in the game where the penalty occurred, the "confirmed" icon EX1 will remain displayed. This results in an unnatural flow in which the display is darkened and the "confirm" icon EX1 is displayed again in the next game. Moreover, since the "confirmed" icon EX1 is the icon with the highest expectation of transitioning to the AT state, even though that icon EX1 is displayed, if the transition to the AT state is not notified in the next game, Players' distrust increases. In addition, if you make an irregular press (a stop operation other than the first left stop), the recommended operation display REC will also be displayed, and the highly anticipated performance and the recommended operation display REC will be executed in an overlapping manner. In the end, it becomes difficult to understand the performance, which leads to a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, when a penalty occurs, the performance scheduled to be executed is replaced with a safe performance. Here, the transition to the AT state is replaced with a performance with low expectations. By doing so, it is possible to achieve consistency between the presentation and the progress of the game. Note that even if a rare combination is drawn in the 100th G, if a penalty occurs, a performance with a low expectation of shifting to an AT state is executed.

The above explanation using FIGS. 29 and 30 was an example of controlling the transition to the AT state using the transition counter when the AT transition lottery is won. However, when the ceiling number of games is 100, The same applies to control of transition to the AT state using the ceiling counter. That is, if no penalty occurs in a game that starts when the ceiling counter value updated at the third stop is 99, the anticipation effect is executed as planned, and the game shifts to the AT state in the next game. On the other hand, if a penalty occurs, the expected performance is replaced with a performance with lower expectations, and if no penalty occurs in the next game, the expectation performance that was planned for the previous game is executed, and The next game will transition to the AT state.

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the expectation effect and the minor role icon announcement effect.

FIG. 31(a) is a diagram showing icons displayed in the expectation icon notification performance of the expectation performance.

The "confirmed" icon EX1 is an icon with a 100% expectation of transition to the AT state. If you win AT migration in the AT migration lottery, you will be selected with a 59% probability. Note that the AT transfer lottery may be a transfer lottery based on the number of games, or may be a transfer lottery based on internal winning to a rare combination or the like (the same applies in the following description).

The blue "opportunity" icon EX2 is an icon with a 40% expectation of transition to the AT state. If you win AT migration in the AT migration lottery, you will be selected with a 40% probability. On the other hand, if AT migration is not selected in the AT migration lottery, the probability of selection is 60%.

The icon EX3 of a fallen samurai wearing a blue hakama is an icon whose expectation level of transition to AT state is less than 1%. If you win the AT transition lottery in the AT transition lottery, you will be selected with a 1% probability, and if you do not win the AT transition, you will be selected with a 40% probability.

In the examples shown in Figures 29 and 30, the anticipation effect is an effect that is executed in response to the timing of the first stop operation, but it may also be an effect that is executed in response to the timing of the second stop operation or the third stop (final stop) operation.

Figure 31 (b) shows the lines displayed in the dialogue portion of the anticipation production.

The phrase "That's amazing" is only displayed if you win the AT transition lottery, and it indicates a 100% chance of transitioning to the AT state.

The line "It's a good chance" is a line that can be selected whether you win or not in the AT transition lottery, and the expectation level of transition to AT state is 40%. It is a line.

The line "What's wrong?" can be selected even if you win or not in the AT transition lottery, and the expectation level of transition to AT state is 10. The lines are less than %.

The expectation icon notification performance, which is part of the expectation performance, and the dialogue performance, which is also part of the expectation performance, are performances that announce or suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the AT state, so they can be said to be the same type of performance. Strictly speaking, however, the expectation icon announcement performance and the dialogue performance can be said to be different types of performance because the execution timing and manner of the performance are different.

FIG. 31(c) is a diagram showing icons displayed in the small role icon announcement performance.

This small role icon announcement performance is a performance for announcing internally won small roles, and is executed in the example shown in FIG. 18(b).

In the small role icon announcement performance 1, a "cherry" icon is displayed, and it is announced that the cherry has been internally won.

In the minor role icon announcement performance 2, a "watermelon" icon is displayed, and it is announced that the watermelon has been internally won.

In the small win icon notification effect 3, a "replay" icon is displayed, notifying you that an internal win has been made to the replay.

The small role icon announcement performance and the anticipation performance are different types of performances.

When a penalty occurs, the performance that was scheduled to be executed is replaced with a performance of the same type as the performance and with a low level of expectation. The performance to be replaced may be a performance with a lower level of expectation, or may be a performance with the lowest level of expectation.

In addition, we have explained using examples of icons that suggest expectations, display of lines by dialogue production, and icons announcing winning roles, but when an irregular press is performed, other effects from the presentation when a recommended press is performed. Examples of rewriting the performance are not limited to these, but can also be applied to a performance that promotes the operation of a performance operation button, and an operation response performance that is executed when the performance operation button is operated according to the promotion performance. An example of application to operation promotion performance and operation response performance will be described below.

Figure 32 shows examples of operation response effects when recommended and irregular button presses are performed while an operation prompt is being performed.

In FIG. 32, two types of examples, example A and example B, are shown. Each example is an example of a certain game. A certain game here is a game in a normal state (non-AT state) in an advantageous section, and is, for example, a game in which the value of the transfer counter is 99 at the start of the game (the 100th G game). Further, in this certain game, when the start lever 135 is operated, the push order bell is internally won.

As the "game progress", "start operation", "first stop", "second stop", and "third stop" which are operations of the start lever 135 are shown. Below that, the rotating states of the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are also shown. Below that, the execution period of the operation promotion effect is shown. The production operation button corresponds to the PUSH button 192 shown in FIG. 1, and a timing chart showing the timing of pressing the PUSH button 192 is shown. Further below, the execution period of the operation response performance is shown.

Example A is an example in which an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the PUSH button 192 is started in response to the operation of the start lever 135. A liquid crystal display device 157 is shown at the bottom of FIG. 32, and the leftmost liquid crystal display device 157 displays an operation promotion display that is displayed in the operation promotion effect. In this operation promotion display, a button display 192D imitating the PUSH button 192 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed overlapping a part of the background image. The characters PUSH are written on the button display 192D.

In example A1, the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the first stop. Since the left stop button 137 was operated first, it was not an irregular press, and the first stopping act here is not an act subject to a penalty. After the first stop is performed, the PUSH button 192 is operated. In this example, the PUSH button 192 is operated before the second stop is performed. If the PUSH button 192 is operated after the first stop operation of the recommended push is performed, a scheduled operation response effect is executed in response to the operation of the PUSH button 192. As will be described later, the planned operation response performance referred to here is not an operation response performance rewritten by an irregular press, but, for example, the result of a performance lottery in the first sub-control unit 400 in response to the operation of the start lever 135. It refers to the operation response performance of , or the operation response performance corresponding to the internal winning combination. In example A1, operation response effect A with a high expectation of transition to the AT state is executed. The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 switches from the operation promotion display to the operation response display. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown second from the left, a first dialogue frame display RD1 displayed in the operation response effect A is displayed. This first dialogue frame display RD1 is a display consisting of a lord's face with a very happy expression and the dialogue ``It's super hot!''. The first serif frame display RD1 is displayed overlapping a part of the background image. The operation response performance continues to be executed during a certain game. Note that when the operation response effect A is executed, the first effect sound (the highly anticipated effect sound output from the speakers 272 and 277) and the first light emission effect (the highly anticipated light emission from the side lamps 144) Color-based light emission) may also be performed.

In addition, the operation response effects include an operation response effect B in which the expectation level of transition to the AT state is medium, and an operation response effect C in which the expectation level is low or 0. The second dialogue frame display RD2 displayed in the operation response effect B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown second from the right. This second dialogue frame display RD2 is a display consisting of the lord's face with a slightly happy expression and the dialogue ``This is a good opportunity.'' Note that when the operation response effect B is executed, the second effect sound (the effect sound with a medium level of expectation output from the speakers 272 and 277) and the second light emission effect (the effect level with the level of expectation due to the side lamps 144) Light emission with a medium luminous color may be performed. On the rightmost liquid crystal display device 157, a third dialogue frame display RD3 displayed in the operation response effect C is displayed. This third dialogue frame display RD3 is a display consisting of the lord's face with a regrettable expression and the dialogue ``Is it just my imagination?''. Note that when the operation response effect C is executed, the third effect sound (the effect sound with a low expectation level output from the speakers 272 and 277) and the third light emission effect (the emission sound with a low expectation level from the side lamps 144) Alternatively, the operation of the PUSH button 192 does not need to produce a special effect sound or light emission mode.

Note that all dialogue frame displays RD1 to RD3 are displayed overlapping a part of the background image, but the display displayed in the operation response performance is a display that depicts expectations such as "super hot". It may be a full-screen display, or it may be a cut-in display with varying degrees of expectation.

In Example A2, the right stop button 139 is operated first to perform the first stop. The first stop action here is an irregular push, and since it is an internal win for the push order bell in the normal state of the advantageous zone, it is an action subject to a penalty. After the irregular push is performed, the PUSH button 192 is operated before the second stop is performed. In this case, instead of the planned operation response performance A, an operation response performance with a low expectation of transition to the AT state is executed. That is, in response to the operation of the PUSH button 192, an operation response performance C is executed, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 switches from the button display 192D to the third dialogue frame display RD3. In addition, the third sound performance and the third light emission performance are performed without the first sound performance and the first light emission performance. In addition, in response to the irregular push, an operation recommendation display REC such as "Left push recommended" may be displayed. In addition, when the third stop is performed, a blackout display may be added to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In both example A1 and example A2, the PUSH button 192 was operated after the first stop operation, but it is possible to operate the PUSH button 192 before the first stop operation. When the PUSH button 192 is operated before the first stop operation, the operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the PUSH button 192 is always executed as planned. Alternatively, the fourth dialogue frame display consisting of the lord's thoughtful expression and the dialogue "What will happen?" may be uniformly displayed.

Example B is an example in which the operation promotion effect is started in response to the third stop operation.

In example B1, the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform the first stop of recommended pressing. Then, a second stop operation is performed. Further, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, an operation promotion effect is started, and a button display 192D is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Thereafter, the PUSH button 192 is operated. Since the first stop operation is the recommended push, the operation response effect is executed as planned in response to the operation of the PUSH button 192. In example B1 as well, operation response effect A with a high expectation of transition to the AT state is executed. The first serif frame display RD1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, along with this, a first sound effect and a first light emission effect are also performed.

In example B2, the right stop button 139 is operated first, the first stop of irregular pressing is performed, and a penalty occurs. Then, a second stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, an operation promotion effect is started, and a button display 192D is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Thereafter, the PUSH button 192 is operated. Since the first stop operation was an irregular press, the operation response effect C with the lowest expectation level is executed in response to the operation of the PUSH button 192. A third serif frame display RD3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Further, the third effect sound and the third light emission effect are performed without being accompanied by the first effect sound and the first light emission effect.

In this example B, the operation promotion effect was started in response to the third stop operation, but was not started after the first stop operation (for example, after the first stop operation but before the second stop operation). You may also do so.

In addition, if you plan to start the operation promotion effect after the first stop operation or after the first stop operation, if the first stop operation is a recommended press, the operation promotion effect will be performed as planned, but if the first stop operation is an irregular press. If so, the operation promotion performance itself may not be performed, nor may the operation response performance be performed. Even if the operation promotion effect is not performed, the operation recommendation display REC may be displayed in response to an irregular press, or a blackout display may be added to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 when the third stop is performed.

Further, in both example A and example B, when the first stop operation is a recommended push, operation response effect B may be executed in response to a subsequent operation of the PUSH button 192. That is, the operation response performance B may be a planned operation response performance. In this case, if the first stop operation is an irregular press, the operation response effect C is executed in response to the subsequent operation of the PUSH button 192. Further, when the execution of the operation response effect A is scheduled and an irregular press is performed, the operation response effect B may be executed in response to a subsequent operation of the PUSH button 192.

Although the operation response effects A, B, and C displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 have been described as examples of operation response effects, the operation response effects are not limited to these, and may be effects performed by the PUSH button 192 itself. For example, when the PUSH button 192 is pressed in accordance with an operation prompting effect, an action effect of the PUSH button 192 itself may be performed, such as a vibration device built into the PUSH button 192 vibrating (so-called "button vibration"), or a light-emitting lamp built into the PUSH button 192 may be made to emit a specific color (for example, rainbow or red).

Although an example in which an operation response performance is executed in response to an operation prompt performance has been described, the present invention can also be applied to so-called "hidden button performance" or "back button performance" in which operation response performances A, B, and C, first, second, and third sound performances, first, second, and third light emission performances, and button vibration are performed when the PUSH button 192 is pressed under a specific situation in which the operation prompt performance is not executed. For example, when the first stop operation is the recommended press under a specific situation in which the hidden button performance can be executed, if the PUSH button 192 is pressed, a confirmation sound that definitely notifies the granting of a privilege and button vibration are scheduled to be output, but if the PUSH button 192 is pressed in an irregular manner, the confirmation sound may not be output and the button vibration may not be executed. In other words, if the recommended press is used, the hidden button performance may be executed, but if the irregular press is used, the hidden button performance may not be executed. It should be noted that operation prompting effects, operation response effects, sound effects, light emission effects, hidden button effects, etc. can be combined as appropriate. For example, if the recommended button is pressed, the operation prompting effect is followed by "operation response effect A", but if the button is pressed irregularly, the operation prompting effect is not executed, and the hidden button effect is activated, and a confirmation sound or button vibration is played when the PUSH button 192 is pressed. Even if the button is pressed irregularly, the hidden button effect is activated, allowing the player to understand that he or she has the right to receive a special benefit internally.

According to the above description,
"Operation means operated by the player [e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.],
A reel (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that stops spinning when the operation means is stopped;
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of executing a second process;
A presentation means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing a first presentation;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second process is a process related to a transition from a first gaming state [e.g., a normal state (non-AT state) or a normal stage] to a second gaming state [e.g., an AT state or a CZ] that is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state [e.g., updating a transition counter, updating a premonition G number A counter, updating a ceiling counter, and drawing an AT transition lottery],
The second process is a process that may be executed when the operating means is operated in a predetermined operating mode [for example, the left first stop operating mode] in the stop operation [for example, it is not executed in the AT state but is executed in the normal state of the advantageous zone],
the control means is a means for executing the second process in a second case,
the control means is a means for, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, the operation mode of the right first stop or the operation mode of the center first stop], causing a first case [for example, a case in which a penalty process is executed or no process is executed] which may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second case, rather than the second case,
The first effect is one of the effects related to the transition to the second gaming state [for example, an expectation icon notification effect or an operation response effect A that displays a “Determined” icon EX1],
The presentation means is a means for executing the first presentation when the operation means is operated in the predetermined operation mode [for example, the operation mode of the first left stop] in the stop operation in a certain game [for example, a game in which the value of the transition counter is 99 at the start of the game (the 100th game)] [for example, examples A1 and B1 shown in Figs. 29(A2) to (A4) or Fig. 32],
The presentation means is a means for not executing the first presentation when the operation means is operated in the stop operation in the certain game in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, the operation mode of the right first stop or the operation mode of the middle first stop] [for example, examples A2 and B2 shown in Figures 30 (A2) to (A4) or Figure 32],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this game machine, even if the operating means in the certain game is operated in an operating mode different from the predetermined operating mode in the stop operation and the first case occurs, the first performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first case from competing with the first effect. As a result, for example, if the first performance is performed, it will not become unnatural, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is unique in the execution of the first performance. Furthermore, by eliminating the unnaturalness, it may be possible to prevent the player from realizing that the first case has occurred.

Note that the first performance may be one type of performance among a plurality of types of performance related to transition to the second gaming state [for example, an anticipation icon notification performance or an operation response performance].

The invention also includes an operating means operated by a player, and a reel whose rotation is stopped by a stop operation of the operating means, and the control means is a means capable of also executing a first process, and the reel is a means capable of executing the first process. The process is a process that may be executed when the operating means is operated in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode in the stop operation, and the first process is a process that returns to the second gaming state. Regarding the transition, a process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second process [for example, a penalty process (not performing an AT transition lottery, not updating various counters)] may be used.

The gaming machine may also have a second case in which the control means executes the second process, and a first case in which, if the operating means is operated in an operating mode different from the predetermined operating mode during the stop operation [for example, an operating mode for the first right stop or an operating mode for the first center stop], the control means does not execute the second process, which may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second case [for example, a case in which a penalty process is executed or no process is executed, i.e., a penalty is incurred].

Also,
``The production means includes a second production that is a production of the same type as the first production [for example, an expectation icon notification production or an operation response production] that is different from the first production. A production [for example, an anticipation icon announcement production or operation response production C that displays a fallen samurai icon EX3] is also a viable means,
The performance means executes the second performance without executing the first performance when the operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode in the stop operation in the certain game. [For example, examples A2 and B2 shown in FIGS. 30 (A2) to (A4) or FIG. 32],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the second performance is executed instead of the first performance, and while the first performance is prevented from competing with the first performance, the second performance is It can attract players' interest.

Note that the second performance may be of a different type from the first performance (for example, a dialogue performance that is a sense of anticipation performance, but strictly speaking a different type).

Also,
“The second performance is a performance with a lower expectation level regarding transition to the second gaming state [for example, a performance with an expectation level of less than 1%] than the first performance [e.g., a performance with an expectation level of 100%]. ] is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even though the first case is relatively disadvantageous compared to the second case, it is contradictory that the first performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. By executing the second performance in which the level of expectation is relatively low, unnaturalness can be eliminated.

Also,
``The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect after the timing when the first stop operation is performed on the operation means [for example, at the timing corresponding to the first stop operation] [for example, the 29 (A2)],
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect after the timing when the first stop operation is performed on the operating means [for example, at the timing corresponding to the first stop operation] [for example, in FIG. (A2) or between the first stop operation and the second stop operation in Example A of FIG. 32 or after the final stop operation in Example B],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In this way, by setting the timing after the first stop operation of the reels, it is possible to determine the operation mode of the operation means, determine whether or not the operation mode is the predetermined operation mode, and perform the effect. You can also get more time to replace it.

Also,
“The second production is a production with the lowest expectation level among productions of the same type as the first production type [for example, a production with an expectation level of less than 1%],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By executing the second performance with the lowest level of expectation, a performance more suitable for the first case will be executed.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the second presentation when the operation means is operated in a manner different from the predetermined operation manner in the stop operation in the certain game, and for executing the first presentation in the next game of the certain game [for example, the 100th game] [for example, FIG. 30 (A6) ~].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When the first performance is executed in the game following the certain game, it is possible to match the progress of the game.

The effect means is a means that does not perform the first effect even in the next game if the operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode in the stop operation.

The presentation means may be a means for starting execution of a third presentation at a third timing [for example, the timing of (A3) in FIG. 29 ] when the operation means is operated and the final stop operation of the reel is performed in the certain game, the third presentation being one of the presentations relating to the transition to the second game state [for example, a dialogue presentation in which a dialogue display WD1 such as "That's amazing" is displayed], the presentation means is a means for starting execution of the third presentation at the third timing after starting execution of the first presentation [for example, an anticipation icon notification presentation] when the operation means is operated in the predetermined operation mode in the stop operation in the certain game, and the presentation means may be a means for starting execution of the second presentation [for example, FIG. 30 (A2)] but not starting execution of the third presentation [for example, FIG. 30 (A3)] when the operation means is operated in the stop operation in the certain game in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, an operation mode for the first right stop or an operation mode for the first middle stop].

Furthermore, the third production may be one of productions of a different type from the first production [for example, a dialogue production that is a sense of anticipation production but strictly speaking a different type] [for example, " It may be a dialogue production in which a dialogue display WD1 such as "It's wonderful" is displayed.

Further, in the certain game, the operation means may perform an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode in the stop operation [for example, an operation mode for the first right stop or an operation mode for the middle first stop]. When operated, the execution of the second effect starts, but the execution of the third effect [for example, the line effect in which the line display WD1 such as "Stunning" is displayed] does not start, and the execution of the third effect does not start. It may be a means that continues to execute the second effect (for example, an expectation-feeling icon notification effect that displays the icon EX3 of a fallen samurai) at the third timing.

In addition, when the operating means is operated in the predetermined operating mode during the stop operation in the certain game, the next game may transition to the second game state. In other words, the certain game is a game that is scheduled to be the last game in the first game state. For example, the certain game may be a game in which the final effect of a series of effects encouraging a transition to the second game state is executed. The final effect may be an effect that finally notifies the player whether or not there will be a transition to the second game state.

Further, in the certain game, when the operating means is operated in the predetermined operating mode during the stop operation, the second process is executed and the state shifts to the second game state [for example, FIG. 29 (A4) ].

<Penalty>
Next, the penalty executed in the slot machine according to this example will be explained.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a game is played in the first mode (for example, forward push or 3-card bet), the first process (for example, penalty A second process that is more advantageous to the player (for example, normal processing that is not performed in penalty processing (AT transfer lottery, ceiling counter update, etc.)) (update, etc.)) is executed and a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or 2-card bet), the first process may be executed without the second process being executed. It is configured as follows.

Here, the "first aspect" and the "second aspect" according to the present invention refer to gaming aspects (gaming methods), such as stopping the stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139). The mode (e.g. push order, stop operation aiming at a specific symbol), the number of bets on the game media (e.g. medals, electronic media) required to play one game, the length of the operation means (e.g. chance button) This includes pressing, continuous pressing, pressing multiple operating means at the same time, and combinations thereof.

More specifically, the "first aspect" according to the present invention is a second process that is more advantageous for the player than the first process (for example, penalty process) regarding the second gaming state (for example, AT state). This is the mode of play (playing method) in which the processing (for example, normal processing that is not performed in penalty processing) will be executed, and for example, the recommended stop operation (for example, press sequentially (left → middle) → right), scissor hitting (left → right → middle or right → left → middle), left first stop (left → right or middle), middle first stop (center → right or left), right first stop (right → middle or left)) to operate the stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139), play with the recommended number of bets (for example, 3 coins), or a combination of these (for example, 3 coins). This applies to betting and pushing in order.

On the other hand, the "second aspect" according to the present invention is such that the first process (for example, penalty process) is performed without executing the second process (for example, normal process that is not performed in penalty process). This is the game mode (game method) that will be executed, and is a stop operation that is different from the recommended stop operation (for example, a non-recommended stop operation, reverse press (right → middle → left), irregular press (center → right → left or center → left → right), other than the first stop on the left (first stop is on the right or center), other than the first stop in the center (first stop is on the right or left), other than the first stop on the right (first stop is on the right or left), There are modes in which the stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139) are operated when the stop is in the middle or left), modes in which the game is played with a number of bets that are not recommended (for example, betting on two coins), and modes in which a combination of these (for example, when betting on two coins) is performed. (bet and irregular push) fall under this category.

The "first process" according to the present invention is a process related to a second game state (e.g., an AT state) that may be executed when the game is played in a second manner (e.g., irregular pressing or a two-coin bet), and is, for example, a process for executing a penalty (penalty process).

Here, "penalty" refers to processing disadvantageous to the player that would not be executed if the game was played in the first mode (for example, push forward or bet three cards), or This includes a process that does not execute a process (second process) that is always executed when a game is played in a certain mode (for example, push-in-order or 3-coin bet), a combination of these processes, and the like.

For example, if the penalty is related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state, (1) a lottery will not be held to determine whether or not to transition from the normal state to the AT state in the game (note that even if a lottery is held, (2) Not updating (not adding) the value of the counter (ceiling counter) that counts the number of games in the normal state to the number of ceiling games. Processing is applicable.

In this embodiment, both of these penalties (1) and (2) are applied, but the present invention is not limited to these, and only one of the penalties may be applied, or when changing from the normal state to the AT state. Any other penalty may be applicable as long as it is a penalty related to the transition to .

Therefore, for example, when a stock lottery is held according to an internal winning role during a premonition when the AT has already been decided (so-called during the main premonition), the stock lottery may not be held, or when an AT upgrade lottery is held during the main premonition to transition to a better AT according to an internal winning role, the upgrade lottery may not be held, an AT top-up lottery may not be held (or the probability of the lottery being reduced), or even if the AT top-up lottery is won, the penalty may be to suppress (or not execute) preferential processing, such as not adding to the AT.

In addition, although a penalty is imposed on transition to the AT state, a penalty on transition to a CZ or bonus may be implemented instead of (or in addition to) a penalty on transition to the AT state.

That is, the "first process" according to the present invention is a process related to a second gaming state (for example, AT state, CZ, bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, normal state). The "second process" according to the present invention may be any process that is more advantageous to the player than the "first process."

Further, the "first process" according to the present invention is not limited to the process executed in a game played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two-coin bet), but is also the process executed in the second mode. It may be a process executed in a game other than the game played in the second mode, for example, it may be a process executed in both the game played in the second mode and the next game after the game, or it may be a process executed in a game other than the game played in the second mode. It may be a process executed only in the game played in the second mode, a process executed only in the game following the game played in the second mode, or a process executed only in the game played in the second mode. It may be a process executed in one or more arbitrary games after the game played in this mode.

The "first process" according to the present invention may be a process executed when a game in which the push order bell is won is played in a second mode (e.g., irregular pushes or a two-coin bet), or a process executed for winning roles excluding some specific roles (such as guaranteed roles that guarantee a win in an AT or bonus, or reach eyes), or a process executed regardless of the winning role of the game (for all winning roles including misses) when a game is played in a second mode when a push order bell is won, or a process in which multiple types of processes (e.g., (1) the lottery that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the AT state is unfavorable, (2) the value of the ceiling counter is not updated, etc.) are executed when a game in which the push order bell is won is played in a second mode.

In addition, if the game is played in the second mode in a game in which a prize other than the push order bell (including a loss) is played in the second mode, it is better to play in the second mode in a game in which the push order bell is won. The configuration may be such that the "first process" is executed less frequently (or more often) than when it is executed.

<Penalty operation after confirmed performance>
Next, the penalty operation after the confirmed performance will be explained using FIGS. 33 and 34.

<If the penalty operation is not performed after the confirmed performance>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case where no penalty operation is performed after the confirmed performance and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing.

In FIG. 33, time passes from left to right. FIG. 33 also shows, as "game progress", "start operation" which is the operation of the start lever 135, "first stop", "second stop", and "second stop" which are the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139. 3 stop" is shown. Below that, the acceptable states of "Left stop Sw" which is the left stop button 137 sensor, "Medium stop Sw" which is the middle stop button 138 sensor, and "Right stop Sw" which is the right stop button 139 sensor are also shown. has been done. Each Sw enters the acceptable state when the corresponding stop operation becomes possible, and when the stop operation is accepted in the acceptable state, the acceptable state ends. Below that, the rotating states of the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are also shown. Further below, the display contents of "liquid crystal display" on the liquid crystal display device 157 are also shown.

<When penalty operation is not performed after confirmed performance/99th G (normal state)>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A1) in FIG. 33 is the timing at which the third stop operation is performed in the 99th G (normal state) game in the advantageous section.

At the same time, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the background image of the normal presentation (in this example, a moving image of the Lord's character walking) and also displays the number of games played GMV (in this example, the display of the string "99G" indicating that it is the 99th game).

<When penalty operation is not performed after confirmed performance / 100th G (normal state)>
The timing indicated by symbol (A2) in FIG. 33 is the timing at which the 100th G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

In the slot machine according to this example, a game (in this example, the AT state) in which the conditions for transitioning to a second gaming state (in this example, the AT state) which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state (in this example, the normal state) is satisfied is satisfied. For example, in a game where the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 from 99), when an operation to start the game is performed, the first performance (in this example, the confirmed performance) is configured to start. .

At the timing indicated by code (A2), in a game where the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 from 99, the start operation of the start lever 135 (operation to start the game) is performed, so the 100th G is started. , updated the game number display GMV from "99G" to "100G" and started the confirmed performance DP (first performance).

Here, the confirmed production is a production that suggests that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed, and the mode of production is not particularly limited, but in this example, the final production DP is a display of the old man's character's lines. SD1 (in this example, display of the character string ``Grandpa~ Definite!'') and confirmation icon display EI (in this example, an icon including the display of the character string ``Confirmation'') are executed.

Note that the "first performance" according to the present invention may be any performance that has a higher level of expectation regarding transition to the second gaming state than the second performance (for example, the normal performance), and the "first performance" in this example is the final performance. It is not limited to. Therefore, for example, it may be a sense of expectation effect as explained using FIGS. 29 to 32, etc., or a fake that does not involve a transition to the second gaming state but suggests a transition to the second gaming state. It may be a production (false production).

In addition, the timing for starting the final performance (first performance) is not limited to the start operation of the start lever 135, but may be, for example, the timing when the first, second, or third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed.

Subsequently, in the 100th G, after the start operation, the left stop button 137 is operated first to perform a first stop and the left reel 110 is stopped, and then the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop. The middle reel 111 is stopped.

As described above, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the first mode (for example, push forward or bet 3 coins), the first process (for example, AT state) related to the second game state (for example, AT state) is performed. For example, a second process that is more advantageous to the player than the penalty process (for example, a normal process that is not performed as a penalty) is executed.

In the 100th G of this example, since the game is being played in the first mode (the mode in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the recommended order), the player Normal processing (second processing) that is advantageous to AT and is not performed as a penalty is executed, and the transition counter of the AT is updated from 99 to 100.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A3) in FIG. 33 is the timing at which the third stop is performed in the 100G game.

At the same time, the right stop button 139 was operated to perform the third stop, causing the right reel 112 to stop, and this third stop triggers the liquid crystal display device 157 to start displaying the dialogue display SD2 (in this example, the text "Grandpa! Good job!") as a continuation of the final performance DP.

Note that the trigger for starting the display of the dialogue display SD2 may not be the third stop, but may be triggered by the operation of the middle stop button 138 and the second stop, or after the final performance DP has started. It may also be displayed over time.

<When penalty operation is not performed after confirmed performance / 101st G (AT state)>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A4) in FIG. 33 is the timing at which the 101G (AT state) of the advantageous section is started.

In the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in a first mode (for example, sequential push or 3-piece bet) in a game (first game) in which the first performance (for example, confirmed performance) is executed, In the game following the first game (second game), a performance related to the second game state (for example, AT transition performance) is executed, while the first display displayed in the first performance (for example, , dialogue display SD1, dialogue display SD2, and final icon display EI) are configured not to be displayed.

At the timing indicated by symbol (A4), the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100, and the conditions for transitioning to the AT state are satisfied, so the start operation of the start lever 135 triggers the 100th G (normal state). ) to the 101st G (AT state).

In addition, in this example, since the game was played in order (first mode) at the 100th G (first game) where the confirmed performance DP (first performance) is executed, the 100th G (first With the start of the 101st G (second game) following the game (game), the AT transition performance AP (performance related to the second game state) is executed, while the dialogue display SD1 displayed in the confirmed performance DP, The dialogue display SD2 and the confirmed icon display EI (the first display displayed in the first effect) are not displayed.

Here, the AT transition performance is a performance related to the second gaming state (AT state in this example), and the performance mode is not particularly limited, but in this example, the AT transition performance AP is "AT The character string "Start" and the character image of the lord are displayed. In addition, in the 101st G, since the push order bell has been internally selected, in addition to the AT transition production AP, "312" is displayed (push order navigation) to notify the correct operation of the push order bell. There is.

The "effects relating to the second game state" according to the present invention are not limited to the AT transition effect in this example, and may be, for example, when the "second game state" is the AT state, a congratulatory effect congratulating the player for winning the AT (for example, an effect including the display of a string such as "Congratulations on winning the AT!"), an effect suggesting the symbol to aim for (for example, an effect including the display of a string such as "Aim for the 7 symbol"), or an effect suggesting a transition to the AT state (for example, an effect including the display of a string such as "Preparing").

Furthermore, the "second gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT state, and for example, if the "second gaming state" is CZ, a blessing performance (for example, , ``Congratulations on winning the CZ!''), ``Congratulations on winning the CZ!''), ``Shows that suggest the symbols to aim for'' (for example, ``Aim for the 7 symbols''), and Shifting to CZ. It may be an effect that suggests (for example, an effect that includes a display of a character string such as "in preparation"), etc.

Further, the "second gaming state" according to the present invention may be a bonus, a pseudo bonus, or the like. For example, if the "second gaming state" is a bonus or pseudo-bonus, a congratulatory performance that congratulates you on winning the bonus or pseudo-bonus (for example, a performance that includes the display of a character string such as "Congratulations on winning the bonus!") , effects that suggest the symbols to aim for (e.g., effects that include text such as "Aim for 7 symbols"), effects that suggest transition to a bonus or pseudo-bonus (e.g., text such as "In preparation") (a presentation including display of columns), etc.

Furthermore, the game that transitions to the AT state (second game state) is not limited to the game (second game) following the game (first game) in which the game was played without a penalty operation; for example, It may be any game after the game (first game) in which the game was played without a penalty operation.

Therefore, for example, after a congratulatory effect is executed to congratulate the player for winning the AT in the game (second game) following a game (first game) in which the player played without a penalty operation, the game may be configured to transition to the AT state (second game state) from the game (third game) following the game (second game) in which the congratulatory effect was executed.

In addition, the timing for starting the AT transition effect (the effect related to the second game state) is not limited to the start operation of the start lever 135, but may be, for example, the timing when the first, second, or third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is made.

<If a penalty operation is performed after the confirmed performance>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed after a confirmed performance, and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. In this FIG. 34 as well, time passes from left to right. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 33 will be mainly explained.

<When a penalty operation is performed after the confirmed performance / 100th G (normal state)>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A2) in FIG. 34 is the timing at which the 100th G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

At the timing indicated by code (A2), in a game where the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 from 99, the start operation of the start lever 135 (operation to start the game) is performed, so the 100th G is started. , updated the game number display GMV from "99G" to "100G" and started the confirmed performance DP (first performance).

In this example, the final effect DP is the old man's character's dialogue display SD1 (in this example, the character string ``Grandpa~ Definitely!'' is displayed) and the final icon display EI (in this example, the text ``Confirm'') is displayed. Icon) is running. Note that in the 100th G, the push order bell is internally won, but the push order navigation is not displayed because it is in a normal state (non-AT state).

The timing indicated by the symbol (A3) in FIG. 34 is the timing at which the first stop is performed in the 100G game.

As described above, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet), the second process (for example, normal process that is not performed in penalty process) is performed. ) may be executed without executing the first process (for example, penalty process).

In the 100th G of this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first, and the game was played in a pressing order other than the pressing order (second mode). The penalty process (first process) is executed without executing the second process.

In addition, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet) in the first game, a display regarding the gaming method (for example, a display suggesting forward push) is displayed. can be displayed.

In the 100th G (first game) of this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first, and the game was played in a pressing order other than the pressing order (second mode), so the lines are superimposed on the dialogue display SD1. An operation recommendation display REC (display related to the gaming method) is displayed (so that it overlaps).

Here, the recommended operation display REC is an example of a display related to a gaming method, and its display format is not particularly limited, but in this example, the recommended operation display REC is a display including a character string such as "left push recommended". Is going.

According to this example, by displaying the operation recommendation display REC (second display), it is possible to suggest a game method to the player, and at the same time, the operation recommendation display REC (second display) It is possible to draw the player's attention to the dialogue display SD1 (first display) superimposed by the above, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the "display related to the gaming method" according to the present invention is not limited to the recommended operation display REC, but is, for example, a display including character strings such as "please press in order" or "left → middle → right". Good too. Additionally, if a game is played with a non-recommended 2-piece bet (second mode) in a certain game (first game), it is suggested that the game is played with a 2-piece bet that is not recommended. (e.g., a display containing a character string such as ``Playing with a bet of 2 coins'') or a display that recommends playing a game with a bet of 3 coins (for example, a display containing a character string such as ``Please play a game with a bet of 3 coins.'') display) may be performed.

Subsequently, at the 100th G, after the first stop, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop, and finally the left stop button 137 is operated to perform a third stop.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A4) in FIG. 34 is the timing at which the third stop is performed in the 100th game.

At the same timing, the right stop button 139 was last operated and a third stop was performed, so the right reel 112 stopped, and with this third stop as a trigger, the liquid crystal display device 157 was used to display the final effect DP. As a continuation of this, the dialogue display SD2 (in this example, the display of the character string "Old man! It's big!") starts to be displayed, and the dialogue display SD2 and the dialogue display SD1 are superimposed (so that they overlap). ), an operation recommendation display REC (in this example, a display including a character string such as "left push recommended") is displayed.

Normally, the value of the transition counter is incremented (updated) at the timing of the third stop indicated by symbol (A4), but in this example, the penalty processing (first processing) is executed, so the value is not incremented (updated) and remains at 99. As a result, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is temporarily subtracted by one game, and the game number display GMV changes from "100G" to "99G".

The timing indicated by symbol (A5) in FIG. 34 is the timing after the third stop is performed in the 100th G game and before the next 101 Gth game is started.

In this example, even after the third stop has been made, the confirmation effect DP (dialogue display SD1, dialogue display SD, confirmation icon display EI) and operation recommendation display REC continue to be displayed until the next 101st game begins.

<When a penalty operation is performed after the confirmed performance / 101st G (normal state)>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A6) in FIG. 34 is the timing at which the 101G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

In the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is performed in a second manner (for example, an irregular push or a two-copy bet) in a game in which a first performance (for example, a confirmed performance) is executed, the first game is In the next game, the first display (for example, dialogue display SD1, dialogue display SD2, and confirmation icon display EI) displayed in the first performance can be displayed.

In the example explained using FIG. 30, when a penalty occurs in the first game, in the second game following the first game, the performance scheduled to be executed is changed to a safe performance (transition to AT state). The system was designed to replace it with a production of high expectations (with low expectations).

However, in this example, since the game was played with an operation other than the sequential press (irregular press) in the 100th G (the first game in which the confirmed effect is executed), as shown in symbols (A6) and (A7), , in the 101G (the second game following the first game), the dialogue display SD1, the dialogue display displayed after the timing when the third stop of the 100G was performed (timing indicated by code (A4)) SD2 and the confirmed icon display EI continue to be displayed (continuing the confirmed effect DP), and the anticipation effect is not executed.

According to this example, even if a game is played with a penalty operation (second mode) in a game (first game) in which a confirmed performance (first performance) is executed, the first performance is By displaying the dialogue display SD1, the dialogue display SD2, and the final icon display EI (first display) displayed in the final performance (first performance) in the next game (second game), It is possible to prevent the player from having suspicions that a penalty process (first process) that is disadvantageous to the player is being executed due to a game with a penalty operation (second aspect). , it is possible to prevent players from losing their desire to play.

Furthermore, according to this example, the dialogue display SD1, the dialogue display SD2, and the final icon display EI that were displayed after the timing when the third stop of the 100th G was performed continue to be displayed, and the final performance (second stop) is continued. Since there is no need to restart the first performance from the beginning, the control burden on the control means can be reduced.

Furthermore, the slot machine according to the present example is configured to play a game in a second manner (for example, a penalty operation in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in a pressing order other than the left first stop) in the second game (for example, the 101st G). If the game is not performed, the display regarding the gaming method is not displayed.

In the 101st G (second game) of this example, the left stop button 137 was operated first, and no game was played with a penalty operation (other than the first left stop). display) is not displayed.

According to this example, there is a suspicion that penalty processing (first processing) that is disadvantageous to the player is being executed in the next game after the game is played using the irregular push (second mode). It is possible to prevent the player from becoming depressed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing, and it is also possible to prevent the player from being too excited.

<When a penalty operation is performed after the confirmed performance / 102nd G (AT state)>
In this example, the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 at the 101st G, and the conditions for transitioning to the AT state are met. It is transitioning from the 1st G (normal state) to the 102nd G (AT state).

In the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in a second mode (for example, an irregular push or a two-card bet) in the first game, the second game state is changed in a game subsequent to the second game. It is configured to execute a performance (for example, an AT transition performance).

In the 100th G (first game) of this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first, and the game was played with an irregular press (second mode), so the 101G (second game) In the subsequent game (102nd G), an AT transition performance AP (performance related to the second game state) is executed.

In this example, the AT transition effect AP displays the character string "AT start" and the character image of the lord. In addition, in the 102nd G, since the push order bell has been internally selected, in addition to the AT transition effect, "312" is displayed (push order navigation) to notify the correct operation of the push order bell. .

According to this example, as explained with reference to FIG. In the game), the AT transition performance AP (performance related to the second game state) is executed, and as explained using FIG. When a game is played, in order to execute an AT transition performance (performance related to the second game state) in the 102G game after the 101G game (second game), the performance and the progress of the game state are matched. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although not shown, in the 101st G (second game), if the game is played again with irregular presses (second mode), the confirmed performance DP will continue to be displayed in the 101st G, The recommended operation display REC is displayed, and in the next 102nd G, the confirmed effect DP is displayed again.

In addition, even if a game is played with an irregular press (second mode) in the 100th G (first game), if the penalty process (first process) is not executed, in the 101st G Without continuing the display of dialogue display SD1, dialogue display SD2, and confirmed icon display EI that were displayed after the timing of the third stop of the 100th G, an AT transition performance (performance related to the second game state) is performed. It may be configured to execute.

<Penalty operation/summary after confirmed performance>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a gaming state control means (for example, the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 4) that can control a plurality of gaming states. and a performance means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of executing a plurality of performances, the plurality of game states being a first game state (for example, a normal a second gaming state (for example, AT state, CZ, bonus) that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state as processing related to the second gaming state; A first process related to the gaming state (for example, penalty process (not performing an AT transfer lottery, not updating a ceiling counter, etc.)) and a second process that is more advantageous for the player than the first process ( For example, it is possible to perform at least the normal processing that is not performed in the penalty processing (AT transfer lottery, ceiling counter update, etc.), and the game can be executed in the first mode (for example, forward push, 3-card bet). If the game is played in a second manner (for example, irregular push or bet with two coins), the first process is executed without executing the second process. The plurality of performances may include a first performance (for example, the confirmed performance DP shown in FIG. 34 (A2)), and the first performance may include an operation to start a game (for example, This is a performance that is started when the start lever 135 operation shown in 1) is performed, and in the game in which the first performance is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first game"), the second aspect is When a game is played, the first display displayed in the first effect (for example, in FIG. 34 (A6) When a game is played in the first mode in the first game, the first display is not displayed in the second game. (For example, the line display SD1, SD2 and the confirmed icon display EI are not displayed in the 101G shown in FIG. 33).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if a game is played in the second mode in a game in which the first performance is executed (first game), the next game after the first game is played in the second mode. In order to display the first display displayed in the first performance in the game (second game), the game is performed in the second mode, which results in processing disadvantageous to the player (first processing). ) can be prevented from making the player suspect that the game is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Further, when a game is played in the second mode in the first game, a display regarding the gaming method (for example, the operation recommendation display REC shown in FIG. 34 (A3)) is displayed superimposed on the first display. It may be possible.

With this configuration, by displaying the second display, it is possible to suggest to the player how to play the game, while also drawing the player's attention to the first display superimposed by the second display, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the plurality of performances include a second performance (for example, a performance that announces anticipation icons such as the "opportunity" icon and the "samurai" icon shown in FIG. 31(a), and " This is a good opportunity!'', ``What's up?'', etc.), and the first performance is a performance that has a higher level of expectation regarding the transition to the second gaming state than the second performance. There may be.

In this configuration, by displaying the first display in a presentation (first presentation) that creates high expectations for a transition to the second game state in the game following the first game (second game), it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that a process (first process) that is disadvantageous to the player is being executed in the second mode of game, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Further, when a game is played in the first mode in the first game, an effect related to the second game state is executed in the second game (for example, in the example shown in FIG. 33, in the 101st G When a game is played in the second mode in the first game, an effect related to the second game state is executed in a game subsequent to the second game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 34, the AT transition effect AP may be executed in the next game of 101G.

With such a configuration, it is possible to match the presentation and the progress of the game state, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, the first display is provided with a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) that can perform a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of a plurality of reels, and the first display is The display may be displayed after the timing when the last stop operation on the operating means is performed (the timing when the third stop shown in FIG. 34 (A5) is performed).

With such a configuration, there is no need to restart the first display from the beginning in the second game, so the control burden on the control means can be reduced.

In addition, the first aspect includes a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) that can perform a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of a plurality of reels. Stop operations to be performed (for example, sequential press (left → middle → right), scissor strike (left → right → middle or right → left → middle), left first stop (left → right or middle), middle first stop ( The second mode is different from the recommended stop operation. Stop operations (for example, non-recommended stop operations, reverse presses (right → middle → left), irregular presses (middle → right → left or middle → left → right), other than the first stop on the left (first stop is right or middle) ), other than the middle first stop (first stop is on the right or left), or other than the right first stop (first stop is middle or left)).

With such a configuration, even if the stop operation means is operated with a stop operation different from the stop operation recommended in the game in which the first performance is executed (the first game), it will be easier for the player to It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that a disadvantageous process (first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

<Next game performance after penalty operation>
Next, the next game effect after the penalty operation will be explained.

The slot machine according to this example has a stage A and a stage B which have different production modes. Stage A is a stage in which an old man character mainly appears in various productions, and stage B is a stage in which an old man character mainly appears in various productions. This is a stage where characters appear. The player can freely select his/her favorite stage using a menu screen (not shown). Note that it goes without saying that the number and contents of stages are not limited to this example.

In addition, in this example, the presentation format of the anticipation effect (a second effect with low anticipation regarding transition to a second game state (e.g., AT state)) described below is different between stage A and stage B, and in stage A, at least an old man's lines effect can be executed as an anticipation effect, and in stage B, at least a princess effect can be executed as an anticipation effect.

<Next play effect after penalty operation/Expectation effect/Old man's lines effect>
FIG. 35(a) shows an example of an old man's lines presentation, which is one of the anticipation-creating presentations.

The old man's line performance is a performance (expectation performance) that can be executed at least at stage A, and in the first game at stage A, the game was performed in the first mode (for example, pushing in order or betting 3 pieces). This is an effect that can be executed both when the game is played in the second mode (for example, an irregular push or a two-card bet). In this example, three types of old man dialogue productions JE1 to JE3 can be executed.

Grandfather dialogue production JE3 is a production in which the character image of the grandfather is displayed and the line "It's hot" is displayed, and the expectation level of transition to AT state is 80% (among the grandfather dialogue productions JE1 to JE3). , the performance with the highest expectation of transitioning to the AT state). This old man's dialogue performance JE3 will be selected with a probability of 59% if the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery.

The old man's lines effect JE2 is an effect in which the line "You can look forward to it" is displayed along with an image of the old man's character, and is an effect in which the expected probability of transitioning to the AT state is 40%. This old man's lines effect JE2 is selected with a 40% probability if the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery, and is selected with a 60% probability if the AT transition is not won in the AT transition lottery.

Grandfather dialogue production JE1 is a production in which the character image of the grandfather is displayed and the line "What's that?" is displayed, and the expectation level of transitioning to AT state is less than 1% (among the grandfather dialogue productions JE1 to JE3). This is the performance with the lowest expectation of transitioning to the AT state). This old man's line performance JE1 is selected with a probability of 1% when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery, and is selected with a probability of 40% when the AT transition is not won in the AT transition lottery.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Expectation performance/Princess performance>
FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing an example of the princess effect, which is one of the anticipation effects.

The princess performance is a performance (expectation performance) that can be executed at least in stage B, and in the first game in stage B, when the game is played in the first mode (for example, push forward or bet 3 pieces) This is an effect that can be executed both when the game is played in the first mode and in the second mode (for example, an irregular push or a two-card bet). In this example, three types of princess effects HE1 to HE3 are executable.

Princess performance HE3 is a performance in which a princess character image is displayed and the line "This is a great chance!" is displayed, and the expectation level of transitioning to AT state is 80% (among princess performances HE1 to HE3, This is the performance with the highest degree of expectation for transition to the AT state). This princess performance HE3 will be selected with a probability of 59% when AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery.

The princess performance HE2 is a performance in which the character image of the princess is displayed and the line "It's your chance" is displayed, and the expectation level of transition to the AT state is 40%. This princess performance JE2 will be selected with a probability of 40% if the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery, and will be selected with a 60% probability if the AT transition is not won in the AT transition lottery.

Princess performance HE1 is a performance in which the line "Ufufu" is displayed along with the display of the princess's character image, and the expectation level of transition to AT state is less than 1% (among princess performances HE1 to HE3, AT state This is the performance with the lowest level of expectation that it will transition to . This princess performance HE1 is selected with a probability of 1% if the player wins the AT transfer lottery, and is selected with a probability of 40% if the AT transfer is not selected in the AT transfer lottery.

According to this example, the same effect is not executed on all stages, so it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort and prevent the player from losing their motivation to play. Furthermore, if the same effect were executed after a penalty operation (after playing in the second mode), the player may realize that it is an effect executed after a penalty operation and may suspect that control that is disadvantageous to the player is being executed; however, according to this example, such doubts can be dispelled.

In addition, in this example, an example of a performance in which the expectation level to transition to the AT state is less than 1% is shown as a performance with the lowest expectation level to transition to the AT state, but a performance with an expectation level to transition to the AT state is 0%. It may be a performance. Furthermore, although the number of anticipation effects and the level of expectation are the same for the old man's dialogue performance and the princess performance, the number of anticipation effects and the level of expectation may be varied depending on the stage. In addition, in a game machine having three or more stages, there may be stages that perform anticipation production of the same production mode.

In addition, the "effect with low expectation regarding transition to the second gaming state (second effect)" according to the present invention is not limited to an effect with low expectation regarding transition to the AT state, but may be an effect with low expectation regarding transition to the CZ state or a bonus state. In other words, it is sufficient if it is an effect with low expectation (sense of expectation) regarding transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the case of a game machine configured to perform an AT lottery when a rare role is won, a presentation with a low expectation of winning a rare role (for example, a small role icon announcement presentation, Fig. 36) b), which will be described later using b), also indirectly suggests that the level of expectation regarding the transition to the AT state is low, and thus falls under an example of creating a sense of expectation. In other words, it is not limited to presentations that <<direct>> suggest that the degree of expectation (feeling of expectation) regarding transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player is low, but also expectations regarding transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It may be a production that <<indirectly>> suggests that the degree of expectation (feeling of expectation) is low.

<Variations of next game effect after penalty operation/expectation effect/old man's line effect>
FIG. 36(a) shows a modified example of an old man's lines presentation, which is one of the anticipation-creating presentations.

In this example, in addition to the old man's dialogue productions JE2 to JE3 explained using FIG. 35(a), three types of productions JE1a to JE1c can be executed as productions with the lowest expectation of transitioning to the AT state.

The old man's dialogue production JE1a is a performance in which the character image of the grandfather is displayed and the line "What's that?" is displayed, and the grandfather's character image is displayed in the grandfather's dialogue production JE1b, which is a performance in which the character image of the grandfather is displayed and the line "Tono~dono~" is displayed. This is the effect that is displayed, and the old man's dialogue effect JE1c is an effect in which the character image of the old man is displayed and the line ``Princess is coming!'' is displayed.

All of the old man dialogue performances JE1a to JE1c are performances in which the expectation of transitioning to AT state is less than 1%, and if you win AT transition in the AT transition lottery, you will be selected with a 1% probability, and you will be selected as AT in the AT transition lottery. If you are not selected for the transition, you will be selected with a 40% probability.

Grandfather dialogue performances JE1a to JE1c are the first game in stage A, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet), one of the performances is selected by lottery. executed. Note that the winning probabilities of the lottery may be the same (1/3) or may be different. In addition, in the first game in stage A, when the game is played in the first mode (for example, forward push or 3-piece bet), and when the game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or 2-piece bet), It may be an effect that can be performed in both cases.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Expectation performance/Small role icon announcement performance>
FIG. 36(b) is a diagram showing an example of a minor role icon announcement performance, which is one of the anticipation effects.

The minor role icon announcement performances IC1 to IC4 are performances that announce internally won minor roles and rolls.

The small role icon announcement performance IC1 is a performance that announces that the cherry role has been internally won, and a "cherry symbol" icon is displayed. The small role icon notification performance IC2 is a performance that announces that the watermelon role has been internally won, and a "watermelon symbol" icon is displayed. The small role icon announcement performance IC3 is a performance that announces that the replay role has been internally won, and a "replay symbol" icon is displayed. The small role icon announcement performance IC4 is a performance that announces a chance, and an icon imitating the appearance of a "sake barrel" is displayed.

The small role icon announcement performance IC5 is a performance (expectation performance) that can be executed at least in stages A and B, and is a performance that can be performed in the first game in stages A and B in the first mode (for example, push in order or bet 3 pieces). This is an effect that can be executed both when the game is played in ) and when the game is played in the second mode (for example, an irregular push or a two-card bet).

Small role icon announcement performance IC5 is a performance with less than 1% expectation of transitioning to AT state, and if a rare role is won in the internal lottery, it will be selected with a 1% probability, and a rare role will not be won in the internal lottery. , it will be selected with a 40% probability.

In a gaming machine that is configured to perform an AT lottery when a rare role is won, the small role icon announcement performance IC5, which has low expectations for winning a rare role, has a high expectation level regarding transition to the AT state. It functions as a sense of expectation that indirectly suggests that the situation is low.

Although the minor role icon announcement performance IC5 is a performance that can be performed at least on stages A and B, it may also be a performance that can be performed on any stage (for example, it can be performed only on stage B).

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage A>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed in stage A and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage A/100th G>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A1) in FIG. 37 is the timing at which the 100th G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

At the same timing, in a game in which the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 from 99, a start operation (operation to start the game) of the start lever 135 was performed, so the 100th G is started, and the game number display GMV has been updated from "99G" to "100G" and has started normal production.

Here, the normal performance is a performance that is mainly performed in a normal state, and the performance mode is not particularly limited, but in this example, as a normal performance of stage A, the lord and grandfather are enshrined in the large hall of the castle. The background image is displayed.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A2) in FIG. 37 is the timing at which the first stop is made in the 100G game.

As described above, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet), the second process (for example, normal process that is not performed in penalty process) is performed. ) may be executed without executing the first process (for example, penalty process).

In the 100th G in this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first, and the game was played by irregular pressing (second mode), so normal processing (second processing) that is not performed in penalty processing is not executed, and the penalty process (first process) is executed at the timing when the third stop indicated by symbol (A3) is performed.

In addition, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet) in the first game, a display regarding the gaming method (for example, a display suggesting forward push) is displayed. can be displayed.

In the 100th G (first game) of this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first and the game was played with an irregular press (second mode), so it is superimposed on the background image of the normal performance of stage A. An operation recommendation display REC (display related to the gaming method) is displayed (so as to overlap).

Subsequently, at the 100th G, after the first stop, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop, and finally the left stop button 137 is operated to perform a third stop.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A3) in FIG. 37 is the timing at which the third stop is performed in the 100G game.

At the same time, the right stop button 139 was last operated to perform the third stop, and the right reel 112 has stopped. Also, the operation recommendation display REC (in this example, a display including the text "Push left recommended") that started to be displayed at the time of the first stop continues to be displayed.

Normally, the value of the transition counter would be added (updated) at the timing of the third stop indicated by code (A3), but in this example, the value of the transition counter is added (updated) by executing the penalty process (first process). It is not added (updated) and remains at 99. Therefore, as a result of once subtracting one game from the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400, the game number display GMV is switched from "100G" to "99G".

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which a penalty (first process) is executed in the 100th G game where the game is played with an irregular press (second mode), but the present invention is not limited to this, The penalty process (first process) may be executed in the game following the game in which the game was played with an irregular push (second mode), or the penalty process (first process) may be executed when the game is played with an irregular push (second mode). Penalty processing (first processing) may be executed in both the game that has been played and the game that follows the game.

In addition, the "first game" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, but may include, but is not limited to, a new performance in the first game (for example, a new continuous performance other than the background image of the normal performance, a new mission performance, a confirmed performance, Games that are not scheduled to be executed (expectation effects, success effects, etc.), and effects that do not involve a transition of the game state (performances that involve transitions of the effect state or control state, etc. (for example, stage changes, continuous effects, 1G complete missions) It is preferable that the game be a game in which a performance other than a performance (such as a performance) is executed.

That is, in a game in which a new performance is executed in the first game, or in a game in which a performance accompanied by a transition of the game state is executed, the game is performed in the second mode (for example, an irregular push or a two-coin bet). In this case, the performance that may involve a state transition is executed again without executing the expectation performance (or the performance that may involve a different type of state transition is performed by re-drawing). It is preferable.

According to this example, if the game is played in the second mode in a game in which no new performance is scheduled to be executed or a game in which a performance that does not involve a transition of the game state is performed, it is disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that a certain process (the first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing. It is possible to prevent players from being too excited.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage A/101G>
The timing indicated by symbol (A4) in Figure 37 is the timing when the 101st game (normal state) of the advantageous zone begins.

The slot machine of this example is configured to execute a second effect (e.g., an anticipation effect) with a lower expectation of transitioning to a second gaming state (e.g., an AT state) than the first effect with a higher probability in the game following the first game when the first game is played in the second mode (e.g., irregular pressing or a two-coin bet) than when the first game is played in the first mode (e.g., sequential pressing or a three-coin bet). Note that a "high probability" may be 100%. In other words, when the first game is played in the second mode, the second effect may be executed with a 100% probability in the game following the first game.

In this example, since the game is played with an irregular push (second mode) in the 100G (first game), the recommended order push (first mode) in the 100G (first game) is played. ), in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), the old man's dialogue will be superimposed (overlapping) on the background image of the normal performance of stage A. Performance (expectation performance) JE1 (second performance with lower expectations regarding transition to AT state than the first performance) is being executed.

Here, the expectation performance is a performance with low expectations regarding transition to the second gaming state, and the form of the performance is not particularly limited, but in this example, the expectation performance is as shown in FIG. 35(a). The old man's dialogue performance JE1 explained using the above is being executed.

Grandfather dialogue production JE1 is a production in which the character image of the grandfather is displayed and the line "What's that?" is displayed, and the expectation level of transitioning to AT state is less than 1% (among the grandfather dialogue productions JE1 to JE3). This is the performance with the lowest expectation of transitioning to the AT state). This old man's line performance JE1 is selected with a probability of 1% when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery, and is selected with a probability of 40% when the AT transition is not won in the AT transition lottery.

According to this example, in the 100th G (first game), the game is played with irregular presses (second mode) than when the game is played with sequential presses (first mode). , in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), there is a higher probability that the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the AT state (second game state) is higher than the old man dialogue performance JE2, JE3 (first performance). Since the old man's line performance JE1 (second performance) with a low value is executed, a penalty process (first process) disadvantageous to the player is executed due to playing the game with an irregular press (second mode). It is possible to prevent players from having doubts that they are being played, and it is possible to prevent players from losing their desire to play, and it is also possible to prevent players from being overly provoked. be able to.

In particular, even if the stop operation means is operated with a stop operation different from the stop operation recommended in the game in which the first effect is executed (the first game), penalty processing that is disadvantageous to the player ( It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that the first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing. You can prevent it from becoming too exciting.

Further, the slot machine according to the present example is configured not to display the display regarding the gaming method unless the game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or bet with two coins) in the second game. .

In the 101G (second game) of this example, the left stop button 137 was operated first, and the game was not played due to the irregular press (second mode), so the recommended operation display REC (display regarding the game method ) is not displayed.

According to this example, by not displaying the operation recommendation display REC (display related to the game method) in the next game played using irregular presses (second mode), processing disadvantageous to the player (first mode) It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that the processing (processing) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Even if the game is played with irregular button presses (second mode) in the 100th game (first game), if the penalty processing (first processing) is not executed, the anticipation effect (second effect with a lower expectation of transitioning to the AT state than the first effect) may not be executed in the 101st game.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage A/Cherry internal win>
The display screens of the liquid crystal display device 157 shown by symbols (A1') to (A4') in Figure 37 are diagrams showing examples of the display screen when the cherry role is internally won on the 100th game.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A1') is the timing at which the 100th G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

At the same timing, since the cherry role (rare role) was internally won in the 100th G, the small role icon notification performance IC1 explained using FIG. 36(b) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

The next timing indicated by the symbol (A2') is the timing when the first stop occurred during the 100th game.

At the same timing, the right stop button 139 was operated first and the game was played with an irregular press (second mode), so the background image of the normal performance of stage A and the small role icon announcement performance IC1 are superimposed. An operation recommendation display REC (display related to the gaming method) is displayed (so that it overlaps).

The timing indicated by the following symbol (A3') is the timing at which the third stop was performed in the 100G game.

At the same timing, the right reel 112 has stopped because the right stop button 139 has been operated last and a third stop has been performed. In addition, the display of the small role icon notification effect IC1 and the operation recommendation display REC that started to be displayed at the time of the first stop is continued.

Normally, the value of the transition counter is incremented (updated) at the timing of the third stop indicated by the symbol (A3'), but in this example, the penalty processing (first processing) is executed, so the value is not incremented (updated) and remains at 99. As a result, the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400 is temporarily subtracted by one game, and the game number display GMV changes from "100G" to "99G".

The timing indicated by the following symbol (A4') is the timing at which the 101G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

In this example, in the 100th G (first game) when the small role icon announcement performance IC (a performance that does not involve a transition of the game state) is executed, the game is played with an irregular press (second mode). Therefore, in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), the background image of the normal performance of stage A is superimposed (so that it overlaps), and the old man's dialogue performance (expectation performance) JE1 ( A second performance with a lower level of expectation regarding transition to the AT state than the first performance is being performed.

In addition, in the 101G (second game), the left stop button 137 was operated first, and the game was not played due to an irregular press, so the operation recommendation display REC (display regarding the game method) is not displayed.

In addition, in this example, the cherry winning combination is internally won in the first game, the small winning icon announcement performance IC1 (a performance that does not involve a transition of the gaming state) is executed, and the game is played in the second mode in the game. Although an example has been shown in which this is done, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the watermelon hand, which is the same rare hand, may be applied instead of the cherry hand.

In addition, if a rare role is won internally, a rare role announcement performance (a performance that does not involve a transition of the gaming state) is executed, and the game is played in the second mode in the game, penalty processing ( The first process) may be configured to reduce the probability of winning the AT lottery (or to make it difficult to shift to the AT state even if the AT lottery is won).

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage B>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a penalty operation is performed in stage B and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each timing. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 37 will be mainly explained.

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage B/100th G>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A1) in FIG. 38 is the timing at which the 100th G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

At the same timing, in a game in which the value of the AT transition counter reaches 100 from 99, a start operation (operation to start the game) of the start lever 135 was performed, so the 100th G is started, and the game number display GMV has been updated from "99G" to "100G" and has started normal production.

In this example, the normal effect for Stage B is to display a background image of the Lord's character walking.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A2) in FIG. 38 is the timing at which the first stop occurred during the 100th game.

As described above, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or two bet), the second process (for example, normal process that is not performed in penalty process) is performed. ) may be executed without executing the first process (for example, penalty process).

In the 100th G in this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first, and the game was played by irregular pressing (second mode), so normal processing (second processing) that is not performed in penalty processing is not executed, and the penalty process (first process) is executed at the timing when the third stop indicated by symbol (A3) is performed.

In addition, in the slot machine of this example, when the first game is played in the second mode (e.g., irregular pressing or betting two coins), a display regarding the playing method (e.g., a display suggesting pressing in order) can be displayed.

In the 100th G (first game) of this example, the right stop button 139 was operated first and the game was played with an irregular press (second mode), so it is superimposed on the background image of the normal performance of stage B. An operation recommendation display REC (display related to the gaming method) is displayed (so as to overlap).

Subsequently, at the 100th G, after the first stop, the middle stop button 138 is operated to perform a second stop, and finally the left stop button 137 is operated to perform a third stop.

The timing indicated by the symbol (A3) in FIG. 38 is the timing at which the third stop is performed in the 100G game.

At the same timing, the right reel 112 has stopped because the right stop button 139 has been operated last and a third stop has been performed. In addition, the operation recommendation display REC, which started displaying at the time of the first stop, continues to be displayed.

Normally, the value of the transition counter would be added (updated) at the timing of the third stop indicated by code (A3), but in this example, the value of the transition counter is added (updated) by executing the penalty process (first process). It is not added (updated) and remains at 99. Therefore, as a result of once subtracting one game from the number of games managed by the first sub-control unit 400, the game number display GMV is switched from "100G" to "99G".

<Next game performance after penalty operation/Stage B/101G>
The timing indicated by the symbol (A4) in FIG. 38 is the timing at which the 101G (normal state) of the advantageous section starts.

In the first game, the slot machine according to the present example plays the game in the second mode (for example, irregular push or bet on 2 coins) rather than in the first mode (for example, push in order or bet on 3 coins). , the probability is higher in the game following the first game, and the second performance has lower expectations regarding transition to the second game state (for example, AT state) than the first performance. (For example, creating a feeling of anticipation).

In this example, since the game is played with irregular pressing (second mode) in the 100th G (first game), the game is played with sequential pushing (first mode) in the 100th G (first game). There is a higher probability that in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), the princess performance (expectation performance) HE1 (the level of expectation regarding the transition to the AT state is lower than the first performance) The second performance) is being executed.

In this example, the princess effect HE1 described using FIG. 35(b) is executed as the expectation effect. Princess performance HE1 is a performance in which the line "Ufufu" is displayed along with the display of the princess's character image, and the expectation level of transition to AT state is less than 1% (among princess performances HE1 to HE3, AT state This is the performance with the lowest level of expectation that it will transition to . This princess performance HE1 is selected with a probability of 1% if the player wins the AT transfer lottery, and is selected with a probability of 40% if the AT transfer is not selected in the AT transfer lottery.

According to this example, in the 100th G (first game), the game is played with irregular presses (second mode) than when the game is played with sequential presses (first mode). , in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), there is a high probability that the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the AT state (second game state) is higher than that of princess performances HE2 and HE3 (first performance). Since the low princess performance HE1 (second performance) is executed, a penalty process (first process) disadvantageous to the player is executed due to playing the game with an irregular press (second mode). It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing, and it is possible to prevent the player from being too excited. can.

In particular, even if the stop operation means is operated with a stop operation different from the stop operation recommended in the game in which the first performance is executed (first game), penalty processing ( It is possible to prevent the player from having any suspicion that the first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing. You can prevent it from becoming too exciting.

Further, the slot machine according to the present example is configured not to display the display regarding the gaming method unless the game is played in the second mode (for example, irregular push or bet with two coins) in the second game. .

In the 101st G (second game) of this example, the left stop button 137 was operated first, and the game was not played due to an irregular press, so the recommended operation display REC (display regarding the game method) is not displayed. .

According to this example, by not displaying the operation recommendation display REC (display regarding the playing method) in the next game after a game in which irregular button presses (second mode) have been used, it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that a process disadvantageous to the player (first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, if a game is played with an irregular push (second mode) in the 100th G (first game), as shown by the symbol (A4'), the next game after the 100th G (first game) In the game (101st G), even if the rare combination (Watermelon) is won (winner), the game is performed in the first mode (for example, recommended order pressing) in the 100th G (first game). The princess performance (expectation performance) HE1 is executed with a higher probability than when the princess performance is expected. On the other hand, the winning presentation (such as a lighting effect on the reels) that notifies you of the winning of a small role is performed in a manner that corresponds to the winning small role (here, the winning presentation corresponding to the watermelon is executed). .

In other words, if a game is played with an irregular push (second mode) in the 100G (first game), regardless of the winning combination in the next game (101G) after the 100G (first game), First, in the 101st game following the 100th game (first game), the princess performance (expected (feeling effect) HE1 (a second effect with lower expectations regarding transition to the AT state than the first effect) is executed.

<Next game performance/summary of penalty operation>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a gaming state control means (for example, the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 4) that can control a plurality of gaming states. and a performance means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of executing a plurality of performances, the plurality of game states being a first game state (for example, a normal a second gaming state (for example, AT state, CZ, bonus) that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state as processing related to the second gaming state; A first process related to the gaming state (for example, penalty process (not performing an AT transfer lottery, not updating a ceiling counter, etc.)) and a second process that is more advantageous for the player than the first process ( For example, it is possible to execute at least the processing that is not performed in the penalty processing (AT transition lottery, ceiling counter update, etc.), and if the game is played in the first mode (for example, forward push or 3-card bet), , when the second process is executed and a game is played in a second manner (for example, irregular push or bet with two coins), the first process is executed without executing the second process. In some cases, the plurality of performances include a first performance and a second performance that has a lower expectation regarding transition to the second gaming state than the first performance (for example, FIG. 37 (A4) The game is played in the second mode more than when the game is played in the first mode in the first game. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the game is played, the second performance is executed with a higher probability in the game following the first game.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first game is played in the second mode, the second effect, which has a lower expectation of transitioning to the second game state than the first effect, is executed with a higher probability in the game following the first game when the first game is played in the second mode than when the first game is played in the first mode. This prevents the player from having doubts that a process disadvantageous to the player (the first process) is being executed by playing in the second mode, prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play, and prevents the player from being overly provoked.

Furthermore, when a game is played in the second mode in the first game, the first process is executed in the game following the first game (hereinafter referred to as the "second game"). It may be something that

With such a configuration, by playing a game in the second mode, a process (first process) that is disadvantageous to the player may be executed in the game following the game. It is possible to prevent the player from having such doubts, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing, and it is also possible to prevent the player from being too excited.

Furthermore, when a game is played in the second mode in the first game, a display regarding the gaming method (hereinafter referred to as "first display") in the first game. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A2). An operation recommendation display REC) may be displayed, and the first display may not be displayed unless a game is played in the second mode in the second game.

With such a configuration, by displaying the first display, it is possible to suggest the game method to the player, and in addition, in the next game played in the second mode, By not displaying the first display, it is possible to prevent the player from having suspicions that a process that is disadvantageous to the player (the first process) is being executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the player's desire to play.

Further, the second performance may be executed in a game other than the second game.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having suspicions that a process (the first process) that is disadvantageous to the player is being executed, and to prevent the player from playing the game. In addition to being able to prevent a decrease in motivation, it is also possible to prevent players from being too excited.

Further, the first game may be a game in which no new performance is scheduled to be executed in the first game.

With such a configuration, if a game is played in the second mode in a game in which no new performance is scheduled to be executed, there is a possibility that processing (first processing) disadvantageous to the player will be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts about whether or not he or she is playing the game, to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing, and to prevent the player from being too excited.

Further, the first game may be a game in which a performance that does not involve a transition of the game state is performed.

With such a configuration, when a game is played in the second mode in a game in which a performance that does not involve a transition of the game state is performed, processing disadvantageous to the player (first processing) is performed. It is possible to prevent players from having doubts that the game is being carried out, and it is possible to prevent players from losing their desire to play. can do.

In addition, the first aspect includes a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) that can perform a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of a plurality of reels. Stop operations to be performed (for example, sequential press (left → middle → right), scissor strike (left → right → middle or right → left → middle), left first stop (left → right or middle), middle first stop ( The second mode is different from the recommended stop operation. Stop operations (for example, non-recommended stop operations, reverse presses (right → middle → left), irregular presses (middle → right → left or middle → left → right), other than the first stop on the left (first stop is right or middle) ), other than the middle first stop (first stop is on the right or left), or other than the right first stop (first stop is middle or left)).

With such a configuration, even if the stop operation means is operated with a stop operation different from the stop operation recommended in the game in which the first performance is executed (the first game), it will be easier for the player to It is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that a disadvantageous process (first process) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing, and It is possible to prevent players from being too excited.

<<Second embodiment>>
Next, a second embodiment of the slot machine will be described. The explanation will focus on the differences from the slot machine 100 explained using FIGS. 1 to 32, and redundant explanations may be omitted. In addition, the same names as those of the constituent elements explained so far will be described with the same reference numerals used so far.

Figure 39 shows a two-dimensional view of the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the slot machine of the second embodiment.

In the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the push order bell is internally won as described below, the player will either win a 9-coin or 3-coin role, or the role will not be established (missed out). The symbol arrangement of each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) is set up to include these.

FIG. 40(a) is a table summarizing internal winning combinations in the slot machine of the second embodiment.

In the table shown in FIG. 40(a), winning combination information is shown on the left side. Small roles include replay, common bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, and push order bell. Also,
There is also the possibility that either role will not be determined as a winning role.

There are two types of push order bells: Type A and Type B, each of which contains four different patterns (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL). In other words, there are two possible combinations for each type with the same push order. The player's profit is the same for combinations with the same push order, but by having two of each type, the possible outcomes can be varied. Type A alone contains two more patterns (LCR, LRC), and is equipped with a push order bell with six options (Type A) and a push order bell with four options (Type B).

Each winning combination is assigned a consecutive natural number (winning combination number) such as "00" to "30" that corresponds one-to-one with the winning combination.

In addition, the table shown in FIG. 40(a) includes information on small winning combinations in addition to the winning winning combination information on the left side. The information on the small winning combination groups is roughly divided into a pressing order Bell winning combination group and small winnings not included in the pushing order Bell winning combination group. A consecutive number (natural number) is assigned to each small winning combination that is not included in the pressing order Bell winning combination group. In other words, small winning numbers from "01" to "20" are assigned, which correspond one-to-one with the small winnings. Therefore, the small winnings can be identified by the small winning numbers. On the other hand, in the push-order Bell combination group, the entire group is given a group number ("00"), and each Bell combination is not numbered. For this reason, although it is possible to identify types such as push order bell winnings by group numbers, small winning combinations (push order bell_CLR, push order bell_CRL, push order bell_RLC, push order bell_RCL, push order bell_LCR, push order Bell_LRC) cannot be distinguished, and the stop operation mode (pressing order) cannot be distinguished. Therefore, the information on the small winning combination group is information transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400, and is information that cannot specify the order of pressing but allows the type of winning combination to be specified.

Next, the push order bell of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 40(b).

Figure 40(b) is a table showing the push order bell role and the number of coins paid out for each operation.

Hereinafter, the case where the push order bell CLR is internally won will be described in detail. In this combination of push order bell CLR, if the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the left reel 110, the push order is correct. In a CLR operation in which both the first stop reel and the second stop reel are correct, a bell (press order bell B_CLR or push order bell A_CLR) is won, and the maximum number of nine medals is paid out. In a CRL operation in which the first stop reel is a correct answer but the second stop reel is an incorrect answer, a winning combination of 3 cards is entered and 3 medals are paid out. Therefore, if the first stop operation is correct, a number that can display a 9-card winning combination or a 3-card winning combination is displayed, and at least 3 medals are paid out. Depending on whether the second stop operation is correct or not, it is determined whether a 9-card combination or a 3-card combination is displayed. On the other hand, if an LCR operation or an LRC operation is performed, or if an RLC operation or an RCL operation is performed, it means that the answer was incorrect from the first stop operation. In the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, even if the answer is incorrect from the first stop operation, the player can aim for a 3-card combination. If the reels can be stopped at a position where a 3-card winning combination can be drawn, a 3-card winning combination will be won and a payout of 3 cards will be made. On the other hand, if the reels are stopped at a position where the 3-card combination cannot be drawn, the reels will become lopsided and no medals will be paid out.

The same applies whether the internal winning combination is the push order bell RLC, the push order bell RCL, the push order bell LCR, or the push order bell LRC. In either case, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the main control unit 300 controls the stop position of the middle reel 111 to be retracted so that a 9-card winning combination is not established. Therefore, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the stop position of the right reel 112 or the stop position of the left reel 110 determines whether a 3-card combination will be displayed or a Koboshi. That is, there are cases where the displayed winning combination is determined by the reel stop position caused by the second stopping operation, and cases where the displayed winning combination is determined by the reel stopping position caused by the third stopping operation.

Note that the three sheets in the table shown in FIG. 40(b) may be one sheet, or the number of sheets may be two or more and less than nine sheets.

Next, the push order guessing game will be described in detail.

Based on the ON operation of the start lever 135, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the push order guessing game. The push order guessing game is a game that is executed in the AT state. More specifically, the push order guessing game occurs in the bonus zone shown in FIG. 7 (a specialized zone where you can get a big bonus if you answer the press order correctly). Furthermore, even in the AT state, a push order guessing game may occur in the next game or later, as part of when the push order bell is established, to provide an additional chance. Alternatively, the push order guessing game may be a game that is executed in a non-AT state. For example, in the non-AT state, a shift to the AT state may be triggered by a correct answer in the push order in a push order guessing game. Further, as another first example, a push order guessing game may occur in a specific game in a specific game section in the AT state (for example, the last game in a specific 10-game game section). In addition, as another second example, which will be described in detail later, it can also be applied in a predetermined state in which benefits obtained as additional benefits are promoted, and the type of benefits granted is determined by the correct or incorrect answer of the pressing order bell. Ru. Specifically, after obtaining the right to add on, the player is transferred to a predetermined state in which the benefits to be added are determined, and in this predetermined state, the promotion lottery for the benefits is done by rare combinations etc. until the push order bell is won. It will be done. Note that if you win the push order bell, a push order guess will occur, which will be described later, and the benefits to be given will be determined depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect. Further, when the promotion lottery becomes such that the maximum profit can be awarded, the maximum profit may be awarded even if the push order bell is not won.

FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a table selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the push order guessing game, the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added as a game benefit. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 has two types of additional number determination tables for determining the number of games. The table selection table shown in FIG. 41(a) shows the selection rates of two types of additional number determination tables (table 1 and table 2). Table 2 is a more advantageous table for the player. In other words, this is a table where the number of add-on games is likely to be large. If the execution of the push order guessing game is won based on the ON operation of the start lever 135, then it is determined which of the two types of add-on number determining tables is to be used.

FIG. 41(b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the push order award award determination process.

In the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the same process as the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 10 is executed. The pressing order award award determination process is executed in the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area for storing two-choice correct answer determination information. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first sets the two-choice correct answer determination information to 0 (step S1171). In the push order guessing game, the correct answer for the first stop operation is suggested, and if the first stop operation is performed as suggested (if the correct answer for the first stop operation is performed)
, the user is forced to make two choices in the second stop operation. If the selection of these two options is also correct, it means that the press order guessing game (first stop operation and second stop operation) has been answered correctly. The two-choice correct answer determination information is information indicating whether or not the two-choice answer of the second stop operation was correct, but as a result, it is information indicating whether or not the press order guessing game was answered correctly. In the two-choice correct answer determination information, 0 represents an incorrect answer and 1 represents a correct answer. Therefore, in step S1171, incorrect information is set.

In step S1172 following step S1171, it is determined whether the internal winning combination is the push order bell of the small role group, and if it is the push order bell, it is determined that the requested number of coins to be paid out is not 3 (step S1173). When the internal winning combination is the pressing order bell of the small combination group, the required number of coins to be paid out is 9, 3, or 0, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In the case of 9 pieces, it means that you answered correctly in the push order guessing game, and in the case of 0 pieces, the first stop operation was not performed as suggested, and the reels were stopped at a position where you could not draw a 3-piece combination. This is the case if you let it happen. On the other hand, if the requested number of coins is 3, the first stop operation was correct but the second stop operation was incorrect, or the first stop operation was not performed as suggested and was incorrect. However, this is a case where the reel is successfully stopped at a position where a 3-card combination can be drawn. If the requested number of coins to be paid out is 9, the two-choice correct answer determination information is reset to 1 (step S1174), and then the process advances to step S1175. Further, if the requested number of coins to be paid out is 0, it means that the answer to the pressing order guessing game was incorrect, but in this embodiment, after resetting the two-choice correct answer determination information to 1 (step S1174), Proceed to the guessing game. That is, in step S1173, by determining that the requested number of coins to be paid out is not 3, the process treats the case where the number of coins to be paid out is 9 or 0 as a correct answer (result of granting an advantageous benefit). be able to. On the other hand, if the internal winning combination is not the push order bell of the small combination group and if the requested number of coins to be paid out is three, the process proceeds to step S1175 with the two-choice correct answer determination information set to 0.

In step S1175, a benefit is provided according to the two-choice correct answer determination information. As described above, based on the ON operation of the start lever 135, it is determined which of the two types of additional number determination tables is to be used.

Figure 41 (c) shows two types of add-on amount determination tables.

When the two-choice correct answer determination information is 1, the number of games of 100 or more is always added in both the number-of-addition determination table 1 shown on the left and the number-of-addition determination table 2 shown on the right. That is, in the addition number determination table 1, 200 games will be added with a probability of 2%, and 100 games will be added with a remaining probability of 98%. On the other hand, in the addition number determination table 2, 300 games will be added with a probability of 10%, and 200 games will be added with a remaining probability of 90%. In this way, when the two-choice correct answer determination information is 1, the add-on number determining table 2 is more advantageous for the player than the add-on number determining table 1. In other words, it is easier to add a larger number of games in the addition number determination table 2. Note that instead of preparing the two types of tables, the add-on number determination table 1 and the add-on number determination table 2, the number of add-on games may be distributed using one type of add-on number determination table.

When the two-choice correct answer determination information is 0, 50 games are added with a 100% probability in both the addition number determination table 1 shown on the left and the addition number determination table 2 shown on the right.

In the push order guessing game of this embodiment, even if the push order is incorrect, 50 games will always be added. If the specified push order is intentionally ignored and the number of additional games is uniformly 0 or small, it becomes possible for the player to reset the advantageous section or not. . For example, ignore the order of presses and reduce the number of additional games, temporarily end the AT state with the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous period being negative, enter a new AT state without resetting the advantageous period, and enter this new AT state. It becomes possible to use strategies such as increasing the number of balls at once in certain conditions. In response to such a strategy, by providing an additional game even if the player presses the button in the wrong order, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being controlled by the player's intention.

Figure 42 shows the button press guessing game.

When the start lever 135 is operated to turn on and wins the execution lottery of the push order guessing game, the push order guessing game is started, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a suggestion for the first stop operation and a bonus to be given (the number of additional games). ) roulette effect display is performed. FIG. 42A shows a display screen of a push order guessing game for the first stop operation, which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in response to the ON operation of the start lever 135. At the bottom of this display screen, a first stop operation suggestion display 1st is displayed, and the display of "1" in the center suggests that the middle reel 111 is to be stopped as the first stop operation. Furthermore, a roulette effect display Aog is displayed at the top of the display screen, and an effect display indicating whether the number of additional games is 100G or 50G is performed.

If the center reel 111 is stopped for the first time according to the first stop operation suggestion display 1st, the first stop operation is correct, and the second stop operation two-choice display 2st is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(b). In this second stop operation two-choice display 2st, the central "1" disappears, and only the question marks on the left and right remain, indicating that the first stop operation was correct, and that the second stop operation will stop either the left reel 110 or the right reel 112. The roulette effect display Aog at the top of the display screen continues to be displayed. The effect of displaying both the second stop operation two-choice display 2st and the roulette effect display Aog corresponds to the effect that the first stop operation was a stop operation of the center reel 111. Note that the roulette effect display Aog may not be displayed, and only the second stop operation two-choice display 2st may be displayed. When only the 2nd stop operation 2nd option display is displayed, the 2nd stop operation 2nd option display corresponds to the effect that the first stop operation was a stop operation of the center reel 111. Note that the manner in which the display changes (switches) from the 1st suggestion display for the first stop operation to the 2nd option display for the second stop operation may be the effect that corresponds to the first stop operation being correct.

Next, when the right reel 112 is brought to a second stop, the question mark on the right disappears and only the question mark on the left remains at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(c). ing. Note that the roulette effect display Aog above the display screen continues to be displayed.

Finally, when the remaining left reel 110 is stopped (finally stopped), the display on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is switched to a bonus award display, regardless of whether the second stop operation is correct or not. If the award display is performed at the stage when the second stop operation is performed without waiting for the final stop operation, the final stop operation will be disconcerting, so it is performed after the final stop operation is performed. Also, from the viewpoint of reel stop control, it is preferable to display the award after the final stop operation, and if the first stop operation described below is incorrect, the 3-card combination will be stopped or the Kobo Since whether this is the case is determined by the second stop operation or the third stop operation, the awarding of the benefit is displayed after the final stop operation. Next, if the second stop operation is also answered correctly, it means that the push order guessing game is answered correctly, and the 9-card combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(d). , a +100G award display Ag1 is displayed to notify that 100G will be added as a benefit. On the other hand, if the second stop operation is incorrect, it means that the push order guessing game is incorrect, and the 3-card combination is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 42(e), the liquid crystal display 157 A +50G award display Ag2 is displayed on the display screen to notify that 50G will be added as a benefit.

The case where the first stop operation is correct has been explained above, but the case where the left reel 110 is brought to the first stop or the right reel 112 is brought to the first stop without following the first stop operation suggestion display 1st In this case, the first stop operation is incorrect, and the display at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 disappears, as shown in FIG. 42(f). That is, the answer to the press order guessing game is already incorrect, the first stop operation suggestion display 1st disappears, and the second stop operation two-choice display 2st shown in FIG. 42(b) is not displayed either. In addition, failure to follow the 1st suggestion display for the 1st stop operation includes cases such as intentionally ignoring it, making a mistake by mistake, and not understanding the meaning of the 1st suggestion display for the 1st stop operation. . Although the answer to the push order guessing game was incorrect, the roulette effect display Aog is displayed at the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the effect display indicating whether the number of additional games is 100G or 50G is displayed. It is being carried out continuously. The performance that is not displayed in the two-choice display 2st of the second stop operation and is displayed in the roulette performance display Aog corresponds to the performance that corresponds to the first stop operation being a stop operation of the left reel 110 or the right reel 112.

Next, even when the second stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 42(g), the roulette effect display Aog continues to be displayed in the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Meanwhile, the display in the lower part of the display screen remains blank.

Note that if the first stop operation is incorrect, the display at the bottom of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 may not disappear, but a display suggesting a three-card combination may be displayed. Alternatively, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the roulette effect display Aog above the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 may also disappear. In any case, there may be a mode in which the two-choice display 2st of the second stop operation is hidden, which is an effect mode that is updated when the first stop operation suggestion display 1st is not followed, or a three-card combination. , the mode in which the roulette effect display Aog is hidden, and the mode in which the information regarding the stop operation is no longer displayed from the first stop operation suggestion display 1st are such that the first stop operation is the left reel 110 or the right reel 112. In other words, it can be said that the performance corresponds to an incorrect answer to the first stop operation.

Finally, when the remaining left reel 110 is stopped (finally stopped), the display on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is switched to a privilege award display. If the 3-card winning combination is not displayed (in the case of Koboshi), +100G grant display Ag1 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(h). On the other hand, when a 3-card combination is displayed, a +50G award display Ag2 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(i).

In conventional slot machines, if the first stop in a push order guessing game fails, the player loses interest in the subsequent push order and effects, leading to a decrease in interest in the game. On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, even if the first stop operation fails, the push order is determined to be correct by satisfying a specific condition in the subsequent stop operations (see FIG. 42(h)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game even after the second stop. In addition, even if the performance associated with the failure of the first stop operation is performed (see FIG. 42(f)), the performance corresponding to the correct operation can be performed thereafter (see FIG. 42(h)), so that the game can be improved. This can prevent a decline in interest. In addition, even if the player guesses the push order incorrectly, a small bonus is awarded (see FIGS. 42(e) and 42(i)), thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Additionally, as explained above, there is a possibility that a strategy element may be created by intentionally pressing the buttons in the wrong order. For example, by intentionally not getting a benefit by pressing in the wrong order, or by making it possible to get a benefit with a small benefit, you can get a certain number of cards (for example, 150) in one AT state set. If the specification has a relief ability that forces the set to continue in the next AT state if there is no set, there is a high possibility that a certain number of cards will not be satisfied, so it can be a strategy element. Another example would be to intentionally make it impossible to receive benefits by pressing the buttons in the wrong order, or to obtain benefits with small benefits, making it difficult to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section. , it is possible to suppress the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section, so it is a strategy that does not reach the upper limit of the advantageous section during the AT state (instead of reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section during the AT state, it is possible to suppress the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section). method of reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section during the middle of the day and making the new advantageous section more advantageous), or avoiding the reset of the advantageous section by suppressing the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section. A strategy to ensure the number of coins that can be acquired in the AT state (If the advantageous section is reset, you can only acquire 2400 coins, but by maintaining the negative difference in the number of coins, you can acquire 2400 + α number) This may lead to problems, and the performance of the gaming machine can be influenced only by the player's will. On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, even if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order, the pressing order is treated as correct if a specific condition is met (see FIG. 42(h)). It is possible to prevent performance from being influenced by intention as much as possible.

The benefits granted are not limited to the number of games added to the number of games for which the AT status is maintained, but if the maintenance of the AT status is the number of game media acquired (the number of medals acquired), the bonus is the number of additional games. It may be. Alternatively, if the AT state is not assigned based on the number of games but based on the number of sets, the number of sets may be added. Furthermore, if you get the correct answer in the order you press, we will give you a higher AT (this is an AT that is more likely to win the additional zone transition lottery, and the continuation rate of AT status is higher than normal AT) or a specialized zone. If the answer is incorrect, normal AT stock (for example, an addition that increases the AT state continuation rate to about 50%) may be given.

In addition, the bonus is not limited to the AT state, but may be an bonus for a game state (e.g., CZ) that is advantageous to the player. For example, in a slot machine that wins the AT state transition lottery when points are accumulated during the CZ and transitions to the AT state, the push order bonus award determination process shown in FIG. 41(b) may be applied, and the points may be awarded as a bonus. As another example, instead of awarding a bonus according to the number of coins paid out as in FIG. 41(b), points may be awarded based on the determination of the push order bell as the internal winning role, and points may be obtained regardless of the number of coins paid out or the operation mode. This provides a rescue measure for players who make a mistake in the push order during the CZ.

Furthermore, in the above description, the amount of benefits to be given is changed depending on whether the order of pressing is correct or not, but it is also possible to change whether or not to give benefits. For example, a privilege may be given when the pressing order is correct, and a privilege may not be given when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the types of benefits provided may differ depending on whether the order of pressing is correct or incorrect. For example, if the pressing order is correct, a large benefit may be given, and if the pressing order is incorrect, only a small privilege may be given.

In addition, in the pressing order award award determination process shown in FIG. The benefit may be granted only when

Furthermore, in the push order guessing game in FIG. 42, the first stop reel was suggested as "? 1 ?" and the second stop operation was made a selection guess (two-choice display 2st of the second stop operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stop operation may be a multiple choice (two-choice guess for the first stop operation) such as "? ×?". In this case, if the first stop operation is answered correctly, the second stop reel will be suggested.

Further, the push order guessing game may be a 6-choice guessing game or a 4-choice guessing game. In the case of a 6-choice guess, "? ? ?" will be displayed at the first stop, and if the middle reel 111 is the first stop, "?・?" will be displayed at the second stop, and the right reel 112 will be displayed. When the second stop is made, "? ・ ・" is displayed at the third stop. In addition, in the case of a 4-choice guess, "x ? ?" will be displayed at the first stop excluding the left one stop, and if the right reel 112 is at the first stop, "? ? ?" will be displayed at the second stop. " is displayed. In this way, in the case of 6-choice guessing, the 3-choice "?" display will be displayed for the first stop, and the 2-choice "?" display will be displayed for the 2nd stop (3-choice x 2-choice display). 6-choice guesses can be provided, and in the case of 4-choice guesses, a 2-choice "?" display will be displayed for the first stop, and a 2-choice "?" display will be displayed for the second stop (2-choice x 2-choice display). By doing so, you can provide a four-choice guess.

Next, a modification of the push order guessing game will be described. The modified example described here corresponds to the other second example described above.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the push order guessing game.

As explained in the other second example above, the modification here is a mode in which the benefits obtained as additional benefits are promoted. First, based on the ON operation of the start lever 135, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs a lottery to acquire an additional right (a right to be granted a benefit), and if the acquisition lottery is won, it conducts a lottery to select an initial table. .

FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing the initial table selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In this modification, three types of additional number determination tables are prepared in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The initial table selection table shown in FIG. 43(a) shows the selection rate of each of the three types of additional number determination tables (table 1, table 2, and table 3). As the initial table, table 3 is least likely to be selected, and table 1 is most likely to be selected.

FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing the number of additional games in each of Tables 1 to 3.

In Table 1, the number of games added to the number of games maintaining the AT state (additional number of games) is either 50 games or 100 games. At table 2, the number of additional games is either 100 or 200 games. At table 3, the number of additional games is 200 or 300 games. Therefore, table 3 is the most advantageous table for the player. In other words, this is the table where the number of add-on games is likely to be the largest. On the other hand, table 1 is the most disadvantageous table for the player. In other words, this is the table where the number of add-on games is likely to be the least. When table 1 or 2 is selected as the initial table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes a table promotion lottery every time the start lever 135 is turned on. The table promotion lottery corresponds to the promotion lottery for the benefits that can be obtained.

FIG. 43(c) is a diagram showing a table promotion lottery table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

To promote from table 1 to table 2, if you win internally for a rare role (for example, strong cherry), you have a 50% chance of winning the promotion, and if the internal winning result is for a role other than rare, you have a 5% chance of winning the promotion. Become. When promoting from table 2 to table 3, if you win internally for a rare role (for example, strong cherry), you have a 50% chance of winning the promotion, and if the internal winning result is for a role other than rare, you have a 5% chance of winning the promotion. Become. The internal winning results other than rare roles include replays and losses, and also include push order bells. It is possible to prevent a decrease in expectations when winning the bell. However, the push order bell may not be included. Furthermore, if a specific rare combination (for example, watermelon) is internally won, the player may be promoted from table 1 to table 3.

Figure 43 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the modified example of the push order guessing bonus award determination process.

The push order award award determination process shown in FIG. 43(d) is also executed in the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process. However, if table 1 or table 2 is selected, the push order award award determination process shown in FIG. 43(d) is executed in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if table 3 is set, the next game after the game promoted to table 3 by the promotion lottery, the game for which table 3 is selected as the initial table (hereinafter, these games are collectively referred to as table 3) (referred to as a game played).

The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first sets the two-choice correct answer determination information to 0, which represents incorrect answer information (step S117a).

In step S117b, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is the push order bell of the small role group. If it is the push order bell (in the case of Yes), the process proceeds to step S117c, and if it is not the push order bell (No. ), the process advances to step S117d. In the pressing order award award determination process that is started in a game in which the pressing order bell is internally won, the determination result is Yes. On the other hand, in the game following the game in which table 3 is set, if an internal win is made at a position other than the push order bell, the process advances to step S117d.

In step S117c, it is determined that the number of requested payout coins is not three. As shown in FIG. 40(b), the number of requested payout coins is nine if the push sequence guessing game is correct, three if the first stop operation is correct but the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is not performed as suggested and is inaccurate but the reel is successfully stopped in a position where a three-coin combination can be drawn, or zero if the first stop operation is not performed as suggested and is inaccurate, causing the reel to stop in a position where a three-coin combination cannot be drawn. If the number of requested payout coins is nine or zero, proceed to step S117d, and if it is three, proceed to step S117e.

In step S117d, the two-choice correct answer determination information is reset to 1 representing correct answer information, and the process proceeds to step S117e. Therefore, in the game following the game in which table 3 is set, if an internal win is made on a button other than the push order bell, it will be treated as a correct answer in the push order guessing game.

In step S117e, a bonus is awarded according to the two-choice correct answer information according to the table.

FIG. 43(e) is a diagram showing the top-up number determination table 1, FIG. 43(f) is a diagram showing the top-up number determination table 2, and FIG. 43(g) is a diagram showing the top-up number determination table 3. .

In a game where the push order bell is internally won, when the number of additions determination table 1 (Table 1) is set, if the two-choice correct answer determination information is 1, 100 games will be added with a 100% probability, and 2 If the selection correctness determination information is 0, 50 games will be added with a 100% probability.

In a game where the push order bell is internally won, when the number of additions determination table 2 (Table 2) is set, if the two-choice correct answer determination information is 1, 200 games will be added with a 100% probability, and 200 games will be added with a 100% probability. If the selection correctness determination information is 0, 100 games will be added with a 100% probability.

In the state where the additional number determination table 3 (Table 3) is set, if the two-choice correct answer judgment information is 1, the maximum number of games, 300 games, will be added with a 100% probability, and if the two-choice correct answer judgment information is 0. In this case, there is a 100% probability that 200 games will be added. Therefore, in the game following the game in which table 3 is set, if there is an internal win at a position other than the push order bell, 300 games will definitely be added. On the other hand, if it is a bell in the push order, depending on the number of coins to be paid out (correct or incorrect regarding the push order), an additional 300 games or an additional 200 games will be determined.

To summarize this modification described above, after acquiring the right to add on, in a state for determining the actual benefit to be obtained (hereinafter referred to as a waiting state for award determination), the privilege to be obtained is determined based on the correctness of the order in which the buttons are pressed. When the push order bell is selected, a display suggesting the first stop operation such as "? 1 ?" (see FIG. 42(a)) appears. In the privilege determination waiting state, a promotion lottery (table promotion lottery) for the benefits to be obtained is performed until the push order bell is won. This promotion lottery is executed when the rare prize is won internally, and when the promotion lottery is won (upgraded), the number of games of the two options of the roulette effect display Aog shown in FIG. 42(a) is changed. When the add-on number determination table 1 is set, the roulette effect display Aog displays +50G and +100G, which is the same as the roulette effect display Aog shown in FIG. ), the roulette effect display Aog displays +100G and +200G. Furthermore, if you win the promotion lottery (when the benefits are upgraded to the maximum), the roulette effect display Aog will display +200G and +300G.

When the bonus reaches the maximum (when promoted to table 3), in the next game, an additional 300 games or an additional 200 games will be determined depending on the correctness or failure of the operating mode of the push order bell. In addition, if there is an internal win other than the push order bell (for example, even if it is a loss or a rare win is internally won), 300 games will be added, and the push order guessing game will be added. It will be treated the same as the correct answer.

In step S117a, the two-choice correct answer determination information is set to 0, which indicates an incorrect answer. Alternatively, it is possible to first set 1, which indicates a correct answer (step S117a), and if the number of coins requested to be paid out is determined to be three in step S117c, then in step S117d, the two-choice correct answer determination information is reset to 0, which indicates an incorrect answer, and if not, then step S117e is executed with the two-choice correct answer determination information remaining at 1. This is also the same as the pressing order guessing bonus award determination process in FIG. 41(b).

According to the above description,
“A plurality of rotatable reels [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112],
stop operation means that accepts a stop operation to stop each of the plurality of rotating reels [for example, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139];
Internal winning result determining means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S105 shown in FIG. 10] that determines the internal winning result [for example, the winning combination information in the table of FIG. 40(a)];
A stop control means that performs control to stop and display each of the plurality of reels according to the internal winning result by the stop operation [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S111 shown in FIG. 10];
Benefit granting means for granting a certain benefit advantageous to the player [for example, the benefit of adding 100 games to the number of games maintained in the AT state] [for example, the push order shown in FIG. 41(b) or FIG. 43(d) [CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that executes the award award determination based on the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300];
Equipped with
The internal winning result determining means may determine, as the internal winning result, an operating mode winning result [for example, a pressing order combination] that is associated with an operating mode that is advantageous to the player [for example, the order of operation of a stop button]. It is a certain means,
The benefit granting means is a means capable of granting the certain benefit in a certain game in which the operation mode winning result is determined as the internal winning result,
The stop control means is configured to control a first situation in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation manner [for example, the first stop is the middle reel 111] in the certain game [for example, a situation in which the first stop operation is the correct answer]. In this case, the first winning combination [for example, the pressing order Bell B_CLR winning combination] may be stopped and displayed.
The stop control means is configured to control a second situation [e.g., when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [e.g., the first stop is the left reel 110 or the right reel 112] in the certain game. , a situation where the first stop operation is incorrect] is a means of not stopping and displaying the first combination,
The benefit granting means is means for granting the certain benefit when the first situation occurs and the first combination is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 42(d)],
The benefit granting means is a means that grants the certain benefit even if the second situation occurs and the first combination is not stopped and displayed [for example, in the case of Koboshi] [for example, in the case of FIG. 42 ( h)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the certain benefit may be given even if the first combination is not stopped and displayed in the second situation, so it may be possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

Also,
“The certain game is a game in which an effect of an operation mode guessing game [for example, a push order guessing game] is executed,
In the operation mode guessing game, when the first hand [for example, the push order Bell B_CLR hand] is stopped and displayed, the certain privilege [for example, the privilege that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is increased by 100 games] is given. is a game in which the following is given [for example, FIG. 42(d)],
In the operation mode guessing game, when the first combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the certain benefit is given [for example, in the case of Koboshi (FIG. 42(h))], and when the certain privilege is not given. [For example, when a 3-card hand is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42(i))], there is a game.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

With this gaming machine, when the first combination is not displayed, the certain bonus may not be awarded, but the certain bonus may be awarded, which may prevent a decline in interest in the game of guessing the operation mode.

Also,
“The stop control means is configured to stop display the first combination [for example, the combination of push order bell B_CLR] in the first situation [for example, the situation in which the first stop operation is correct] [for example, in FIG. (d)] is a means;
The stop control means is a means that may stop and display the second winning combination [for example, 3-card winning combination] in the first situation [CRL operation of the push order bell B_CLR in FIG. 40(b)],
The stop control means is a means that may stop and display the second winning combination [for example, a 3-card winning combination] in the second situation [for example, a situation where the first stopping operation is incorrect] [Fig. If a 3-card combination is drawn by the LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, and RCL operation of the push order bell B_CLR in (b)],
There is a case where the stop control means does not stop display any combination in the second situation [in the case of Koboshi in the LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, and RCL operation of the pressing order bell B_CLR in FIG. 40(b)] is a means,
The first winning combination is a winning combination (for example, 6 more coins) that provides more gaming value [for example, medals] than the second winning combination;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first situation, the first winning combination may be stopped and displayed, and the second winning combination may be stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game may be improved. be. Furthermore, in the second situation, there are cases in which the second combination is stopped and displayed, and cases in which neither combination is stopped and displayed, so even in the second situation, the interest of the game is improved. There are cases.

If no combination is displayed, it means that the internal winning combination has been missed and no dividend or game value can be obtained.

Also,
“The predetermined operation mode is an operation mode that first stops a certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the middle reel 111],
The operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode refers to an operation mode that first stops a reel different from the certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110 or the right reel 112]. can be,
The stop control means controls the first winning combination [for example, the winning order of push order bell B_CLR] when the predetermined manipulation manipulation is performed in a first manipulation manipulation [for example, the second stop is the left reel 110]. This is the first method to stop display,
The stop control means is configured to control that when the predetermined operation mode is followed by an operation mode different from the first operation mode [for example, the second stop is the right reel 112], the second winning combination [for example, 3 pieces] This is a second method for stopping and displaying the ``rotation''.
The stop control means may be configured such that when a second operation mode (for example, the second stop is performed on the left reel 110) is performed after an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, the first stop is on the right reel 112], A third possibility is a means for stopping and displaying the second winning combination [for example, a three-card winning combination],
The stop control means may perform an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, the first stop is the right reel 112] followed by an operation mode different from the second operation mode [for example, the second stop is the middle reel 112]. 111], neither of the winning combinations will be stopped and displayed [for example, Koboshi].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, even if the operation mode for first stopping is different from the predetermined operation mode, there is a chance to stop and display the second winning combination, and the second winning combination can be stopped. You may be able to obtain gaming value by displaying the information, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
“The privilege granting means may be configured to provide the certain privilege [for example, A] in the first case and the fourth case.
This is a means of granting a benefit of adding 100 games to the number of games that maintain the T state.
The benefit granting means does not grant the certain benefit in the second case and the third case [for example, grants a benefit that adds 50 games to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained] means. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the certain reel is successfully stopped for the first time, in addition to the first case, the certain score is not awarded in the second case. Although it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension, in addition to the third case above, even if the player fails to stop the reel for the first time, the player's sense of tension can be increased. Since there is also the fourth case where the bonus is given, it is possible to make the player look forward to the development after the first stop.

The benefit granting means is a means for granting a second benefit [for example, a benefit that adds 50 games to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained] in the second case and the third case. Good too. Furthermore, the second benefit may be less advantageous or less profitable than the first benefit.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) for accepting a stop operation to stop each of the reels during rotation;
An internal winning result determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S105 shown in FIG. 10) for determining an internal winning result (for example, winning combination information in the table of FIG. 40(a));
a stop control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S111 shown in FIG. 10 ) for controlling the stop display of each of the plurality of reels in response to the stop operation in accordance with the internal winning result;
A presentation means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157),
Equipped with
The internal winning result determination means may determine, as the internal winning result, an operation mode winning result [e.g., a push order role] associated with an operation mode [e.g., an operation order of a stop button] advantageous to a player,
The stop control means is a means for displaying a first combination (e.g., a push order bell B_CLR combination) in a first situation (e.g., a situation in which the first stop operation is correct) in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (e.g., the first stop is performed on the middle reel 111) in a certain game,
The stop control means is a means for not displaying the first winning combination in a second situation (e.g., a situation in which the first stopping operation is incorrect) in which the stopping operation is performed in a manner different from the predetermined operation manner (e.g., the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 110 or the right reel 112) in the certain game,
The presentation means may, in the first situation, execute a first presentation corresponding to the stop operation being performed in the predetermined operation mode [for example, a presentation by displaying both the roulette presentation display Aog and the two-option display 2st of the second stop operation, or displaying the two-option display 2st of the second stop operation] [for example, FIG. 42(b)], and then execute a third presentation [for example, +100G award display Ag1] indicating that a certain benefit advantageous to the player [for example, a benefit in which the number of games to maintain the AT state is increased by 100 games] [for example, FIG. 42(d)],
The presentation means may, in the second situation, perform a second presentation corresponding to the stop operation being performed in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode [for example, a presentation in which the two-option display 2st of the second stop operation is not displayed but the roulette presentation display Aog is displayed, or a presentation in which the display of the two-option display 2st of the second stop operation disappears] [for example, FIG. 42(f)] and then perform the third presentation [for example, FIG. 42(h)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, even if the second situation occurs and the first combination is not stopped and displayed, the third effect may be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. There is.

The presentation means may execute the third presentation without executing the second presentation in the second situation. In other words, the presentation means may execute the third presentation after the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode in the second situation.

Furthermore, in the first situation, the effect means may execute the third effect without executing the first effect. That is, in the first situation, the effect means may execute the third effect after the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode.

Also,
“The effect means is a means for executing an effect of an operation mode guessing game [for example, a push order guessing game shown in FIG. 42],
The operation mode guessing game is a game in which the certain benefit is given when the first combination is stopped and displayed,
In the operation mode guessing game, when the first combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the certain privilege is awarded [for example, FIG. 42(h)], and when the certain privilege is not awarded [for example, FIG. (i)] is a game where
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, when the first winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the certain privilege may not be awarded, but the certain privilege may be awarded. There are cases where it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

Also,
“The effect means is a benefit that is different from the certain benefit [for example, a benefit that adds 100 games to the number of games that maintain the AT state] [for example, a privilege that adds 50 games to the number of games that maintain the AT state] It is a means that may execute a fourth effect [for example, +50G imparting display Ag2] indicating that the
In the first situation [for example, a situation in which the first stop operation is the correct answer], the production means executes the third production after executing the first production [for example, as shown in FIG. 42(d)] ], and when executing the fourth effect [for example, FIG. 42(e)],
In the second situation, the production means may execute the third production or the fourth production after executing the second production;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first situation, the third effect may be executed or the fourth effect may be executed, which may increase the interest in the game. Also, in the second situation, the third effect may be executed or the fourth effect may be executed, which may increase the interest in the game even in the second situation.

The fourth performance may be a performance representing providing a benefit that is more disadvantageous to the player than the certain benefit. Alternatively, the fourth performance may be a performance that represents granting a benefit that is the same type of benefit as the certain benefit, but whose amount is smaller than that of the certain benefit.

Next, a third embodiment of the slot machine will be described. The explanation will focus on the differences from the slot machine 100 explained using FIGS. 1 to 42, and redundant explanations may be omitted. In addition, the same names as those of the constituent elements explained so far will be described with the same reference numerals used so far.

In the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, an AT state is given as an advantageous benefit to the player. In this AT state, by aligning big bonus (BB) symbols or regular bonus (RB) symbols in a pseudo game, the player shifts to the AT state in the main game that is started following the pseudo game. Further, recommended presses are defined for the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and if an irregular press different from the recommended presses is performed, a penalty is given. As a penalty, the executed pseudo game becomes a pseudo game (fake pseudo game) in which neither BB symbols nor RB symbols can be aligned. This penalty is given when an irregular push is made, regardless of the internal winning combination. That is, even if the push order bell is not internally won, a penalty is given if an irregular push is performed.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo game.

A pseudo game is a type of reel presentation that is performed before the reels start spinning in the actual game. In a pseudo game, all reels 110 to 112 start spinning when the start lever is operated. On the other hand, in a pseudo game, each of the corresponding reels 110 to 112 is made to appear to have stopped by a stop operation (also called a pseudo stop). In other words, a pseudo game refers to the ability to pseudo-stop the spinning reels by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139, or a situation in which a pseudo stop can be made. In addition, in a pseudo game, no game value is awarded according to the pseudo-stopped stop mode. Note that the reels may be made to vibrate slightly during the pseudo stop so that they can be distinguished from real symbol stops. Furthermore, a pseudo operation for restarting a pseudo-stopped reel is also called a pseudo start operation. To distinguish it from pseudo games, games that can stop the spinning reels by operating stop buttons 137-139 and award game value according to the stopping state are also called main games.

The upper part (a) of FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the flow of the BB pseudo game.

In (a1), all the reels 110 to 112 have started rotating by operating the start lever. The liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display prompting the player to align bonus symbols (BB symbols or RB symbols). The symbol display corresponding to the left reel and middle reel shows the Blue Seven 1 symbol, but the display corresponding to the right reel shows an alternative display of "Blue Seven 1 symbol/BAR symbol" and then stops. By not displaying the symbols definitively, the player is given a sense of expectation as to whether the symbol is BB or RB. In addition, in the display of "Blue Seven 1 symbol/BAR symbol", both the Blue Seven 1 symbol and the BAR symbol are displayed in a smaller size than the symbol display corresponding to the left reel and middle reel, but the Blue Seven 1 symbol may display the diagonally left part, and the BAR symbol may display the diagonally right part, so that each half area of each symbol may be displayed.

In the following (a2), the first stop operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137, and the blue seven 1 symbol is pseudo-stopped on the left reel 110.

In the following (a3), a second stop operation is performed by pressing the middle stop button 138, and the blue seven 1 symbol is also pseudo-stopped on the middle reel 111.

In the next step (a4), the right stop button 139 is pressed to perform a third stop operation, and the blue seven-one symbol is pseudo-stopped on the right reel 112.

As a result, the BB symbols are aligned, and the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in (a5) displays a BB introduction effect indicating that the big bonus (BB) has been acquired.

The lower part (b) of FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the flow of the RB pseudo game.

In (b1), all the reels 110 to 112 have started rotating by operating the start lever. Similar to (a1), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display prompting the player to align the bonus symbols (BB symbols or RB symbols).

In the following (b2), the first stop operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137, and the blue seven 1 symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel 110.

In the following (b3), a second stop operation is performed by pressing the middle stop button 138, and the blue seven 1 symbol is also stopped and displayed on the middle reel 111.

In the following (b4), a third stop operation is performed by pressing the right stop button 139, and the BAR symbol is stopped and displayed on the right reel 112.

As a result, the BB symbols are aligned, and the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in (a5) displays an RB introduction effect indicating that a regular bonus (RB) has been obtained.

Following the pseudo-game described above, when a start lever operation (the start lever operation here is referred to as a pseudo-start operation) is performed, the main game is started. If the BB symbols or RB symbols can be aligned in the pseudo game, the game shifts to the AT state in response to the start lever operation that triggered the start of the main game.

In the example shown in Figure 44, the RB and BB symbols are aligned on the middle winning line, but even if the RB and BB symbols are aligned on the upper winning line, the lower winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line. good.

FIG. 45 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the slot machine of the third embodiment.

The blue 72 symbol does not exist in the symbols of the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment.

The symbol arrangement of the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment differs from that shown in FIG. 5 in that a "blank symbol" is placed in the number 18 frame of the left reel 110, a "blue seven 1 symbol" is placed in the number 16 frame of the right reel 112, and a "BAR symbol" is placed in the number 17 frame of the right reel 112.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main controller in the slot machine of the third embodiment.

The processing in step S121 and step S123 is the same as the processing in step S101 and step S103 shown in FIG. 10, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S125, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed.

In step S127, it is determined whether the pseudo game number is not "0". The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area for setting pseudo game numbers. As for the pseudo game number, "0" corresponds to no pseudo game. The pseudo game number is set to "0" at the end of the pseudo game related process (step S128), which will be described later. Further, the pseudo game number may be set to "1" during the benefit granting process (step S143), which will also be described later. The pseudo game number "1" corresponds to a fake pseudo game. Furthermore, the pseudo game number may also be set in a pseudo game reservation (step S147), which will be described later. Other pseudo game numbers include "2" and "3". The pseudo game number "2" corresponds to the RB pseudo game, and the pseudo game number "3" corresponds to the BB pseudo game. If it is determined in step S127 that the pseudo game number is "0" (no pseudo game), the process advances to step S131. On the other hand, if the pseudo game number is not "0" (in the case of a fake pseudo game, an RB pseudo game, or a BB pseudo game), the process proceeds to pseudo game related processing in step S128.

<Pseudo-game related processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo-game related processing in step S128 shown in FIG.

In the pseudo game related process, first, reel stop data corresponding to the pseudo game number is selected (step S1281). That is, when the pseudo game number is "2", the stop data of the RB symbol is selected, when the pseudo game number is "3", the stop data of the BB symbol is selected, and when the pseudo game number is "1", the stop data of the BB symbol is selected. In this case, the stop data other than the bonus symbol, specifically, the blue seven 1 symbol is heard (controls drawing) in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, but the blue seven 1 symbol and the blue seven symbol in the third stop operation. Select stop data that does not stop the BAR symbol (kick-off control).

In step S1282, a pseudo game reel rotation start process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1283, a pseudo game reel stop control process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1284, a pseudo next game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1285, a random delay flag prepared in RAM 308 is set on. The random delay flag is a flag that indicates whether or not to perform a random delay. When the random delay flag is on, the reel rotation starts with a random delay, and when the random delay flag is off, the reel rotation starts as usual. Performs reel rotation start processing.

In step S1286, "0" corresponding to no pseudo game is set in an area prepared in the RAM 308 for setting a pseudo game number. When the execution of step S1286 is completed, the pseudo game related process ends.

<Reel Spin Start Processing for Simulated Game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of the reel spin start process of the pseudo game in step S1282 shown in FIG.

In step S1282a, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1282b, preparations for sending a pseudo game start command to the first sub-control unit 400 are executed.

In step S1282c, the start of rotation of the pseudo game is set. Specifically, the rotation of each reel 110 to 112 is started using the acceleration parameter set in step S1282a.

In step S1282d, it is determined whether the rotational speed of each reel 110-112 is constant. If the rotational speed of each reel 110 to 112 is constant, the process advances to step S1282e, and if not, step S1282d is repeated.

In step S1282e, the operation of each stop button 137 to 139 is enabled. Validation here means validation of a stop operation in a pseudo game, and means that the player can perform a pseudo stop. When the execution of step S1282e is completed, the reel rotation start process of the pseudo game ends.

<Pseudo game reel stop control process>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the flow of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in step S1283 shown in FIG.

In step S1283a, a pseudo game regulation timer is set. The pseudo game regulation timer is a timer that measures the time of one pseudo game. In this embodiment, a pseudo game restriction timer is used to limit the execution time of one pseudo game to a predetermined time TA (specifically, about 50 seconds). In step S1283a, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined time TA is set as an initial value in the pseudo game regulation timer. In the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, the same process as the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed. The timer value corresponding to the predetermined time TA is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1283b, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated. If the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, the process advances to step S1283c; otherwise, the process advances to step S1283g.

In step S1283c, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop buttons 137 to 139 on which the stop operation was performed are pseudo-stopped.

For the first and second stop operations, reel-in control may or may not be performed. For example, a specific symbol may be stopped beyond the reel-in range, or may be stopped with a reel action. Alternatively, reel-in control may not be performed, and the reel may need to be stopped by pressing the reel.

In the third stop operation, if the BB symbol or RB symbol is in the state where the tile is heard, if the push operation is successful (for BB, the blue seven symbol, for RB, the BAR symbol can be stopped within the pull range) In case of BB, the slot machine 100 will stop at the 3rd stop, and the slot machine 100 will print the blue seven symbol in the case of BB, and the blue seven symbol in the case of RB. In this case, special reel control is executed to stop the BAR symbols on the winning line. For example, a special reel control may be executed in which the third stop reel is stopped on the winning line with reel action based on the third stop operation, or the third stop reel is rotated at high speed based on the third stop operation. Special reel control may be executed to cause the reels to move and stop on the winning line. On the other hand, unless the BB symbol or the RB symbol is played, the special reel control described above will not be executed. Alternatively, contrary to the above explanation, a press operation may be requested at the third stop regardless of whether or not the BB symbol or the RB symbol is played.

In step S1283d, preparations are made to transmit a sub-command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an operation on the stop button has been accepted.

In step S1283e, it is determined whether all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped. If all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped, the process advances to step S1283f; otherwise, the process returns to step S1283b.

On the other hand, in step S1283g, it is determined whether the pseudo game regulation timer has timed out, that is, whether a predetermined time TA corresponding to the set timer value has elapsed. If the pseudo game regulation timer times out, the process advances to step S1283h; otherwise, the process returns to step S1283b.

The state in which step S1283h is reached is a state in which a predetermined time TA has elapsed without any operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139, and in step S1283h, all reels 110-112 are pseudo-stopped. In this way, in order to promote the progress of the pseudo game in this embodiment, the pseudo game has a function of automatically pseudo-stopping the reels 110-112 if no stop operation is performed.

In step S1283f, preparations are made to send a sub-command for pseudo game winning determination to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In a pseudo game, when a mode corresponding to BB is pseudo-stopped, or when a mode corresponding to RB is pseudo-stopped, a command corresponding to the pseudo-stopped mode is transmitted. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 can perform control according to the sub-command for pseudo game winning determination, and the BB introduction effect shown in FIG. 44(a5) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The RB introduction effect shown in FIG. 5(b5) may be displayed.

In step S1283i, a pseudo game end timer is set. The pseudo game end timer is a timer that measures the time interval between the pseudo game and the main game, and is used to secure time for executing a predetermined performance (for example, BB introduction performance or RB introduction performance). It is provided. In step S1283i, a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time TC (specifically, about 1 second) is set as an initial value in the pseudo game end timer. The timer value corresponding to the predetermined time TC is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed. Further, in step S1283i, preparations are made to transmit a pseudo game end command indicating that the pseudo game has ended to the first sub-control unit 400. When the execution of step S1283i is completed, the reel stop control process of the pseudo game ends.

<Pseudo next game start process>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo next game start process in step S1284 shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, after the reel stop control process of the pseudo game described using FIG. 49, the game does not immediately proceed to the actual game, but instead performs the process of inserting a coin and accepting a start operation in a pseudo manner. This allows the player to experience a pseudo game that is closer to the actual game. Therefore, the pseudo game of this embodiment broadly includes the start of this pseudo next game.

In step S1284a, preparations are made for transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400 a pseudo next game start command indicating that a pseudo next game start process has been started.

In step S1284b, the MB timer is set. The MB timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo bet operation can be accepted, and for example, a timer value corresponding to 20 seconds is set as an initial value. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, the MB timer is used to limit the operation acceptance time for one pseudo bet operation so that the game can proceed smoothly.

In step S1284c, it is determined whether the MAX bet button 132 has been operated by the player. If the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1284d, and if the operation is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1284e.

In step S1284c, it is determined whether the MB timer has timed out. If the time has not expired, the process returns to step S1284c, and if the time has expired, the process proceeds to step S1284d.

In step S1284d, preparations are made to send a pseudo bet acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the pseudo bet operation has been accepted. Even if the MB timer expires, the pseudo bet acceptance command can be sent, allowing the first sub-control unit 400 to proceed with the presentation processing.

From step S1284f onwards, processing related to the pseudo start operation of the start lever 135 is executed. In step S1284f, preparations are made for transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400 a pseudo lever acceptance wait start command indicating that the pseudo start operation wait has started.

In step S1284g, an SR timer is set. The SR timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo start operation can be accepted, and is set to a timer value corresponding to 20 seconds as an initial value, for example. This timer value is also decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, an SR timer is used to limit the operation reception time for one pseudo start operation, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

In step S1284h, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated by the player. If the operation of the start lever 135 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1284i, and if the operation is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1284j.

In step S1284j, it is determined whether the SR timer has timed out (timed out). If the time has not expired, the process returns to step S1284h, and if the time has expired, the process proceeds to step S1284i.

In step S1284i, preparations are made for transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400 a command to start rotation of the drum during a pseudo game, which indicates that the pseudo start lever operation has been accepted. When the execution of step S1284i is completed, the pseudo next game start process ends.

Although a pseudo-game in which a stop operation is accepted is performed here, an automatic pseudo-stop game in which the reels automatically pseudo-stop may be performed without a stop operation being accepted.

Following the pseudo game-related processing described above with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, in step S131 shown in FIG. 46, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the internal lottery of winning combinations in step S125. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In the subsequent step S133, a reel rotation start process is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

<Reel rotation start process>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the flow of the reel rotation start process in step S133 shown in FIG.

In step S1331, a wait timer of 4.1 seconds is set. This timer is a timer for creating an interval of 4.1 seconds or more between games, and the game interval is limited to 4.1 seconds or more regardless of whether a pseudo game is executed or not. The sense of game progress can be combined with the game only for the main game.

In step S1332, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1333, preparations for sending the main game start command (reel rotation start command) to the first sub-control unit 400 are executed. In addition, in the pseudo game, since preparations for sending the drum rotation start command during the pseudo game are made in the above-mentioned step S1284i, preparations for sending the drum rotation start command in step S1333 are not performed.

In step S1334, 7-segment setting processing is executed. The slot machine 100 of the third embodiment is also provided with a game information display 126 shown in FIG. 1 in which seven segment displays are arranged on the left and right. In this process, display settings regarding the operation navigation are performed on the game information display 126.

In step S1335, it is determined whether the random delay flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to on. The random delay flag is a flag that is set to ON in step S1285 of the pseudo game related process shown in FIG. 47 described above. If this random delay flag is set to on, the process proceeds to random delay rotation start processing (step S1336), which will be described in detail later, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1337.

In step S1337, the acceleration parameters set in step S1332 are used to start spinning reels 110 to 112, and the process proceeds to step S1338.

In step S1338, it is determined whether the rotational speeds of the reels 110 to 112 are constant. If the rotational speed of the reels 110 to 112 is constant, the process advances to step S1339, and if not, step S1338 is repeated.

In step S1339, the operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 are enabled. When the execution of step S1339 is completed, the reel rotation start process ends.

<Random delayed rotation start process>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the flow of random delayed rotation start processing in step S1336 shown in FIG.

In step S1336a, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time TC set in the pseudo game end timer in step S1283i shown in FIG. 49 has elapsed. If the predetermined time TC has elapsed as measured by the pseudo game end timer, the process proceeds to step S1336b, and if not, step S1336a is repeated.

In step S1336b, the left reel 110 starts rotating, and in step S1336c, it is determined whether the left reel 110 has finished accelerating. If the left reel 110 has finished accelerating, the process advances to step S1336d; otherwise, step S1336c is repeated.

In step S1336d, a rotation start timer for the middle reel 111 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control section timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1336e, it is determined whether the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 has timed out, that is, whether the waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer for the middle reel 111 has timed out, the process advances to step S1336f; otherwise, step S1336e is repeated.

In step S1336f, the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Although the middle reel 111 starts rotating in step S1336f, the middle reel 111 is in a pseudo-stop state until it starts rotating.

In step S1336g, it is determined whether the acceleration of the middle reel 111 has ended. If the acceleration of the middle reel 111 has ended, the process advances to step S1336h, otherwise, step S1336g is repeated.

In step S1336h, a rotation start timer for the right reel 112 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 is also decremented each time the timer interrupt process (see step S209 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S1336i, it is determined whether the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, that is, whether a waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, the process advances to step S1336j; otherwise, step S1336i is repeated.

In step S1336j, the right reel 112 starts rotating. Although the right reel 112 starts rotating in step S1336j, the right reel 112 remains in a pseudo-stop state until it starts rotating.

In step S1336k, the random delay flag is set to OFF. When the execution of step S1336k is completed, the random delayed rotation start process ends.

Following the reel rotation start processing described above with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, in step S135 shown in FIG. 46, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S137. In addition, in this step S135, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop button reception command, (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S137, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, that winning combination is displayed. It is determined that the prize has been won. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon has been won. Further, in this step S137, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S139, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S139, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S141, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control for shifting the gaming state (for example, AT state) is performed. Further, in this step S141, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S143, a bonus award lottery is performed.

<Bonus award lottery process>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the flow of the bonus award lottery process in step S143 shown in FIG. 46.

In the bonus lottery process, first, it is determined whether the first stop operation in the previous game was an operation to stop the left reel 110 (step S1431). In other words, it is determined whether the reel stop operation in the previous game was a recommended operation (whether it was not an irregular push). If the current game is a main game that continues from a pseudo game through a reservation game described later, the previous game becomes a reservation game. If the first stop operation in the previous game was an irregular push, the bonus lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it was a recommended operation, it is determined whether the internal winning role in this game (the lottery result in step S125) is a rare role (for example, strong cherry) (step S1432). If it is not a rare role, the bonus lottery process ends. If it is a rare role, "1" corresponding to a fake pseudo game is set in the area for setting the pseudo game number prepared in RAM 308 (step S1433). The setting of the pseudo game number here corresponds to the provisional setting of the pseudo game number that is performed prior to the setting of the pseudo game number in step S1454, which will be described later.

In step S1434 following step S1433, the random number generation circuit 316 (see FIG. 4)
A prize award lottery will be held using random numbers obtained from . Benefit lottery results include loss, regular bonus (RB), and big bonus (BB). When the bonus lottery result is RB, it becomes possible to match the RB symbols in the pseudo game, and when the bonus lottery result is BB, it becomes possible to match the BB symbols in the pseudo game. If the bonus symbols can be aligned as described above, the game shifts to the AT state. Therefore, in the bonus award lottery in step S1434, the AT state transition lottery is performed.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also has an area for storing the bonus lottery result as a bonus type, and in step S1435, the bonus lottery result is stored in this area. The initial value of the benefit type is "0". In the case of a losing award lottery result, the award type remains at its initial value (“0”). On the other hand, "1" is stored as the privilege type in the RB privilege lottery result, and "2" is stored as the privilege type in the BB privilege lottery result. When the execution of step S1435 is completed, the bonus award lottery process ends.

In the bonus award lottery explained above, one condition for awarding the bonus is that the reel stop operation in the previous game is a recommended operation, and another condition is that the rare combination is internally won. There is. Whether or not a rare prize is won internally depends on the result of the game in question, but the recommended operations are the results of the previous game, so players must always perform the recommended operations in order to receive benefits. It turns out that there is.

Following the bonus award lottery, in step S145 shown in FIG. 46, a pseudo game reservation process is executed.

<Pseudo game reservation processing>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo game reservation process in step S145 shown in FIG.

In step S1451, it is determined whether the value stored as the benefit type in the RAM 308 is not "0". As described above, the initial value of the benefit type is "0". Further, the benefit type is the result of the bonus award lottery in step S1434 of the bonus award lottery shown in FIG. 53, and if the bonus award lottery is unsuccessful, the benefit type remains "0". When the award type is "1", it is RB, and when it is "2", it is BB, which is a win that leads to awarding the award (transition to AT state). If the benefit type is "0" (no benefit is granted), the pseudo game reservation process ends. Therefore, if the rare combination is not internally won in the game, execution of the pseudo game is not reserved. Further, even if the benefit type is "0", if step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 has been executed, the pseudo game number is "1" and a fake pseudo game will be executed.

If the benefit type is not "0" (if it is a hit that will lead to the granting of a benefit), the value of the push order number is set in the determination result prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1452). The push order number is a value corresponding to the first stop operation in the game. That is, if the first stop operation in the game is the left stop button 137, "0" is set, if the middle stop button 138 is operated, "1" is set, and the right If the stop button 139 was operated, "2" is set.

In step S1453 following step S1452, it is determined whether or not the determination result is 0. If the determination result is not "0" (if an irregular press is performed), the pseudo game reservation process ends. As a result, even if the recommended push was made in the previous game and the rare combination was internally won in that game, if an irregular push is made in the game, the pseudo game number will be changed to step S1433 shown in FIG. The value set in ``1'' remains as it is, and a fake pseudo game is executed. If the determination result is "0" (the recommended press has been performed), the process advances to step S1454. When the determination in step S1453 is completed, the value of the push order number set in the determination result is cleared.

In step S1454, a pseudo game number is set. In step S1433 of the bonus award lottery shown in FIG. 53 described above, "1" is set as the pseudo game number, but in step S1454, the pseudo game number is reset according to the benefit type. When the benefit type is RB "1", "2" is set as the pseudo game number. When the benefit type is BB "2", "3" is set as the pseudo game number. By executing this step S1454, a pseudo game in the next game is reserved. When the setting of the pseudo game number is completed, the benefit type is returned to the initial value "0". Note that the timing for returning the benefit type to the initial value may be the timing at which the pseudo game is started, or the timing at which the pseudo game ends. When the execution of step S1454 is completed, the pseudo game reservation process ends.

When the pseudo game reservation process ends, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S123 and repeating the above-described process. Note that the various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (see step S211 shown in FIG. 11) in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

Next, an example in which a real game is started from a reserved game through a pseudo game will be explained.

FIG. 55 shows that in a reserved game, the recommended operation is performed while the rare combination has been internally won, and in the next game, a pseudo game is executed and the BB symbol is successfully stopped, and the push order navigation is executed. It is a diagram showing a flow in which a BB game (AT state) is started. In FIG. 55, time progresses from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 55, the number of games (number of games) and the type of game such as a reserved game, a pseudo game, or a real game are shown. Below that, "game progress" includes operations of the start lever 135, such as "start operation," "first stop," "second stop," and "third stop." Below that, the respective states of the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are also shown. Below that, the acceptable states of "Left stop Sw" which is the left stop button 137 sensor, "Medium stop Sw" which is the middle stop button 138 sensor, and "Right stop Sw" which is the right stop button 139 sensor are also shown. has been done. Each Sw enters a receptive state after a start operation, and when it receives a stop operation while in an receptive state, the receptive state ends. Further below, the display contents of the "liquid crystal display device" which is the liquid crystal display device 157 are also shown. Further, the lower part of FIG. 55 shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 and the states of the three reels 110 to 112 at each timing. The matters explained above are the same in FIGS. 56 and 57.

The timing when the start operation is performed is the timing (A1), and the NG-th is started. This NG game corresponds to a reserved game. A reserved game is a game in which a simulated game is reserved for the next game according to the previous game and the operation mode of the stop button of each game and the internal winning combination in the game. Further, the content of the pseudo game (aspects of symbols that can be pseudo-stopped) may also be determined. If you perform the recommended operation in the previous game and win a strong cherry internally in that game, when the reserved game starts, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 will display an exciting effect (so-called anticipation showing a sense of anticipation). direction) will be displayed. It should be noted that even if a strong cherry is not won as an internal winning combination, a false provocation effect may be displayed. In the inciting effect, characters such as "Zawazawa..." are displayed, making the player expect that something might happen. In the reserved game shown in FIG. 55, the recommended push stop operation is performed with the first stop operation being on the left.

In FIG. 55, the timing (A2) is the timing when the third stop is performed in the reserved game, and the cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line downward to the right, and the rare winning combination is won. A red "opportunity" icon EX4 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. The effect in which the red "opportunity" icon EX4 is displayed is a strong effect indicating that there is a high degree of expectation for transition to the AT state. Note that you need to press the cherry to line up the cherry symbols on the winning line, but if you fail to press the cherry, a cherry icon will be displayed instead of the red "opportunity" icon EX4, and you will fail to press the cherry. You will be notified of what has happened. However, even if it is not possible to line up the cherry symbols on the winning line, the subsequent flow of the game will not be different from the case where the cherry symbols are aligned. That is, winning the rare combination internally is a requirement for being able to match the RB symbols and BB symbols in a pseudo game, and winning a prize is not a requirement. Note that even if the eye press fails, the red "opportunity" icon EX4 may be displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling regretful about failing in the push.

When the process advances to the third stop, first, if the recommended operation is performed in the previous game and a strong cherry is internally won in that game, a bonus award lottery is held (step S1434 shown in FIG. 53), and the BB bonus Since it was a lottery result, the benefit type becomes "2". Further, as the recommended push stop operation is performed in this reserved game, the push order number becomes "0" and a pseudo game number is set (step S1454 shown in FIG. 54). In the pseudo game, depending on the pseudo game number, there are cases where the RB symbols pseudo stop, cases where the BB symbols pseudo stop, and fake cases where neither the RB symbols nor the BB symbols pseudo stop. Here, since the benefit type is "2", "3" is set as the pseudo game number.

The timing when the start operation for the N+1th game following the reserved game is performed is timing (A3). In this N+1th game, a pseudo game is started in response to the operation of the start lever 135. Since "3" is set as the pseudo game number, the pseudo game here is a pseudo game in which the BB symbol is pseudo-stopped. The liquid crystal display device 157 displays a message encouraging the player to line up the bonus symbols (BB symbol or RB symbol), and all reels 110 to 112 start spinning. The left stop Swm, center stop Sw, and right stop Sw are all in a state where pseudo acceptance is possible.

In the pseudo game, when a stop operation is performed, the reel on which the stop operation was performed performs a pseudo stop. First, the first stop operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137, and the blue seven 1 symbol is successfully stopped in a pseudo manner on the left reel 110. Next, the second stop operation is performed by pressing the middle stop button 138, and the blue seven 1 symbol is also successfully stopped in a pseudo manner on the middle reel 111. Now, the bonus symbol is in a state where it is heard. Finally, the third stop operation is performed by pressing the right stop button 139, and since "3" is set as the pseudo game number, the blue seven 1 symbol also pseudo stops on the right reel 112. In FIG. 55, the timing (A4) is the timing when the third stop is made in the pseudo game, and the blue seven 1 symbols are aligned on the middle winning line. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a BB introduction effect indicating that a big bonus (BB) has been obtained is displayed.

After the third stop in the pseudo game is performed, a pseudo medal is inserted, and when a pseudo start lever operation is performed or the SR timer times out, the game is pseudo-started. The timing of the pseudo start of the game is the timing of (A5). In the example in FIG. 55, even if the game is pseudo-started, the predetermined time TC set in the pseudo game end timer in step S1283i shown in FIG. 49 has not elapsed, and each of the reels 110 to 112 does not start rotating. When the predetermined time TC has elapsed, the left reel 110 starts rotating first, but the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 do not start rotating due to the random delay rotation start process. Eventually, the center reel 111 starts rotating, and finally the right reel 112 starts rotating.
The timing when the right reel 112 starts to rotate is the timing of (A6), and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the display of the BB during the performance. The display of the BB during the performance includes the display of "BB" indicating that the big bonus is being performed, and the display of the remaining number of coins (here, 300 coins) based on the net increase that can be obtained during the big bonus. In addition, the game is shifted to the AT state with the start of the game, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the push order navigation of the stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, here, it is displayed that the center reel 111 is stopped first, the right reel 112 is stopped second, and the left reel 110 is stopped third. Note that, when each reel starts to rotate by the random delay rotation start process at the timing of (A6), the configuration is configured so that the stop operation of each reel can be accepted in sequence. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the stop operation of all stop switches can be accepted after the last reel starts to rotate by the random delay rotation start process. In addition, although the BB effect is started at the timing of (A6), the BB effect may be started at the timing of (A5) when a pseudo start operation is performed. The same applies to Figs. 56 and 57.

Figure 56 shows that in a reserved game, the rare combination was internally won, but an irregular operation was performed, and in the next game, a pseudo game was executed, but it was a fake pseudo game and did not shift to the AT state. It is a diagram showing the flow of starting the main game. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 55 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The timing at which the NG start operation is performed is the timing (B1), and the reserved game is started. In this example as well, the player performs the recommended operation in the previous game, wins the strong cherry internally in the game, and displays an inciting effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Furthermore, "1" is set as the pseudo game number due to the recommended operation in the previous game and the strong cherry internal win in the game (step S1433 shown in FIG. 53). Further, a bonus lottery is conducted (step S1434 shown in FIG. 53), and since the bonus lottery result is BB, the bonus type becomes "2".

In the reserved game shown in FIG. 56, an irregular push stop operation is performed in which the first stop operation is to the right.

The timing at which the third stop is made in the reserved game is the timing (B2), and the cherry symbols are not aligned on the winning line, and the winning numbers (losing numbers) are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that even if an attempt was made to press the cherry design, it would be impossible due to irregular pressing. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 at the timing (B2), an icon EX5 of a fallen samurai wearing a green hakama is displayed. This effect in which the icon EX5 of a fallen samurai wearing a green hakama is displayed is a weak effect indicating that the expectation level of transition to the AT state is low.

When the process advances to the third stop, because the irregular press stop operation was performed, the determination in step S1453 shown in FIG. 54 becomes No, and the pseudo game number remains at "1" set in step S1433. This results in a fake game being played.

The timing when the N+1G start operation is performed is the timing (B3), and the fake pseudo game is started. The liquid crystal display device 157 displays a display prompting the player to line up the bonus symbols (BB symbols or RB symbols) even in a fake pseudo game. All the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and all of the left stop Swm, middle stop Sw, and right stop Sw become pseudo-acceptable.

First, the first stop operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137, and the blue seven 1 symbol is successfully stopped in a pseudo manner on the left reel 110. Next, press the middle stop button 13
By pressing 8, a second stop operation is performed, and the blue seven 1 symbol is also successfully stopped in a pseudo manner on the middle reel 111. With this, the bonus symbols are in a state where they are played, but in the third stop operation by pressing the right stop button 139, the replay symbols are pseudo-stopped and the bonus symbols fail to align. The timing of (B4) is the timing at which the third stop is made in the pseudo game, and the pseudo-stops include "Blue Seven 1 Symbol" - "Blue Seven 1 Symbol" - "Replay Symbol" on the middle winning line. Since it is a fake pseudo-game, it is impossible to match the bonus symbols, and symbols other than the blue seven-one symbol or the BAR symbol always pseudo-stop. The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is still displaying a message urging the players to align the bonus symbols, but it is grayed out, suggesting that the bonus symbols were not aligned and the result was disappointing.

After the third stop in the pseudo game is performed, the pseudo game number is set to "0" corresponding to no pseudo game (step S1286 shown in FIG. 47). In addition, a pseudo medal is inserted, and then when a pseudo start lever operation is performed or the SR timer times out, the actual game is pseudo-started. The timing of the pseudo start of the actual game is timing (B5). In the example in FIG. 56, the random delay spin start process is also performed, and when a predetermined time TC has elapsed, first the left reel 110 starts spinning, then the center reel 111 starts spinning, and finally the right reel 112 starts spinning. The timing when the right reel 112 starts spinning is timing (B6), and the background image of the normal effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that it may be configured so that the background image of the normal effect is displayed at timing (B5) when the pseudo start operation is performed.

FIG. 57 is a continuation from FIG. 56, in which a recommended operation is performed in the main game following the pseudo game, and in the second reserved game, a pseudo game with pseudo game number 3 is reserved, and the BB symbol is played in that pseudo game. It is a diagram showing a flow of starting a BB game (AT state) in which the pseudo-stop is successful and the push order navigation is executed.

The game state in which the N+1G main game is being played is a non-AT state, the push order navigation is not executed, and the left first stop operation is recommended. Here, the first left stop operation is performed as recommended, and the process proceeds to the third stop operation. When the game advances to the third stop, step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 is not executed and the pseudo game number remains "0" because an irregular press was performed in the previous game (NG shown in FIG. 56). , the bonus award lottery in step S1434 is also not performed, and the award type remains "2" based on the NG award award lottery.

In the N+2G, the pseudo game number is "0", so no pseudo game is played, and the N+2G game corresponds to the second reservation game. The timing when the start operation for the N+2G is performed is the timing of (B7). In the second reservation game, the strong cherry is not an internal winner, but even if the second reservation game is started, a provocative effect is executed in which a text display such as "buzzing..." is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. In the second reservation game, the recommended stop operation with the first stop operation being the left is performed, and the third stop operation is performed. In FIG. 57, the timing of (B8) is the timing when the third stop is performed in the second reservation game. In the stop display of the three reels 110 to 112 in (B8), the stop display corresponds to the winning role in the N+2G, but in FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, "ANY" is written to indicate that it is any stop display (the same is true in FIG. 58). Furthermore, even though the cherry symbols were not aligned, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displayed a strong effect of a red "opportunity" icon EX4, which indicates a high expectation of transitioning to the AT state.

Also, when the game proceeds to the third stop, the recommended push was performed in the previous game (the main game at the N+1th game), but the strong cherry was not internally won, so here again, step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 is not executed, the pseudo game number remains "0", the bonus lottery at step S1434 is not performed, and the bonus type is maintained as "2" based on the NG bonus lottery. If the strong cherry is internally won at the N+2th game, the internal win may be valid while the bonus lottery at the N+2th game is not performed, and the result of the NG bonus lottery may be maintained. Also, in the second reserved game, the push order number becomes "0" due to the recommended push stop operation, and the pseudo game number is set (step S1454 shown in FIG. 54). Since the bonus type is maintained as "2", the pseudo game number is set to "3".

The timing when the start operation for the N+3G following the second reserved game is performed is timing (B9). The N+3G game corresponds to the second pseudo game. The second pseudo game is a pseudo game in which the BB symbol is pseudo-stopped because "3" is set as the pseudo game number. A display encouraging the player to line up the bonus symbols (BB symbol or RB symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and all reels 110 to 112 start spinning. The left stop Swm, center stop Sw, and right stop Sw are all in a state where pseudo acceptance is possible.

First, the first stop operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137, and the blue seven 1 symbol is successfully stopped in a pseudo manner on the left reel 110. Next, by pressing the middle stop button 138, a second stop operation is performed, and the blue seven 1 symbol on the middle reel 111 is also successfully stopped in a pseudo manner. Now, the bonus symbol is in a state where it is heard. Finally, the third stop operation is performed by pressing the right stop button 139, and since "3" is set as the pseudo game number, the blue seven 1 symbol also pseudo stops on the right reel 112. In FIG. 57, the timing (B10) is the timing when the third stop is performed in the pseudo game, and the blue seven 1 symbols are aligned on the middle winning line. On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, a BB introduction effect indicating that a big bonus (BB) has been obtained is displayed.

After the third stop in the second pseudo game, a pseudo medal is inserted, and when the pseudo start lever is operated or the SR timer times out, the actual game is pseudo-started. The pseudo start of the actual game occurs at the timing of (B11), and the game transitions to the AT state. In this actual game, a random delay spin start process is also performed, and when a predetermined time TC has elapsed, first the left reel 110 starts spinning, then the middle reel 111 starts spinning, and finally the right reel 112 starts spinning. The timing when the right reel 112 starts spinning is the timing of (B12), and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the BB performance and the push order navigation.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the recommended push is performed and when the irregular push is performed in the reserved game.

In FIG. 58(a), each reel 110 to 112 is rotating while an excitement effect (expectation effect) is being performed in a reserved game.

The example shown on the left side is an example where the recommended push stop operation with the first stop operation being to the left is performed, and the examples shown in Fig. 58(b) to (e) are the same as the example shown in Fig. 55. That is, in Fig. 58(b), the recommended push stop operation with the first stop operation being to the left is performed, and the cherry symbols are aligned on the winning lines of the three reels 110 to 112 that have stopped spinning. Also, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red "opportunity" icon EX4, which is a strong effect indicating a high expectation of transition to the AT state. In this reservation game, a bonus lottery is performed, and since the bonus lottery result is BB, the bonus type becomes "2", "3" is set as the pseudo game number, and the execution of the pseudo game in which the BB symbol is pseudo-stopped is reserved. In the subsequent pseudo game in which the BB symbol is pseudo-stopped, the BB symbol is successfully pseudo-stopped (Fig. 58(d)).
In this BB game, the player performs a stop operation according to the push order navigation, resulting in a bell win and receiving a payout of nine coins.

Subsequently, in FIG. 58(f), the start lever is operated, the main game is started in the AT state, and push order navigation is performed in this game as well. Furthermore, since 9 coins were paid out but 3 coins were inserted, the remaining number of coins that can be obtained during BB on a net increase basis is 294 coins. Follow the push order navigation and perform the stop operation to win the bell again. Thereafter, games in the AT state are repeatedly played.

On the other hand, the example shown on the right side is an example where an irregular push stop operation is performed with the first stop operation being other than left, and the examples shown in Figures 58(g) to 58(j) are the same as the examples shown in Figures 56 to 57. That is, in Figure 58(g), an irregular push stop operation is performed with the first stop operation being other than left, and one of the symbols is pseudo-stopped on the winning line of the three reels 110 to 112 that have stopped spinning. Also, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the icon EX5 of a samurai wearing green hakama who has fallen down, which is a weak effect indicating that the expectation of transitioning to the AT state is low. A bonus lottery is also performed for this reservation game, and since the bonus lottery result was BB, the bonus type becomes "2". On the other hand, as a result of the irregular button press, the button sequence number becomes "1" or "2", the setting of the pseudo game number (step S1454 shown in FIG. 54) is not executed, the pseudo game number becomes "1" set in step S1433 shown in FIG. 53, and the execution of a fake pseudo game is reserved. In the following fake pseudo game, "Blue Seven 1 symbol"-"Blue Seven 1 symbol"-"Replay symbol" are pseudo-stopped. As the pseudo game ends, the pseudo game number is set to "0" corresponding to no pseudo game (step S1286 shown in FIG. 47). Then, the actual game starts. In this actual game, one of the symbols is also stopped and displayed (FIG. 58(j)).

In the subsequent second reserved play (Fig. 58(k)), as in the example shown in Fig. 57, the first stop operation is performed by pressing the recommended button to the left, and if it proceeds to the third stop operation, any combination of symbols will be displayed, not limited to cherry symbols. Note that even if the internal winning combination in the second reserved play is something other than a rare symbol, the bonus type remains "2", so a strong red "opportunity" icon EX4 is displayed, indicating a high expectation of transitioning to the AT state. After that, as the start lever 135 is operated, the same process will occur as in the examples from Fig. 58(c) onwards.

On the other hand, even in the second reserved game, if an irregular press stop operation is performed in which the first stop operation is other than the left, the press order number becomes "1" or "2", and the pseudo game number is set (as shown in Figure 54). Step S1454) shown is not executed. As described above, the pseudo game number is set to "0" which corresponds to no pseudo game since the pseudo game has ended. Therefore, the pseudo game will not be executed, and the main game (reserved game) will be repeated with the benefit type maintained at "2" until the recommended stop operation with the first stop operation on the left is performed. . That is, the reserved game is repeated without any pseudo game in between until the execution of the pseudo game that pseudo-stops the BB symbols is reserved.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the flow of a game when an irregular push is performed every time a reserved game is played.

FIG. 59(a) shown in the upper part is a diagram showing an example in which reserved games are repeated without intervening pseudo games.

When an irregular push is performed in the first reserved game (NG), a fake pseudo game (a pseudo game in which the bonus symbols (B symbols) cannot be aligned) is reserved, and the N+1G game including that pseudo game is played. will be held. Even if an irregular push is made again in the second reserved game (N+2G), the fake pseudo game is not reserved, and the main game (N+3G), which is the third reserved game, is played. If an irregular push is performed in the third reserved game (N+3G), the main game (N+4G), which is the fourth reserved game, is played. Then, when the recommended push is performed in the fourth reserved game (N+4G), a BB pseudo game (a pseudo game in which bonus symbols can be aligned) is reserved, and the N+5G game including that pseudo game is played. be exposed. When the bonus symbols are aligned in this N+5G-th game, the AT state is entered from the N+5G-th main game and the push order navigation is started.

Furthermore, as shown by the two-dot chain arrow in FIG. 58, the fake pseudo game (FIG. 58 (h) and ( i)) and then playing the reserved game (FIG. 58(k)) may be repeated.

FIG. 59(b) shown in the lower part is a diagram showing an example in which playing a fake pseudo game and then playing a reserved game is repeated.

When an irregular push is performed in the first reserved game (NG game), a fake pseudo game is reserved, and the N+1G game including the pseudo game is played. When the irregular push is performed again in the second reserved game (N+2Gth), a fake pseudo game is reserved, and the N+3Gth game including the pseudo game is played. When an irregular push is performed in the third reserved game (N+4Gth), a fake pseudo game is reserved, and the N+5Gth game including the pseudo game is played. Then, when the recommended push is performed in the fourth reserved game (N+6Gth), a pseudo game that pseudo-stops the BB symbols is reserved, and the N+7Gth game including the pseudo game is played. When the bonus symbols are aligned in this N+7G-th game, the AT state is entered from the N+7G-th main game and the push order navigation is started.

In the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment described above, a pseudo game occurs in the next start operation of the game in which the trigger combination (rare combination) of the pseudo game is won. Furthermore, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, if an irregular push is made regardless of the internal winning combination, a penalty will be imposed. For this reason, there is a possibility that a penalty will be incurred even in a game in which the player wins as a trigger for a pseudo game. Even though a penalty has occurred, it would be unnatural if the bonus symbols line up in a pseudo game related to the game in which the penalty occurred. Even in conventional slot machines, while warning messages are uniformly displayed when a penalty occurs, there are reel effects (reel actions) that increase the player's expectations in the game where the penalty occurs and the game immediately after. However, even though a warning message is displayed, a reel effect that heightens expectations occurs, and the display and reel movement are not consistent. Further, even if a reel action that increases expectations occurs after viewing the warning message, the player may feel disappointed that ``this reel action is meaningless because it may be a penalty.'' For these reasons, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, a pseudo game in which bonus symbols can be arranged is provided as one condition of performing the recommended operation (left 1st operation) in a game that wins a rare combination. Set. Then, when the bonus symbols are aligned in the pseudo game, the AT state is started as it is. As a result, it is possible to eliminate inconsistency with the reel performance under the circumstances in which penalty-related controls and displays are performed.

Also, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the slot machine 100 is operated in a predetermined operation mode (recommended press), the effect that was scheduled to be executed (fake pseudo game) is changed to another effect (BB or RB pseudo game). (Step S1454 shown in FIG. 54). In addition, if an operation is performed in an operation mode (irregular press) that is different from the prescribed operation mode, the highly anticipated performance (BB or RB pseudo-game) that was scheduled to be executed will be replaced with a low-expectation performance (fake pseudo-game). ). That is, if the performance that was scheduled to be performed is a performance that suggests a high level of expectation, and a penalty act is performed, the performance may be replaced with a performance that suggests a low level of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a highly anticipated performance from being performed even though disadvantageous processing is being performed.

Further, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, when an irregular press is made on the NG number, which is the first reserved game, a fake pseudo game is performed on the subsequent N+1G number, but the pseudo game itself is not performed ( The content of the reservation for the pseudo game may be discarded), and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that the pseudo game is played despite pressing an irregular key. In this case, by performing the recommended operation in the subsequent reserved game, execution of the pseudo game of the corresponding benefit will be reserved.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, if you win a rare combination in a reserved game and perform a recommended operation, but you do not win the bonus in the bonus lottery, a fake pseudo game is reserved and the next Although the fake pseudo-game is executed by the start operation, if the bonus is not won in the bonus lottery, it may be determined not to execute the fake pseudo-game. In other words, if you do not win a benefit, you may perform a fake pseudo-game all the time, or you may perform a fake pseudo-game at a predetermined rate to create a sense of anticipation when a pseudo-game occurs. Good too.

Further, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, a fake pseudo game is set in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the type of pseudo game (fake, BB, RB pseudo game) is determined according to the result of the bonus lottery. either) may be determined. Specifically, the process in S1433 of FIG. 53 may be omitted, and the type of pseudo game may be determined in S1454 of FIG. 54 based on the benefit type (result of the bonus award lottery in step S1434 of FIG. 53). . If an irregular push is made in the game, a fake pseudo game may be selected, or no pseudo game may be executed. If the benefit type is 0 (loss), a fake pseudo game may be selected, or no pseudo game may be executed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, when an irregular push is performed, a penalty process is performed regardless of the internal winning role. The penalty here means that a process that favors the player is not performed, and specifically, the pseudo game number setting process of step S1454 shown in FIG. 47 is not performed, and the pseudo game number set to "1" in step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 is used. The penalty may be not updating the ceiling G number, or not performing an AT lottery, etc. In addition, if a role with a high expectation such as a rare role is internally won in the next game after the irregular push, in order to prevent the player from feeling disappointed after the penalty, a push order navigation that does not display the role with a high expectation may be displayed. Furthermore, when the game number counter is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, when an irregular push is performed, the game number counter may not advance in the game, or may not advance in the next game, or the value of the game number counter advanced by the operation of the start lever 135 in the game may return to the original value at the third stop in the game. On the other hand, penalty processing may be performed if the internal winning combination in a game in which irregular pushes are performed is the push order bell.

Further, the pseudo game in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment is a type of spinning drum performance. In addition, regarding the pseudo game, the number of sliding pieces and reel control may use the same data as the main game. For example, the reel operation may be such that the bonus symbols do not line up unless the eye press operation is performed (if the player does not aim). Further, if the user makes a mistake in the eye-pressing operation in a pseudo game in which the bonus symbols can be aligned, the pseudo game in which the bonus symbols can be aligned may be performed again. In addition, this is a difficult specification for people who are not good at eye-pressing, so if you miss the eye-pressing the specified number of times (for example, 3 times), you will receive a bonus symbol in the next pseudo game even if you miss the eye-pressing. It may be arranged to be arranged automatically, or the AT state may be started without a pseudo game in the next game. In addition, on the contrary, in the pseudo game, the number of sliding pieces and reel control may be different from the real game. For example, the reel control may be such that 10 frames slide, or the reel control may be such that the bonus symbols are aligned without the need for eye-pressing (or aiming). In addition, when skating for more than 5 frames, it may be stopped with a rotation performance such as high-speed rotation.

Furthermore, instead of the pseudo game in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, a reel action in which symbols are automatically aligned may be performed. For example, when the start lever 135 is operated (start operation), the symbols (for example, bonus symbols) are automatically aligned (temporary stop), and then, after a random delay, the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 become effective. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, even in a fake pseudo-game, a display prompting you to align the bonus symbols is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (B3), and as shown in FIG. 56 (B4). In this way, the bonus symbol makes a pseudo-stop as if the tile has been heard, but if such a flashy effect is performed next to a penalty due to an irregular press, it may look unnatural. Instead of displaying a display that urges players to align the symbols), a pseudo game may be used to pseudo-stop the losing bets. As a result, it may be possible to almost eliminate the appearance of discomfort.

Further, when an irregular push stop operation is performed in which the first stop operation is other than the left, an operation recommendation display REC such as "Left push is recommended" as shown in FIG. 16 or the like may be displayed.

According to the above description,
“Operating means operated by the player [for example, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
a reel that stops rotating by a stop operation of the operating means [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112];
A control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that can execute control regarding the provision of benefits [for example, AT status] advantageous to the player;
A reservation means for reserving the execution of an event [for example, a pseudo game] [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the bonus award lottery shown in FIG. 53 and the pseudo game reservation process shown in FIG. 54],
A game machine comprising:
The control means may be configured to control the control means to perform a first operation regarding the granting of the benefit when the stopping operation is performed in a recommended operation mode (hereinafter referred to as "recommended operation mode") [for example, an operation mode in which the left reel 110 is first stopped]. means for executing control [for example, control to transition to the AT state in the main game due to the pseudo start after the pseudo game ends],
The control means provides the benefit when the stopping operation is performed in an irregular operation mode that is different from the recommended operation mode [for example, an operation mode that first stops the middle reel 111 or an operation mode that first stops the right reel 112]. A means that may execute a second control that is more disadvantageous than the first control in terms of granting [for example, control to leave the gaming state as it is in the main game due to the pseudo start after the pseudo game ends],
The reservation means meets a first condition including that the stop operation is performed in the recommended operation mode [for example, the benefit type is "1" or "2" and the push order number is "0"] means for reserving execution of a first event [for example, a pseudo-game that pseudo-stops the RB symbol or a pseudo-game that pseudo-stops the BB symbol] when the condition] is satisfied;
The reservation means is configured to meet a second condition including that the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode [for example, the benefit type is "1" or "2" and the pressing order number is "1" or " 2) is a means for reserving the execution of a second event [for example, a fake pseudo game] when the condition ``2'' is satisfied;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the execution of an event is reserved according to the operation mode, and processing according to the operation mode is performed.

Further, when the stop operation is performed in the recommended operation mode in a certain game [for example, a reserved game in which the award type is "1" or "2" in the award lottery], the first event [for example, the RB symbol A pseudo game that pseudo-stops the BB symbol or a pseudo game that pseudo-stops the BB symbol] is reserved for execution [for example, the pseudo game number "2" or "3" is set in step S1454 shown in FIG. 54], and the above-mentioned or In a game where the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode, execution of a second event [for example, a fake pseudo game] is reserved [for example, when the pseudo game number setting in step S1454 shown in FIG. 54 is executed. First, the pseudo game number set to "1" in step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 is used].

Also,
“The first event is an event indicating that the benefit is awarded [for example, an event where the bonus symbols are aligned on the winning line],
The second event is an event indicating that the benefit is not awarded [for example, an event where the bonus symbols are not aligned with the winning line],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, when the second control that is more disadvantageous than the first control is executed, the inconsistency that the first event indicating that the benefit is granted occurs is avoided. It is possible to prevent this and provide a natural game progression.

The second event is also an event related to the benefit.

Also,
“The first event is a movement performance of the reels that indicates that the benefit is awarded [for example, a BB or RB pseudo game that can be pseudo-stopped when the bonus symbols line up on the winning line],
The second event is a motion effect of the reels that indicates that the benefit is not awarded [for example, a fake pseudo-game in which the bonus symbols do not line up on the winning line and pseudo-stops];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this gaming machine, the reel action that the player focuses on will be an action presentation that indicates that the bonus will not be awarded if the second control, which is less favorable than the first control, is executed, providing a more natural progression of the game.

The first event may be a pseudo-game that can accept the stop operation, or an automatic pseudo-stop game that does not accept the stop operation.

Also,
``Until the execution of the first event is reserved, a game in which the execution of the first event can be reserved [for example, a reserved game in which the bonus type is "1" or "2" in the bonus lottery] is executed repeatedly [for example, the repetition of FIG. 58(k)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine can provide the player with an opportunity to execute the first event, and can prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged.

Also,
“The reservation means reserves the execution of one of the first event and the second event [for example, a fake pseudo game], and reserves the reservation for the execution of the one event. , in accordance with the actual operation mode of the stop operation [for example, press order number], and when maintaining [for example, when an irregular press is performed (when the press order number is "1" or "2")] There is a means for changing the reservation for execution of the other of the first event and the second event [e.g., BB or RB pseudo game] [e.g., step S1454 shown in FIG. 54] is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By reserving the execution of one of the events first and then responding later according to the operation mode, the processing load may be reduced and processing speed may be improved.

Also,
``Equipped with display means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157],
The display means is a means for displaying a display recommending a stop operation according to the recommended operation mode [for example, operation recommended display REC] when the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode in a certain game,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player can be made aware of the operation mode that will not put him or her at a disadvantage.

Also,
“The first event is an operation performance of the reels [for example, a pseudo game] in which a first symbol [for example, a bonus symbol (BB symbol or RB symbol)] is aligned;
The second event is an operation performance of the reels in a manner in which the first symbols are not aligned [for example, a pseudo game];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The alignment of the symbols on the reels is easily understood by the player as an event that leads to the granting of benefits. According to this gaming machine, when the second control, which is more disadvantageous than the first control, is executed, the reel operation effect is performed in such a manner that the first symbols are not aligned. This is consistent with the case where the second control is executed, and a natural game progression can be provided.

In addition,
"The first event is an event that, when occurring, causes a transition to the first gaming state,
The second event is an event that, if it occurs, will not result in a transition to the first gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The second event is a reel performance different from the first event,
The first event is a reel performance that is executed when the bonus is awarded,
The second event is a reel performance that is executed when the bonus is not granted.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

According to this gaming machine, when the second control, which is more disadvantageous than the first control, is executed, it is possible to prevent the spinning performance that leads to awarding of benefits from being performed.

According to the above description,
“Operating means operated by the player [for example, left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
a reel that stops rotating by a stop operation of the operating means [for example, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112];
A control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that can execute control regarding the provision of benefits [for example, AT status] advantageous to the player;
A game machine comprising:
The control means may be configured to control the control means to perform a first operation regarding the granting of the benefit when the stopping operation is performed in a recommended operation mode (hereinafter referred to as "recommended operation mode") [for example, an operation mode in which the left reel 110 is first stopped]. means for executing control [for example, control to transition to the AT state in the main game due to the pseudo start after the pseudo game ends],
The control means provides the benefit when the stopping operation is performed in an irregular operation mode that is different from the recommended operation mode [for example, an operation mode that first stops the middle reel 111 or an operation mode that first stops the right reel 112]. A means that may execute a second control that is more disadvantageous than the first control in terms of granting [for example, control to leave the gaming state as it is in the main game due to the pseudo start after the pseudo game ends],
When the stop operation is performed in the recommended operation mode in a certain game [for example, a reserved game in which the award type is "1" or "2" in the award lottery], the first event [for example, when the RB symbol is The execution of the pseudo-game to stop or the pseudo-game to pseudo-stop the BB symbols] is reserved [for example, the pseudo-game number "2" or "3" is set in step S1454 shown in FIG. 54],
If the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode in the certain game, the execution of the first event is not reserved [for example, the pseudo game number setting in step S1454 shown in FIG. 54 is not executed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the execution of the first event is reserved or not reserved depending on the operation mode, so that processing according to the operation mode is performed.

Also,
“The first event is an event indicating that the benefit is awarded [for example, an event where bonus symbols line up on the winning line].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, when the second control that is more disadvantageous than the first control is executed, the inconsistency that the first event indicating that the benefit is granted occurs is avoided. It is possible to prevent this and provide a natural game progression.

Also,
"The first event is a reel action that indicates that the bonus will be awarded [for example, a pseudo game of BB or RB that can be pseudo-stopped by lining up bonus symbols on a winning line].
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, when the second control, which is more disadvantageous than the first control, is executed on the reel that the player is paying attention to, the action effect indicating that the benefit will be awarded is not executed. This makes it possible to provide a more natural game progression.

Note that the first event may be a pseudo game that can accept the stop operation, or an automatic stop game that does not accept the stop operation.

Also,
``Until the execution of the first event is reserved, a game in which the execution of the first event can be reserved [for example, a reserved game in which the bonus type is "1" or "2" in the bonus lottery] is executed repeatedly [for example, the repetition of FIG. 58(k)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine can provide the player with an opportunity to execute the first event, and can prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged.

Also,
``If a reservation is made with content related to an event different from the first event [for example, content where the bonus symbols are not aligned with the winning line], and the stop operation is performed in the recommended operation mode in the certain game, the content is changed to the content of executing the first event [for example, the setting of the pseudo game number in step S1454 shown in FIG. 54], and when the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode in the certain game, the content is changed to [For example, step S1454 shown in FIG. 54 is not executed and the pseudo game number set to "1" in step S1433 shown in FIG. 53 is used],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the reservation of the content may be maintained or changed to the content of executing the first event depending on the actual operation mode of the stop operation in the certain game.

By first reserving content related to an event different from the first event, and then responding later according to the operation mode, the processing load may be reduced and processing speed may be improved.

Note that the content regarding an event different from the first event may be, for example, content such as not performing a reel effect.

Also,
" Equipped with a display means [e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157],
The display means is a means for displaying a display [for example, an operation recommendation display REC] recommending a stop operation in the recommended operation mode when the stop operation is performed in the irregular operation mode in the certain game.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows players to understand how to operate it in a way that will not put them at a disadvantage.

Also,
“The first event is an action performance of the reels [for example, a pseudo game] in which the first symbol [for example, a bonus symbol (BB symbol or RB symbol)] is aligned.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The alignment of the symbols on the reels is easily understood by the player as an event that leads to the granting of benefits. According to this gaming machine, when the second control, which is more disadvantageous than the first control, is executed, the reel movement performance in which the first symbols are aligned is not performed, so the second control is more disadvantageous than the first control. This is consistent with the case where the second control is executed, and a natural game progression can be provided.

In addition,
"The first event is an event that, when occurring, causes a transition to the first gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The first event is a reel performance that is executed when the bonus is awarded.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

According to this gaming machine, when the second control, which is more disadvantageous than the first control, is executed, it is possible to prevent the spinning performance that leads to awarding of benefits from being performed.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely a list of the most preferred functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. May be applied. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, constituent elements included only in each description of the embodiment, modifications, various examples, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. However, it still stands as a cohesive technical idea.

<<Fourth embodiment>>
A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 60. Figure 60 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 60 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .

From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions from a symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. . By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols.

Note that as such a display device, in addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be employed. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are arranged at the center of the main body 101, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) in an internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that if you win a replay (replay), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, you can play the current game again (no need to insert medals). This is a lamp to notify people.

The bet button 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The performance button 156 is an operation means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured to be pressed and operated by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, but may be configured with levers, touch panels, etc., or may include a plurality of operating means.

The medal slot 141 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet button 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the stored coin count display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout coin count display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet button 132 is operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are called the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order (or push order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) left → center → right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left → right → center operation order (left center center or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order ( (center left/right or CLR), (4) center → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL), (5) right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left There are six types of operation orders (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided below the stop buttons 137 to 139. Side lamps 144, 654 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game.

A panel unit 750 (details will be described later) is disposed above the front door 102, and a transmissive liquid crystal display device 157 is disposed below the panel unit 750 in front of the reels 110 to 112.

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Further, the location where the panel unit 750 is provided is not limited to this example, and may be provided at the bottom of the front door 102, for example.

Inside the main body 101, there are provided a setting key that can be turned on and off by rotating it, and a setting switch that can be pressed down to change settings (change settings) or check settings. The setting key is an operating means for starting to change settings (settings 1 to 6 in this example) or check settings, and the setting switch is one of the setting means that can set one of multiple settings.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 61. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupts is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. There are two types of methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, The status of the sensors, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 132 sensor is installed on the mebet button 132, and detects an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into a game as medals. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 651 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. , this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program, data, etc. for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, panel lighting board 664 of the panel unit 750) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. etc.) are connected.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a production button sensor 430 that can detect the pressing operation of the production button 156 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. ing. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls including display control of the performance image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as the "liquid crystal display device 157"). Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), to which a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Panel shadow prevention structure>
Next, the shadow prevention structure of the panel 652 will be explained, but prior to that explanation, the panel unit 750 will be explained using FIG. 62.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/panel unit>
62(a) is an exploded perspective view showing the main members constituting the panel unit 750, and FIG. 62(b) is an external perspective view of the panel unit 750 seen from the front side. Figure (c) is an external perspective view of the panel unit 750 viewed from the back side.

The panel unit 750 includes a plate-shaped panel 652, a panel lighting reflector 658 arranged on the back side of the panel 652, a panel lighting board 664 on which a plurality of LEDs 664a are mounted, and a panel partition that supports the lower part of the panel 652. 656.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/panel unit/panel>
The panel 652 is a member (first member) through which at least part of the light emitted from the panel illumination board 664 (light emitting means) can pass through, and in this example, the front surface 652a is decorated (letters, figures, symbols, It is composed of a colored semi-transparent plate-shaped member decorated with patterns (patterns, characters, etc.).

The "first member" according to the present invention is not limited to a decorated, colored, translucent plate-like member, but may be undecorated, may be partially made of a light-transmitting material and partially made of a light-impermeable material, or may not be a plate-like member.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/Panel unit/Panel lighting reflector>
The panel lighting reflector 658 is a member (second member) that supports the panel (first member) 652, and in this example, includes a plate-shaped base portion 658a having a plurality of lighting board mounting portions 658a1, A plate-shaped wall portion 658b extending in the thickness direction with the outer edge of the base portion 658a as a base end, a panel partition attachment portion 658c provided below the outer edge of the base portion 658a, and a panel partition attachment portion 658c provided above the outer edge of the base portion 658a. and an upper production unit attachment part 658d. Note that the detailed structure of this panel illumination reflector 658 will be described later.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/Panel unit/Panel lighting board>
The panel lighting board 664 (light emitting means) includes a plurality of LEDs 664a capable of emitting light toward the panel 652. The panel lighting board 664 (light emitting means) is screwed to a lighting board attachment portion 658a1 of the panel lighting reflector 658, and is fixed to a base portion 658a of the panel lighting reflector 658 with the plurality of LEDs 664a directed toward the panel 652.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/panel unit/panel partition>
The panel partition 656 is a horizontally long rod-shaped member that can support the panel 652 from below. (not shown).

With the bottom of the panel 652 supported by the panel support 656a, the panel partition 656 is screwed to the panel partition mounting portion 658c of the panel lighting reflector 658 via the reflector mounting portion (not shown), and is fixed to the lower edge of the panel lighting reflector 658.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/Detailed structure of panel lighting reflector>
Next, the detailed structure of the panel illumination reflector 658 will be described using FIG. 63.

FIG. 63(a) is a side view of the panel unit 750, FIG. 63(b) is an external perspective view of the panel unit 750 with the panel 652 removed, viewed diagonally from below, and FIG. 63(c) is a side view of the panel unit 750. This is an external perspective view of the same state as seen diagonally from above.

A wall portion 658b erected on the outer edge of the base portion 658a of the panel lighting reflector 658 has a contact portion 658b1 that contacts the panel (first member) 652 and a wall portion 658b that does not contact the panel (first member) 652. It is configured to include a contact portion 658b2 and a partially chamfered chamfered portion 658b3.

The contact portion 658b1 of the wall portion 658b functions as a portion that comes into contact with the back surface 652b of the panel 652 and supports the back surface 652b of the panel 652 when the panel unit 750 is assembled.

On the other hand, the non-contact portion 658b2 of the wall portion 658b is structured such that the tip of the contact portion 658b1 is cut out, and the maximum height of the non-contact portion 658b2 is lower than the maximum height of the contact portion 658b1, and is configured so as not to contact the back surface 652b of the panel 652 when the panel unit 750 is assembled.

In other words, the wall portion 658b has a shape with a recessed portion, and abuts and supports the back surface 652b of the panel 652 at a portion that does not have a recessed portion. In other words, the wall portion 658b includes a first wall region (abutting portion 658b1) that faces (extends) toward the panel 652, and a first wall region that faces (extends) toward the panel 652 from the first wall region. It can also be said that it has a second wall region (non-contacting portion 658b2) that does not face (extend).

Note that it is not necessary that all the contact parts are in contact with the panel 652, and a structure in which some of the contact parts are in contact with the panel 652 may be used. Further, a gap may be provided between the panel 652 and the abutting portion, and by creating the gap, when an impact is applied to the panel 653, transmission of the impact to the panel lighting reflector 658 is softened. Can be done.

Note that the maximum height of the non-contacting portion 658b2 may be appropriately designed depending on whether or not a shadow is generated on the panel 652, and may be approximately 3/4 of the maximum height of the contacting portion 658b1. , may be about 1/2. Further, in this example, the contact portion 658b1 and the non-contact portion 658b2 are integrally formed, but they may be formed separately.

As shown in the external perspective views of FIGS. 63(b) and 63(c), the panel illumination reflector 658 is made of a polygonal member having a plurality of (six in this example) corner portions CP, and has a contact portion 658b1. are arranged at a portion including the plurality of corner portions CP, while the non-contact portions 658b2 are arranged approximately symmetrically in the longitudinal direction of the panel lighting reflector 658 at a portion excluding the plurality of corner portions CP. It is located.

According to this example, it is possible to uniformly suppress the occurrence of shadows on the left and right sides of the first member (panel 652 in this example), and the shadow of the second member (panel illumination reflector 658 in this example) can be prevented from forming on the first member (panel 652 in this example). The design of the first member can be ensured while preventing a situation where the image is reflected in the first member. Additionally, even if an external impact is applied to the front of the first member, the impact force can be dispersed to the left and right, preventing damage to the first member and ensuring durability. .

Furthermore, by arranging the abutting portion at the corner of the second member (in this example, the panel lighting reflector 658), the strength of the second member can be increased, and the second member allows the first member to (In this example, panel 652) can be stably supported.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), the chamfered portion 658b3 of the wall portion 658b has a structure in which the tip of the abutment portion 658b1 is beveled, and when the panel unit 750 is assembled, the tip abuts against the rear surface 652b of the panel 652, and the portion other than the tip does not abut against the rear surface 652b of the panel 652. In this example, only one chamfered portion 658b3 is disposed in the center of the upper edge of the panel lighting reflector 658.

The panel 652 is a place where various decorations and characters are drawn, and in many cases, a conspicuous character or decoration is drawn in the center part. The chamfered portion 658b3 is located approximately at the center in the longitudinal direction of the panel 652, but if the chamfer is not chamfered at this location, a dark spot will also appear in the center of the panel, making the most conspicuous part of the panel look bad. turn into.

On the other hand, if this part is cut out like other non-contact parts, durability against impact cannot be ensured. Therefore, in this example, the appearance and durability of the panel 652 can be improved by chamfering the wall portion 658b at a location approximately at the longitudinal center of the panel 52.

According to this example, the second member (in this example, the panel lighting reflector 658) supports the first member (in this example, the panel 652) by the contact portion (tip portion) of the chamfered portion 658b3. While maintaining the function, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the second member from being reflected on the first member due to the non-contact portion (chamfered portion) of the chamfered portion 658b3. can.

Note that there may be no chamfered portion 658b3, or two or more chamfered portions 658b3 may be provided. Further, a part or all of the non-contacting portion 658b2 may be configured with a chamfered portion 658b3.

<Panel shadow prevention structure/functions of non-contact parts and chamfered parts>
Next, the functions of the non-contact portion 658b2 and the chamfered portion 658b3 in the panel unit 750 will be explained using FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b).

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the panel unit 750, and FIG. 64(b) is a side sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 64(a), and an enlarged view of the main parts thereof.

The light emitted from the LED 664a of the panel lighting board 664 toward the rear surface 652b of the panel 652 can be classified into light that directly reaches the rear surface 652b of the panel 652 and light that is reflected by the wall portion 658b of the panel lighting reflector 658 and reaches the rear surface 652b of the panel 652.

For example, in FIG. 64(b), the light indicated by the symbol L1 is light that heads in the opposite direction from the wall 658b of the panel illumination reflector 658 and directly reaches the back surface 652b of the panel 652, and the light indicated by the symbol L2. is light that passes above the non-contact portion 658b2 of the panel lighting reflector 658 and directly reaches the edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652; This light is reflected by the portion 658b2 and reaches the back surface 652b of the panel 652.

In the conventional game machine, the wall portion 658b of the panel lighting reflector 658 is composed of only a portion corresponding to the contact portion 658b1 of this example, and does not have the non-contact portion 658b2 and the chamfered portion 658b3 of this example. The light L1 shown in 63(b) can directly reach the back surface 652b of the panel 652, but the light L2 shown in FIG. The edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652 cannot be directly reached.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the quantity (light amount) of light L2 that directly reaches the edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652 is relatively small, and the amount of light L2 that directly reaches the edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652 is relatively small. There was a problem in that the edges of the panel 652b became dark and the appearance of the panel 652 from the front became poor.

In this regard, the panel illumination reflector 658 according to this example has a non-contacting part 658b2 that does not contact the panel 652 and a chamfered part 658b3 that does not partially contact the panel 652. L2 passes through the gap (space) formed between the panel 652 and the non-contacting part 658b2 (or between the panel 652 and the chamfered part 658b3), and directly touches the edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652. , and the quantity (light amount) of light L2 illuminating the edge of the back surface 652b of the panel 652 can be increased compared to conventional game machines.

According to this example, the second member (in this example, panel lighting reflector 658) has a non-contacting portion 658b2 that does not come into contact with the first member (in this example, panel 652). A part of the light emitted toward the member is reflected by the second member, causing a shadow of the second member to appear on the first member and being reflected in the first member. This can be prevented and the appearance of the first member can be improved without interfering with the design of the first member.

Furthermore, while maintaining the function of supporting the first member (panel 652 in this example) with the second member (panel lighting reflector 658 in this example) by the contact portion 658b1, the non-contact portion 658b2 This can prevent a situation in which the shadow of the second member is reflected on the first member. Further, since the non-contacting portion 658b2 has a structure obtained by cutting out the contacting portion 658b1, the structure of the second member does not become complicated, and the second member can be easily processed.

<Shadow prevention structure for panels/materials surrounding the panel unit>
Next, the members around the panel unit 750 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 64(c) is a partially enlarged view showing the panel unit 750 attached to the upper production unit 650, with the panel 652 not shown.

When the panel unit 750 is attached to the upper production unit 650, both sides of the panel unit 750 (panel 652 and panel lighting reflector 658) in the longitudinal direction are attached to the back side of the side lamp cover 654a of the side lamp 654. 654a (a position overlapping in the front-rear direction). In other words, the side lamp cover 654a is arranged to protrude further forward than the panel unit 750.

In addition, in the same state, the upper side of the panel unit 750 (panel 652 and panel lighting reflector 658) in the transverse direction is placed on the back side of the effect cover 662 of the upper effect unit 650 at a position overlapping with this effect cover 662 (in the front and back direction). The lower side of the panel unit 750 (panel 652 and panel lighting reflector 658) in the transverse direction is placed on the back side of the panel partition 656, and the lower side of the panel unit 750 (panel 652 and panel lighting reflector 658) is placed on the back side of the panel partition 656, and the panel unit 750 (panel 652 and panel lighting reflector 658) is placed in a position that overlaps with this panel partition 656 (a position that overlaps in the front and back direction). will be placed in That is, the effect cover 662 is arranged to protrude further forward than the panel unit 750.

According to this example, since the longitudinal and lateral edges of the panel 652 can be covered with other members (in this example, the side lamp cover 654a, the effect cover 662, and the panel partition 656), the second Even if the shadow of the member (in this example, the panel lighting reflector 658) is reflected on the edge of the first member (in this example, the panel 652), the reflection of the shadow is made inconspicuous. Therefore, the appearance of the first member can be improved without interfering with the design of the first member.

In this example, the surface of the edge near the panel unit 750 of the side lamp cover 654a (third member) and the surface of the edge near the panel unit 750 of the production cover 662 (third member) include: It is plated.

According to this example, the plated third member (in this example, the side lamp cover 654a and the effect cover 662) is provided, and at least a portion of the periphery of the first member (in this example, the panel 652) is provided. Since the third member is disposed in the arcade, the light from fluorescent lamps installed in the amusement arcade can be reflected on the third member and irradiated around the first member. Even when the shadow of a member (in this example, panel lighting reflector 658) is reflected on the edge of a first member (in this example, panel 652), the reflection of the shadow is made inconspicuous. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the first member without interfering with the design of the first member.

The "third member" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, plating may be applied to either the surface of the edge of the side lamp cover 654a near the panel unit 750 or the surface of the edge of the performance cover 662 near the panel unit 750, or the surface of the edge of the panel partition 656 near the panel unit 750.

Further, an example in which a plated third member (in this example, the side lamp cover 654a and the effect cover 662) is provided at least in part around the first member (in this example, the panel 652). However, in addition to (or instead of) disposing the plated third member, at least a portion of the front periphery of the first member (panel 652 in this example) is provided. The panel 652 may be provided with a lining so that the shadow at the edge of the panel 652 is not noticeable.

<Summary of Panel Shadow Prevention Structure>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 60) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the panel 652 shown in FIG. 62(a)), a second member (for example, the panel illumination reflector 658 shown in FIG. 62(a)) supporting at least a part of the first member, and a light emitting means (for example, the panel illumination board 664, LED 664a shown in FIG. 62(a)) capable of irradiating the first member supported by the second member, wherein the first member is capable of transmitting at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and the second member has a first portion (for example, the contact portion 658b1 shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c)) facing the first member, and a second portion (for example, the non-contact portion 658b2 shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c)) not facing the first member as much as the first portion.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the second member has a non-contact portion that does not contact the first member. This prevents a situation in which a portion of the light emitted toward the first member is reflected by the second member, causing a shadow of the second member to be cast on the first member and reflected in the first member. This improves the appearance of the first member without compromising the design of the first member.

Further, the first portion is a contact portion that comes into contact with the first member, for example, the contact portion 658b1 shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c), and the second portion is The second member is a non-contacting portion that does not contact the first member (for example, the non-contacting portion 658b2 shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c)), and the second member is a non-contacting portion that does not contact the first member. has a wall portion (for example, the wall portion 658b shown in FIG. 63(a)) formed to protrude toward the contact portion, the wall portion includes the contact portion and the non-contact portion, and may have a structure in which the contact portion is cut out.

With this configuration, while the contact portion maintains the function of supporting the first member with the second member, the non-contact portion prevents the second member from casting a shadow on the first member. It is possible to prevent situations in which images are reflected in the image. Moreover, since the non-contacting part has a structure obtained by cutting out the abutting part, the structure of the second member does not become complicated, and the second member can be easily processed.

Further, the non-contact portions may be arranged symmetrically in the longitudinal direction of the second member.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of shadows uniformly on both the left and right sides of the first member, and to ensure the design of the first member while preventing the shadow of the second member from being reflected on the first member. Furthermore, even if an external impact is applied to the front of the first member, the impact force can be dispersed to the left and right, preventing damage to the first member and ensuring its durability.

Further, the second member is formed of a polygonal member having a plurality of corners (for example, corner portions CP shown in FIGS. 63(b) and 63(c)), and the abutting portion The non-contact portion may be placed at a portion other than the plurality of corners.

With such a configuration, the strength of the second member can be increased by arranging the contact portion at the corner of the second member, and the second member can stabilize the first member. can be supported.

Further, a plated third member (for example, the side lamp cover 654a and the effect cover 662 shown in FIG. 64(c)) is provided, and the third member is provided on at least a part of the vicinity of the first member. The following members may be provided.

With such a configuration, light from fluorescent lights or the like installed in the game parlor can be reflected on the third member and irradiated around the first member, and the shadow of the second member can be reflected on the third member. Even if the shadow is reflected on the edge of the first member, it can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the first member can be improved without interfering with the design of the first member. can do.

<<Fifth embodiment>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be explained. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the slot machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of the slot machine 1100 according to the fifth embodiment viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1100 includes a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 that is attached to the front of the main body 1101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1101.

A lower panel unit 800 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps, etc. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the lower panel unit 800. It is being

<Lower panel unit>
Next, the lower panel unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 65 and 66. Figure 66 is an exploded perspective view showing the members constituting the lower panel unit 800 in an exploded state.

The lower panel unit 800 includes a light-transmitting panel 810 (cover member 812, base member 814) having light-transmitting properties, a decorative sheet 830 disposed on the light-transmitting panel 810, and the light-transmitting panel 810 and the decorative sheet. and a panel light source unit 850 disposed behind the panel light source unit 830.

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel>
Next, the light-transmitting panel 810 will be explained.

The translucent panel 810 is composed of a plate-shaped cover member (first member) 812 and a plate-shaped base member (second member) 814 that can be fitted into the cover member 812.

The light-transmitting panel 810 of this example is made of a colorless and transparent plastic member. Note that the material of the "transparent panel" according to the present invention is not limited to colorless and transparent plastic, but may also be, for example, colored transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, etc. good. That is, the "transparent panel" according to the present invention may be any member as long as it has translucency.

Furthermore, the "transparent panel" according to the present invention is not limited to being composed of two members, but may be composed of one member (for example, only the cover member 812), or may be composed of three or more members. It may be composed of members. Further, the "transparent panel" according to the present invention is not limited to a member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but may have a triangular or square shape when viewed from the front, or a polygonal shape larger than a quadrangle. You can.

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/cover member (first member)>
Next, the cover member (first member) 812 of the light-transmitting panel 810 will be explained.

The cover member 812 is made of a polygonal dish-shaped member having a plurality of sides (four in this example), and in this example, includes a plate-shaped main body 812a that is rectangular in front view, and an edge of this main body 812a. The wall portion 812b (812bU, 812bD, 812bR, 812bL) is formed to protrude from one side in the thickness direction of the main body portion 812a with the base end at the base end.

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/cover member (first member)/main body>
Next, the main body portion 812a of the cover member 812 will be explained.

As shown in Figures 65 and 66, the front surface of the main body 812a of the cover member 812 is configured to have a smooth surface area (first area) 812aF and a rough surface area (second area) 812aS.

The smooth surface area 812aF is an area (region) formed in a smooth surface shape, and is an area whose surface is smoother (fine) than the rough surface area 812aS. The smooth surface area 812aF is an area with higher visibility than the rough surface area 812aS, and when viewing the rear through the smooth surface area 812aF, the translucent panel The rear visibility of 810 is high and it is easy to see the rear.

On the other hand, the rough surface area 812aS is an area (region) formed in a rough surface, and is an area with a rougher and coarser surface than the smooth surface area 812aF. The rough surface area 812aS is an area with lower visibility than the smooth surface area 812aF, and visibility to the rear of the translucent panel 810 is lower when viewing the rear through the rough surface area 812aS than when viewing the rear through the smooth surface area 812aF, making it difficult to see the rear.

The rough surface area 812aS only needs to be an area with lower visibility than the smooth surface area 812aF, and the method of forming the rough surface area 812aS is not particularly limited. There is a method of forming a rough surface area having an uneven shape by processing, thermal transfer of unevenness, shrinking processing, surface treatment, etc., or by pasting tape etc. on the front or back of the cover member 812 to make the rough surface area smaller than other areas. A method of reducing visibility and forming a rough surface area, a method of reducing visibility more than other areas by applying paint or the like to the front or back surface of the cover member 812, and forming a rough surface area; Examples include a method of joining a separate member with a smooth surface to a member with a rough surface.

FIG. 67(a) is a front view of the cover member 812, showing an example of the smooth surface area 812aF and the rough surface area 812aS of the main body portion 812a.

In this example, a rough surface area 812aS is formed in an annular shape along the outer edge of the main body portion 812a, and a rectangular area located inside this annular rough surface area 812aS is all a smooth surface area 812aF. ing.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the rough surface area 812aS is composed of a linear upper rough surface area 812aSU formed along the upper edge of the main body 812a from one end to the other, a linear lower rough surface area 812aSD formed along the lower edge of the main body 812a from one end to the other, a linear right rough surface area 812aSR formed along the right edge of the main body 812a from one end to the other, and a linear left rough surface area 812aSL formed along the left edge of the main body 812a from one end to the other.

If the maximum width of the upper rough surface area 812aSU is α1, the maximum width of the lower rough surface area 812aSD is α2, the maximum width of the right rough surface area 812aSR is β1, and the maximum width of the left rough surface area 812aSL is β2, in this example, the widths are configured to increase in the following order: maximum width β1 of the right rough surface area 812aSR and maximum width β2 of the left rough surface area 812aSL, maximum width α1 of the upper rough surface area 812aSU, and maximum width α2 of the lower rough surface area 812aSD (β1 = β2 < α1 < α2).

FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between slot machine 1100 and player USR.

Generally, when a player USR plays a game while sitting in front of the slot machine 1100, the player USR looks down on the transparent panel 810 arranged at the bottom of the slot machine 110. Therefore, the range visible to the player USR is wider on the lower side of the cover member 812 of the light-transmitting panel 810 than on the upper side.

According to this example, since the maximum width α2 of the lower rough surface area 812aSD is larger than the maximum width α1 of the upper rough surface area 812aSU of the cover member 812 (α1<α2), the upper rough surface area 812aSU The lower rough surface area 812aSD can reduce (obstruct) the visibility of the range visible to the player USR. Therefore, the visibility of members and parts arranged behind the translucent panel 810 can be reduced, making it difficult for players sitting in front of the gaming machine to see them, so that the appearance of the translucent panel 810 can be reduced. can be improved.

The size and shape of the rough surface area 812aS are not limited to this example. For example, the maximum width α1 of the upper rough surface area 812aSU and the maximum width α2 of the lower rough surface area 812aSD may be the same width (α2 = α1), or the maximum width β1 of the right rough surface area 812aSR and the maximum width β2 of the left rough surface area 812aSL may be different widths (β1 ≒ β2), but it is preferable that the maximum width α2 of the lower rough surface area 812aSD is larger than the maximum widths of the other rough surface areas.

Further, the rough surface area 812aS may be configured only by the upper rough surface area 812aSU and the lower rough surface area 812aSD, without forming the right rough surface area 812aSR and the left rough surface area 812aSL (β1=β2=0). . That is, the rough surface area (second area) is provided along the edge of the light-transmitting panel (for example, at least one, more than one, or all of the sides of the light-transmitting panel 810). All you have to do is stay there.

In addition, in this example, a linear rough surface area (second area) is formed along the edge of the translucent panel from one end to the other end, but the "second area" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a curved rough surface area (second area) may be formed along the edge of the translucent panel from one end to the other end, or when there is a member or part behind the translucent panel whose visibility is to be reduced (hidden), a rough surface area (second area) may be formed only in front of the member or part. Also, a third area (for example, an area painted black with black paint) that is less visible than the rough surface area (second area) may be formed.

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/cover member (first member)/wall>
Next, the wall portion 812b of the cover member 812 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 66, the wall portion 812b of the cover member 812 includes an upper wall portion 812bU protruding from the upper edge of the main body portion 812a, and a lower wall portion 812bD protruding from the lower edge of the main body portion 812a. It is constituted by a right side wall part 812bR that is formed to protrude from the right edge of the main body part 812a when viewed from the front, and a left side wall part 812bL that is formed to protrude from the left edge of the main body part 812a when viewed from the front.

Two engaging parts (fixing parts) 816 that can be engaged with the engaging convex part 820 of the base member 814 are formed on the upper wall part 812bU. The engaging portion (fixing portion) 816 of this example has a through hole through which the engaging convex portion 820 of the base member 812 can pass, and the engaging convex portion 820 of the base member 812 is inserted into the through hole downwardly. The base member 812 can be fixed to the back surface of the cover member 812 by engaging the base member 812 with the cover member 812.

Note that the "fixing part" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and is used to fix a first member (in this example, cover member 812) and a second member (in this example, base member 814). Any part of the body may be used. Therefore, the number, arrangement location, structure, etc. of the fixing parts are not particularly limited. For example, they may be composed of an engaging claw and an engaging hole that can be engaged with the engaging claw, or they may be constructed using screws or the like. It may be something.

In addition, near both ends of the upper wall portion 812bU and the lower wall portion 812bD, there are formed engagement claw portions (mounting portions) 818 that can engage with the translucent panel support holes (not shown) formed in the front door 1102.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 66, the engaging claw portion (attachment portion) 818 of this example is a plate-shaped protrusion 818a that is formed to protrude toward one side in the thickness direction of the main body portion 812a with the main body portion 812a as the base end. The protrusion 818a has a triangular claw portion 818b which is formed to protrude downward with the tip of the protrusion 818a as the base end. The light-transmitting panel 810 can be attached to the front door 1102 by engaging the engaging claw portion (attachment portion) 818 of the cover member 812 with the light-transmitting panel support hole of the front door 1102.

Note that the "attachment part" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and is a part for attaching a light-transmitting panel (in this example, light-transmitting panel 810) to a front door (in this example, front door 1102). Good to have. Therefore, the number, location, structure, etc. of the attachment parts are not particularly limited. For example, they may be composed of an engagement pin and an engagement hole that can be engaged with the engagement pin, or they may be configured using screws or the like. It may be.

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/base member (second member)>
Next, the base member (second member) 814 of the light-transmitting panel 810 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 66, the base member 814 is a polygonal dish-shaped member having an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the cover member 812 and having a plurality of sides (four in this example). The base member 814 of this example includes a plate-shaped main body 814a and a plurality of (four in this example) walls formed protruding from one side in the thickness direction of the main body 814a with the edge of the main body 814a as the base end. 814b (814bU, 814bD, 814bR, 814bL).

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/base member (second member)/main body>
Next, the main body portion 814a of the base member 814 will be explained.

The front surface of the main body portion 814a of the base member 814 is composed of only a smooth surface area (first area) 812aF.

The configuration of the base member 814 is not limited to this example, and may be formed with a rough surface area similar to the cover member 812, or may be composed of only a rough surface area. Also, it may be formed using a material different from that of the cover member 812 (e.g., paper, wood, metal, etc.).

<Lower panel unit/transparent panel/base member (second member)/wall>
Next, the wall portion 814b of the base member 814 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 66, the wall portion 814b of the base member 814 includes an upper wall portion 814bU that projects from the upper edge of the main body portion 814a, and a lower wall portion 814bD that projects from the lower edge of the main body portion 814a. It is constituted by a right side wall part 814bR that is formed to protrude from the right side edge of the main body part 814a when viewed from the front, and a left side wall part 814bL that is formed to protrude from the left side edge of the main body part 814a when viewed from the front.

The upper wall portion 814bU is formed with an engagement protrusion (fixing portion) 820 that can engage with the engagement portion 816 of the cover member 812. In this example, the engagement protrusion 820 is a cubic-shaped portion that protrudes upward from the upper wall portion 814b as its base end.

The base member 812 can be fixed to the back surface of the cover member 812 by engaging the engagement convex portion 820 of the base member 812 from below with the through hole of the engagement portion (fixing portion) 816 of the cover member 812. It is.

<Lower panel unit/decorative sheet>
Next, the decorative sheet 830 will be described.

The decorative sheet 830 is a plate-shaped member that is decorated and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the cover member 812 and base member 814 of the translucent panel 810.

The decorative sheet 830 in this example is composed of a colored, opaque plastic member. Note that the material of the "decorative sheet" according to the present invention is not limited to colored, opaque plastic, and may be, for example, colored, translucent plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, metal, paper, wood, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the decorative sheet 830 is supported so as to be sandwiched between the back surface of the cover member 812 of the light-transmitting panel 810 and the front surface of the base member 814.

The method of supporting the decorative sheet 830 is not limited to this example. For example, the decorative sheet 830 may be attached to the back surface of the cover member 812 of the translucent panel 810, or a fixing portion to which the decorative sheet 830 can be detached may be provided on the back surface of the cover member 812 of the translucent panel 810. In addition, the translucent panel 810 may be provided with an internal space in which the decorative sheet 830 can be placed, and the decorative sheet 830 may be configured to be slidable into the internal space from the side or top surface of the translucent panel 810.

FIG. 67(b) is a front view showing an example of the decorative sheet 830.

Although the display displayed on the decorative sheet 830 is not particularly limited, in this example, the decorative sheet 830 is provided with a first display FD and a second display SD larger than the first display.

The first display FD is a display for announcing various information to players. "Please be careful not to stare into the light") and a copyright display FD2 that informs players of where the copyright belongs (in this example, a copyright mark and the text "〇〇 Co., Ltd." A character string display) is printed in an area on the front surface of the decorative sheet 830 that does not overlap the rough surface area 812bS of the transparent panel 810 when viewed from the front.

In this example, displays (information) that are important to the player can be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rough surface area, so the visibility of the display is not reduced and it is possible to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player.

Note that the first display FD is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, a warning display to prevent getting addicted to the game, a display announcing a patent number, the company name of the manufacturer of the game machine, and the model name. , various certificate stamps, other non-decorative displays, or less decorative displays than the second display.

The second display SD is a decorative display, and in this example, the title display SD1 of the game machine (in this example, a display of the character string "Slot Daiden ~The Great Adventure of the Tono and the Old Man~"), The character display SD2 (illustrated display of the character's hall in this example) is printed in the front area of the decorative sheet 830, which partially overlaps the rough surface area 812bS of the transparent panel 810 when viewed from the front. .

The second display SD is not limited to this example, and may be printed, for example, in an area that does not overlap the rough surface area 812bS of the translucent panel 810 when viewed from the front, or may be a logo mark, another display that has decorativeness, or a display that is more decorative than the first display.

<Lower panel unit/panel light source unit 850>
Next, the panel light source unit 850 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 66, the panel light source unit 850 is a member disposed behind the light-transmitting panel 810, and includes a plurality of LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the light-transmitting panel 810. The panel light source unit 850 is fixed to the front door 1102 with screws, with the plurality of LEDs facing the light-transmitting panel 810.

<Lower panel unit/Summary>
Since the light-transmitting panel 810 is made of a colorless and transparent plastic member, it is placed behind the light-transmitting panel 810 when the decorative sheet 830 is not provided between the cover member 812 and the base member 814. , members such as the panel light source unit 850 and the front door 1102, and parts such as the engaging convex portion 820 (fixing portion) and the engaging claw portion 818 (attachment portion) of the transparent panel 810 are attached to the front through the transparent panel 810. It is visible from

On the other hand, when the decorative sheet 830 is disposed between the cover member 812 and the base member 814, the decorative sheet 830 prevents the members and parts (such as the panel light source unit 850 and the front Although it is possible to make members such as the door 1102 and parts such as the engaging convex portion 820 (fixing portion) and the engaging claw portion 818 (attachment portion) of the transparent panel 810 difficult to see from the front, it is possible to make it difficult to see from the front. Since the outer diameter is smaller than the outer diameter of the light-transmitting panel 810, the rear of the light-transmitting panel 810 cannot be completely hidden by the decorative sheet 830. On the other hand, by making the outer diameter of the decorative sheet 830 smaller than the outer diameter of the transparent panel 810, the decorative sheet 830 can be installed between the back surface of the cover member 812 of the transparent panel 810 and the front surface of the base member 814. It's getting easier.

In this regard, according to the present example, by providing the rough surface area 812aS (second area) on the light-transmitting panel 810, members and parts arranged behind the rough surface area 812aS (second area) can be visually recognized. Since it is possible to reduce the appearance of the translucent panel 810 and make it difficult for players sitting in front of the game machine to see it, the appearance of the translucent panel 810 can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to easily install the decorative sheet 830 while improving the appearance of the translucent panel 810 with the rough surface area 812aS.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 65) is equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties (for example, the light-transmitting panel 810 shown in FIG. 66). The light-transmitting panel has a first smooth area (e.g., the smooth area 812aF shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(a)) and a rough second area (e.g., The rough surface area 812aS shown in FIG. 66 and FIG. This game machine is characterized in that it is provided along at least two sides of the game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by providing the second area with a rough surface on the light-transmitting panel, members or parts arranged behind the second area (for example, the lighting panel, the light-transmitting The visibility of the panel's fixed portions, mounting portions, etc.) can be reduced, making it difficult for players sitting in front of the gaming machine to see, thereby improving the appearance of the translucent panel.
Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 65) is a game machine equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties (for example, the light-transmitting panel 810 shown in FIG. 66). , a decorative sheet, and the transparent panel has a first area (for example, the smooth surface area 812aF shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(a)) and a second area (for example, the smooth surface area 812aF shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(a)). ) has a rough surface area 812aS) shown in ) on the front surface, the second area has a rougher surface than the first area, and the second area has a rough surface area 812aS) shown in FIG. The decorative sheet is smaller than the light-transmitting panel, and the decorative sheet covers at least a portion of the first area and the second area behind the light-transmitting panel. The decorative sheet is visible from the front through the translucent panel, and the decorative sheet has a first display and a second display. A display is provided, the first display is provided at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the second area, and the second display is provided at a position that does not overlap with the second area. The game machine is characterized in that the first display is a character display, and the second display is a caution display.
Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 65) is a game machine equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties (for example, the light-transmitting panel 810 shown in FIG. 66). , a decorative sheet, and the transparent panel has a first area (for example, the smooth surface area 812aF shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(a)) and a second area (for example, the smooth surface area 812aF shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(a)). ) has a rough surface area 812aS) shown in ) on the front surface, the second area has a rougher surface than the first area, and the second area has a rough surface area 812aS) shown in FIG. The decorative sheet is smaller than the light-transmitting panel, and the decorative sheet covers at least a portion of the first area and the second area behind the light-transmitting panel. The decorative sheet is visible from the front through the translucent panel, and the decorative sheet has a first display and a second display. A display is provided, the first display is provided at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the second area, and the second display is provided at a position that does not overlap with the second area. The game machine is characterized in that the first display is a character display and the second display is an intellectual property related display.

Further, a decorated decorative sheet (for example, the decorative sheet 830 shown in FIGS. 66 and 67(b)) is provided, the decorative sheet is smaller than the transparent panel, and the decorative sheet is smaller than the transparent panel. At the rear of the panel, the decorative sheet is arranged at a position overlapping at least a portion of the first area and at least a portion of the second area, and the decorative sheet is visible from the front through the transparent panel. It may be.

With such a configuration, even if the decorative sheet does not cover the entire area behind the translucent panel, the second area can cover members or parts located behind the second area (for example, lighting). The visibility of the panel, the fixed part, the mounting part, etc. of the translucent panel can be reduced.

Further, the light-transmitting panel includes a first member (for example, a cover member 812 shown in FIG. 66) and a second member (for example, a base member cover member 814 shown in FIG. 66), and the decoration The sheet is disposed between the first member and the second member, and the light-transmitting panel has a fixing portion (for example, FIG. 66 (an engaging portion 816 and an engaging convex portion 820) shown in FIG. It may be.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the fixed part of the translucent panel can be reduced, making it difficult for players sitting in front of the gaming machine to see, thereby improving the appearance of the translucent panel. be able to.

The light-transmitting panel also includes a front door (for example, the front door 1102 shown in FIG. 66), and the light-transmitting panel has a mounting portion (for example, the engaging claw portion 818 shown in FIG. 66) for attaching the light-transmitting panel to the front door. ), and the attachment portion may be provided at an edge of the light-transmitting panel (for example, one of at least two sides of the light-transmitting panel 810).

With such a configuration, the visibility of the mounting portion of the translucent panel can be reduced, making it difficult for players sitting in front of the gaming machine to see it, thereby improving the appearance of the translucent panel. be able to.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 156 Production button 157 Production image display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Main control section 400 First sub-control section 500 Second sub-control section 652 Panel 658 Panel illumination reflector 700 Lens unit 702 Lens holder 704 Inner lens 706 Outer lens 708 Lens cover 750 Panel unit 800 Lower panel unit 810 Transparent panel 812 Cover Member 814 Base member 830 Decorative sheet

Claims (4)

A game machine equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties,
Equipped with a decorative sheet,
The light-transmitting panel has a first area and a second area on the front side,
The second area has a rougher surface than the first area,
The second area is provided along the edge of the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet is smaller than the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet is arranged behind the transparent panel at a position overlapping with at least a portion of the first area and at least a portion of the second area,
The decorative sheet is visible from the front through the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet has a first indication and a second indication,
The first display is placed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the second area,
The second display is placed at a position that does not overlap with the second area,
The first display is a character display,
The second display is a warning display;
A game machine characterized by: A game machine equipped with a light-transmitting panel having light-transmitting properties,
Equipped with a decorative sheet,
The light-transmitting panel has a first area and a second area on the front side,
The second area has a rougher surface than the first area,
The second area is provided along the edge of the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet is smaller than the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet is arranged behind the transparent panel at a position overlapping with at least a portion of the first area and at least a portion of the second area,
The decorative sheet is visible from the front through the transparent panel,
The decorative sheet has a first indication and a second indication,
The first display is placed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the second area,
The second display is placed at a position that does not overlap with the second area,
The first display is a character display,
the second indication is an intellectual property related indication;
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 ,
The light-transmitting panel includes a first member and a second member,
the decorative sheet is arranged between the first member and the second member,
The light-transmitting panel includes a fixing part for fixing the first member and the second member,
The fixing part is provided at an edge of the transparent panel,
A game machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Equipped with a front door,
The light-transmitting panel includes a mounting portion for attaching the light-transmitting panel to the front door,
The mounting portion is provided at an edge of the transparent panel,
A game machine characterized by: